M01a30 40e 02 PRT06

Reference
Human Interface Station Vol.2
IM 33M01A30-40E
IM 33M01A30-40E
2nd Edition
TocE-1
CENTUM VP
Reference
Human Interface Station Vol.2
IM 33M01A30-40E 2nd Edition
CONTENTS
PART-E Human Interface Station
E9. Message Processing...............................................................................E9-1
E9.1 Message Types.................................................................................................E9-3
E9.2 Message Output Actions...............................................................................E9-25
E9.3 Message Acknowledgment . ........................................................................E9-35
E9.4 Equalizing Message Status among Multiple HISs......................................E9-37
E9.5 Line Printer Output........................................................................................E9-39
E10. Alarm Processing..................................................................................E10-1
E10.1 Overview of Alarm Processing.....................................................................E10-2
E10.2 Alarm Priority.................................................................................................E10-7
E10.3 Alarm Output Actions................................................................................. E10-10
E10.3.1 Alarm Flashing Action...................................................................E10-11
E10.3.2 Repeated Warning Alarm............................................................. E10-14
E10.3.3 Alarm Inhibition (AOF)................................................................. E10-17
E10.4 Alarm Status Character String and Alarm Processing........................... E10-19
E10.5 Advanced Alarm Filter................................................................................ E10-29
E10.5.1 Advanced Alarm Filter Overview................................................. E10-30
E10.5.2 Using Advanced Alarm Filters...................................................... E10-32
E10.5.3 Advanced Alarm Filter Window.................................................... E10-37
E10.5.4 Syntax of Advanced Alarm Filter Rules....................................... E10-42
E11. Consolidated Historical Message.......................................................E11-1
E11.1 Setting Up Consolidated Historical Message.............................................E11-6
E11.1.1 Setting Up the Storage Destination Folder for Historical
Message Save Files.......................................................................E11-8
E11.1.2 Creating a Server Storage Definition File.....................................E11-22
E11.1.3 Setting Up the Server Storage Definition File...............................E11-23
E11.1.4 Troubleshooting............................................................................E11-25
E11.1.5 Settings for Saving Files in PDF Format and for E-Signatures....E11-27
E11.2 Historical Viewer..........................................................................................E11-29
E11.2.1 Component Elements of Historical Viewer...................................E11-30
E11.2.2 Search Dialog Box........................................................................E11-35
E11.2.3 HIS Usage History Dialog Box......................................................E11-45
E11.2.4 Batch Usage History Dialog Box...................................................E11-49
IM 33M01A30-40E 2nd Edition : Jun.05,2009-00

TocE-2
E11.3 Searching, Printing and Saving Historical Messages into
a PDF File......................................................................................................E11-53
E11.3.1 Searching for Historical Messages...............................................E11-55
E11.3.2 Printing Historical Messages........................................................E11-56
E11.3.3 Saving Historical Messages in a PDF File....................................E11-58
E11.3.4 E-Signatures of the Creator and Approver...................................E11-59
E12. Consolidated Alarm Management Software......................................E12-1
E12.1 Functions of CAMS for HIS...........................................................................E12-4
E12.2 Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS...............................................................E12-6
E12.2.1 Action Modes for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS..............E12-7
E12.2.2 Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS..........E12-8
E12.2.3 Layout of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS........................ E12-10
E12.2.4 Changing the Layout of the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS............................................................................................... E12-18
E12.2.5 Notes on Using the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.............. E12-20
E12.3 Screening Alarms....................................................................................... E12-21
E12.3.1 Shelving....................................................................................... E12-22
E12.3.2 Filtering........................................................................................ E12-26
E12.3.3 Dynamic Filtering......................................................................... E12-28
E12.3.4 Alarm Tree View (Eclipse Function)............................................. E12-31
E12.3.5 Suppression................................................................................. E12-32
E12.4 Acknowledgment of Alarms in CAMS for HIS......................................... E12-35
E12.5 Customizing the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.............................. E12-38
E12.5.1 Customizing General items on Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS............................................................................................... E12-39
E12.5.2 Customizing Menu Bar................................................................ E12-41
E12.5.3 Customizing Toolbar.................................................................... E12-42
E12.5.4 Customizing Status bar................................................................ E12-44
E12.5.5 Customizing Shelves Pane.......................................................... E12-45
E12.5.6 Customizing Filters Pane............................................................. E12-47
E12.5.7 Customizing A&E Browser Pane................................................. E12-57
E12.5.8 Customizing A&E Messages Pane.............................................. E12-63
E12.5.9 Customizing Dynamic Filters Pane.............................................. E12-67
E12.5.10 Print Tab in the Option Window.................................................... E12-68
E12.6 Configurator of CAMS for HIS................................................................... E12-69
E12.6.1 Starting and Exiting Configurator of CAMS for HIS..................... E12-71
E12.6.2 Engineering in Configurator of CAMS for HIS............................. E12-72
E12.6.3 Security Settings of CAMS for HIS.............................................. E12-76
E12.6.4 Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS......................... E12-78
E12.7 Settings to Enable CAMS for HIS............................................................ E12-105
E12.8 Procedures for Starting Test of CAMS for HIS by Virtual Test..............E12-110
E12.9 Procedures for Adding or Removing HIS................................................E12-114
E12.10 HIS Actions after Enabling CAMS for HIS...............................................E12-118

TocE-3
E12.10.1 Operation and Monitoring Windows on an HIS in which
CAMS for HIS Is Enabled...........................................................E12-119
E12.10.2 CAMS for HIS/HIS Coordination Function................................. E12-120
E12.10.3 Differences between the HISs with and without
CAMS for HIS............................................................................ E12-121
E12.10.4 Process Alarm of HIS and Alarm Inhibited by CAMS for HIS.... E12-125
E12.11 Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.......................................................... E12-129
E12.11.1 Open or Close Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.................... E12-132
E12.11.2 Layout of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS............................. E12-133
E12.11.3 Specification of Historical Data Display..................................... E12-138
E12.11.4 Search Historical Data............................................................... E12-141
E12.11.5 Filtering Historical Data.............................................................. E12-143
E12.12 Function Check of CAMS for HIS............................................................ E12-144
E12.12.1 Function Check Execution Task Flow........................................ E12-146
E12.12.2 What is Alarm Generator?......................................................... E12-148
E12.12.3 Starting and Exiting Alarm Generator........................................ E12-149
E12.12.4 Layout of Alarm Generator......................................................... E12-151
E12.12.5 Creation of Scenarios................................................................ E12-156
E12.12.6 Functions of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check Mode)............................................................. E12-166
E12.12.7 Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check Mode)............................................................. E12-168
E12.12.8 Execution of Function Check..................................................... E12-170
E12.12.9 Messages Displayed During the Function Check..................... E12-174
E12.13 Messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL......................................................... E12-177
E13. Operation Keyboard..............................................................................E13-1
E13.1 Mode Selection Key.......................................................................................E13-2
E13.2 Function Keys................................................................................................E13-3
E13.2.1 Assigning a Window Call................................................................E13-7
E13.2.2 Assigning a Frame Call...................................................................E13-8
E13.2.3 Assigning Execution of a System Function Key Command........ E13-10
E13.2.4 Assigning Execution of a System Function Key Command
(Monitor specified)....................................................................... E13-17
E13.2.5 Assigning Start/Stop/Resume Trend Data Acquisition................ E13-19
E13.2.6 Assigning Flash/Light/ Turn Off LED .......................................... E13-20
E13.2.7 Assigning Execution of a Program.............................................. E13-21
E13.2.8 Assigning Multimedia Operation.................................................. E13-22
E13.2.9 Assigning Event Notification to ActiveX Control.......................... E13-24
E13.2.10 Assigning a Panel Set Call........................................................... E13-25
E13.2.11 Assigning a Window Call on Another HIS.................................... E13-26
E13.2.12 Assigning Window Clearing on Another HIS............................... E13-28
E13.2.13 Call a Faceplate Frame (*1) on the Predefined Position............. E13-29
E13.3 One-Touch Keys on Operation Keyboard................................................ E13-30
E13.4 Auxiliary Contact I/O Function.................................................................. E13-35

TocE-4
E14. Multiple-Monitor....................................................................................E14-1
E14.1 Monitor Configuration...................................................................................E14-3
E14.2 Operation Screen Mode in Multiple-Monitor Environment.......................E14-5
E14.3 Window Display Positions on Multiple Monitors.......................................E14-8
E14.4 Window Operations in Multiple-Monitor Environment........................... E14-10
E14.5 Setting the Multiple-Monitor Environment............................................... E14-20

<E9. Message Processing> E9-1
E9. Message Processing

The message processing notifies the operator of the status change of process and
system using the pre-defined messages.
TIP
When the CAMS for HIS is enabled, the operation conforms to that of the CAMS for HIS. Moreover, messages
and operation log, etc. are also stored in the database of the CAMS for HIS with the historical message file.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the CAMS for HIS, see the following:
E12, “Consolidated Alarm Management Software”
IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

<E9. Message Processing> E9-2
n Message Flow
The following figure shows the flow of a message sent from the control station:
Prt01 Prt02
Same group scope
Output to
LED/Buzzer Display on
operation and
monitoring windows
Voice Message
Log to Sequence
historical message Filter for printers
message file request
Running user
group filter
HIS security filter
(*1)
HIS0124 HIS0123 HIS0122
Control bus
FCS0102 FCS0103 FCS0104 FCS0105 FCS0106
E090001E.ai
*1: The heavy lines in the HIS above indicate the paths along which a message is output.
Figure Message Flow

<E9.1 Message Types> E9-3
E9.1 Message Types

Messages are classified below depending on their origins and contents.
• System Messages
System messages notify operator of system status and operation.
System alarm message is in this category.
• Process Messages
Process messages notify operator of process status and operation.
Process alarm message, annunciator message, operator guide message, print
message, sequence message request, and signal event message are in this category.
• Other Messages Related to Operation
Operational error messages, help messages, and so on are applicable.
This section explains the message types and the output action.
n System-fixed Messages and User Definable Messages

Each message has a number to identify the message type.
Among those messages, the following have system-fixed numbers and contents.
• System Alarm Message
• Process Alarm Message
The content of the following messages can be defined with the builders.
• Annunciator Message
• Operator Guide Message
• Print Message
• Sequence Message Request
• Signal Event Message
• Help Message
The following message can be set in the HIS Setup window.
• Voice message

n Message Numbering System

The relationship between message types and message numbers are shown below:
Table Table of Message Numbers
Message type Content Message number
Control station error/recovery 00xx
Alarm from an FCS of the previous
01xx
system
Alarm
HIS alarm 02xx
Communication error, STN
03xx
FAIL/RECOVER
System messages Status notification Status of the control station 04xx
Operation command Downloading of database, etc. 05xx
Operation record Load/save of the control station, etc. 06xx
Alarm Alarms related to the SEBOL 07xx
Others Printer error 08xx
Field bus System message related to Field bus 40xx
Process alarm 11xx
Alarm Annunciator message 12xx
Print message 13xx
Status change notification Status change of the control loop 14xx
Process messages Operation log Data input operation, etc. 16xx
Operation command Operator guide, dialog 17xx
Request message 18xx
Status record
Application execution 19xx
Fieldbus Fieldbus-related message 3xxx
Operation Error Message Initiated by Operation mistake 5xxx
Miscellaneous Reconfirmation Message Prompt for Acknowledgment 6xxx
Help Message Displayed in help window 9xxx
E090101E.ai
Note: xx represents a number.

n System Alarm Messages

System alarm messages notify the operator of the hardware errors in the control station or an
HIS as well as errors in communication. System alarm messages are system-fixed and displayed
in the System Alarm view.
The following figure shows the flow of message processing when a system alarm message
occurs:
• Display on operation and • Send to printer

monitoring windows • Log to historical message file
• Buzzer sounds • LED on the operation keyboard flashes
• Display elements flash on
operation and monitoring windows
HIS0164
Send system
alarm message
Control bus
Hardware errors
occurrence
FCS0102 FCS0101
E090102E.ai
Figure Flow of System Alarm Message Processing
SEE
ALSO • For the details of the System Alarm view, see the following:
E4.2, “System Alarm View”
• For the details of the system alarm, see the following:
E10, “Alarm Processing”

n Process Alarm Messages

Process alarm message is used to notify the status of a process to the operator.
The type and content of process alarm messages are system-fixed.
The following figure shows the flow of message processing when a process alarm message
occurs:

HIS0164
Send process
alarm message
Control bus
Process alarm occurrence
FIC100
FCS0101 FCS0102
E090103E.ai
Figure Flow of Process Alarm Message Processing
SEE
ALSO • For the details on the windows in which process alarm messages are displayed, see the following:
“n Message Display on the Window” in E9.2, “Message Output Actions”
• For the details on process alarm, see the following:

n Annunciator Message
▼ Message
Annunciator message is used to notify the operator of errors in the process.
The content of annunciator messages can be defined in the Annunciator Message Builder.
l Annunciator Message Occurrence

The following figure shows the flow of message processing when an annunciator message
occurs:

HIS0164
Send annunciator
message
Control bus
FCS0101 FCS0102
%SW0503.PV ON Y
%AN0003.PV L Y
Annunciator message defined in the sequence table

E090104E.ai
Figure Flow of Annunciator Message Processing

In a sequence table block, when the annunciator is triggered ON, a user defined annunciator
message is sent to the Operation and Monitoring Functions. Other function blocks that can
trigger annunciator messages are shown below:
• 13-Zone Program Set Block (PG-L13)
• Representative Alarm Block (ALM-R)
• Sequence Table Blocks (ST16, ST16E)
• Valve Monitor Block (VLVM)
• Logic chart
• SFC block
SEE
ALSO For the details on the windows in which annunciator messages are displayed, see the following:
“n Message Display on the Window” in E9.2, “Message Output Actions”
l Annunciator Message Builder

Define the following items for the fixed element number.
• Message
Define the character strings to transmit as an annunciator message.
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters are used.
• Tag name
A tag name can be assigned to each annunciator element number. A tag name defined
here can be used in place of the annunciator element number (%AN000n) that has been
assigned that tag name.
• Switch position label
In manual mode, select from the switch position labels defined in the Switch Position Label
Builder. In auto mode, the label name can be selected from those names predefined, or can
be entered directly.
• Label Format
Specify direct format or reverse format.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the switch position label, see the following:
E6.2, “Switch Position Label”
• Security Level
Select a security level from level 1 to 8.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the security level, see the following:
“n Security Levels” in F3.4, “Function Block Security”

• Tag mark
Select a tag mark type from the following 8 types.
Important with Ack.
General
Aux.1
Aux.2
Important
General with Ack.
Aux.1 with Ack.
Aux.2 with Ack.
SEE
ALSO For the tag mark, see the following:
“n Tag Mark - Status Display Area” in E6.1, “Components of Instrument Faceplate”
• Alarm processing level

Select an alarm processing level from [High], [Medium], [Low], [Logging], and alarm levels
defined in the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the alarm processing level, see the following:
• Upper window
When an annunciator message occurs and if it is required to call up a related window to the
alarm acknowledged, define that window as upper window.
With the upper window defined, selecting the displayed annunciator message and then
pressing the upper window call-up button, or the upper window call-up key on the operation
keyboard can display that window.
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters (upper case letters) can be used to define the window
name.
Window name may be omitted. When an annunciator (%AN) element triggers an upper
window display, an unrelated Control Drawing view may be opened. To avoid this
phenomenon, the upper window defined for the annunciator (%AN) element must be very
clear and correct if the annunciator is used to trigger an upper window display.
• Help Number
Define the number of a help that has been created, to be called up upon occurrence of the
annunciator message. Press the [HELP] key on the operation keyboard, or the [HELP]
button to call up the help message.
This number can be omitted.
• Upper equipment name
With the upper equipment names defined in the Plant Hierarchy Builder, any of them can be
selected, or this name can be omitted. With this name omitted, the default upper equipment
ID (control station equipment ID) will be applied.
Enter “*” to change UAID for use in the arithmetic expressions of CALCU, or SEBOL,
instead of using the upper equipment names defined in the Plant Hierarchy Builder.
If “*” has been entered, the changed UAID in use will not be overwritten during generation.

n Annunciator Message with Data

Up to three process data items can be added to the annunciator message for output as the
annunciator message with data. The print messages corresponding to the annunciator message
are used as the process data to be added.
Note that the same process as the annunciator message generates the annunciator message
with data.
l Operation of the Annunciator Message with Data

The operation of this message is determined by the alarm processing level.
SEE
ALSO For the output operation of the annunciator message with data, see the following:
A4.5, “Annunciator Message with Data”
l Setting Annunciator Message with Data

Select the FCS property in the System View to set the following:
• The starting element number of the annunciator message (%AN) to be used as the
annunciator message with data
The annunciator messages with this number and its subsequent numbers can be defined as
annunciator messages with data.
The annunciator messages with preceding numbers can be defined as ordinary annunciator
messages.
• The starting element number of the print message (%PR) corresponding to the annunciator
message with data
The print messages with this number and its subsequent numbers can be defined as print
messages corresponding to the annunciator message with data.
Designate only the element number of the annunciator when using the annunciator message
with data in the sequence connection block.
An integer can be designated as the number of the print message but no as that of the
annunciator messages with data.

n Operator Guide Messages

Operator guide messages are used to prompt the operator’s acknowledgment for certain
operation during certain progress of the process. Operator guide messages are defined in the
Operator Guide Message Builder.
l The Occurrence of Operator Guide Messages

Operator guide messages are triggered by the sequence control of the control station.
When the Operation and Monitoring Functions detect an operator guide message, a character
string that corresponds to the message number is displayed in the Operator Guide view, then the
operator guide message is saved to the historical message log file.
The following figure shows the flow of message processing when an operator guide message
occurs:
• Operation guide message displays FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103

• Message print out operator guide operator guide operator guide
message definition message definition message definition
• Log to hisotorical message file
Message 1 Message 1 Message 1

HIS0164
Send operator guide

message
Control bus
FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103
%SW0503.PV ON Y
%OG0003.PV NON Y
Operator guide message defined

in the sequence table
E090105E.ai
Figure Flow of Operator Guide Message Processing
The operator guide messages can also be triggered by the use of the opeguide statement in
SEBOL.
SEE
ALSO For more information on how to use the opeguide statement in SEBOL, see the following:
H1.9.1, “opeguide”

l Definition Items in the Operator Guide Message Definition Builder
▼ Message, Color, Related Window Name
Define the following item for the fixed element number.
• Operator guide message
Define the character strings to transmit as an operator guide message.
Up to 70 alphanumeric characters are used.
• Color
Define the color of the operator guide message.
Default color is white.
Table Operator Guide Message Color
Color Code Color Code

Black N Steel Blue SB
Red R Pink PK
Green G Spring Green SG
Yellow Y Orange OR
Blue B Yellow Green YG
Magenta M Violet VO
Cyan C Deep Sky DB
White W Gray GR
E090106E.ai
• User-definable label name.

For each operator guide message, labels can be defined.
Labels may be omitted.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the user-definable labels, see the following:
“n User – Defined Labels” in F1.1, “Names”
• Defining Linked Windows

If it is required to display a window upon acknowledging the operator guide message, the
window can be designated as a related window by defining the name, the type of function,
the display size, and the display position.
With the related window defined, clicking the message displayed in the Operator Guide view
will display the related window in the defined format.
SEE
ALSO For the window and its type of function, display size and position, see the following:
“n Calling up Windows by Entering Names” in E2.7.1, “Directly Calling up Operation and Monitoring
Windows”

n Print Messages
Print messages are triggered by the Sequence Control Function to print out the message to
indicate certain timing of the process.
Print messages are defined in the Printout Message Builder.
l Occurrence of the Print Message

When a print message request is sent from a field control station to an HIS, the Operation and
Monitoring Functions print the character string that corresponds to the message number, then
saves the print message to the historical message log file.
The print message may be printed as in one of following formats.
• Comment message plus up to 3 process data in the order of data1, data2, data3
may be printed out.
• The integer constant specified in the action column of sequence table plus 2
process data in the order of integer constant, data1, data2 may be printed out.
The following figure shows the flow of message processing when a print message occurs:
FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103

• Message printout print message print message print message
• Log to historical message file definition definition definition

HIS0164
Send print message

Control bus
FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103
%SW0500.PV ON Y
%PR0003.PV NON Y
Print message defined in the sequence table

E090107E.ai
Figure Flow of Print Message Processing

l Definition Items of the Printout Message Builder
• Print message character strings
• Data 1 to 3
• Format 1 to 3
• User-defined label name
l Print Message Character String

▼ Message
Define a print message up to 80 alphanumeric characters. When printing the data, specify the
place to insert data by the [^] symbol. The data values are printed in the order of data items
(data1, data 2, data3) at the place indicated by the [^] symbol.
l Data
▼ Data1 to 3
Specify the data up to 34 capital alphanumeric characters.
The format that specifies the data is [TagName.DataItem]. For array data, it is TagName.
DataItem [subscript1, subscript2].
l Format
▼ Format1 to 3
The format is a display format of the printed data. The integer type data and the real type data are
printed right-justified, and the string type data is printed left-justified.
Specify the format of the printed data as follows:
[Leading Zeros] [Total Digits]. [Digits after DP] [Conversion]

• Leading Zeros
When a datum has less digits than specified, leading zeros may be added before the valid
number. If the leading zero is required, 0 should be specified at this place.
Leading zero can not be specified to the text data.
For example, if a datum is 200, the output is to be in six digits, and [Digits after DP] is set to
0, the print examples with or without leading zeros are as follows:
With leading zeros: 000200
Without leading zeros: ΔΔΔ200
• Total Digits
The number of digits to print out may be specified. If a datum has more digits than specified,
the excesses part will not be printed out.
• Digits after DP
The number of digits at the right part of decimal point may be specified.
• Conversion
Numeric data may be converted into other format for print out. When [X] is specified, the
numeric data is converted into hexadecimal format to print out. The hexadecimal number is
integer type.
When conversion specification is omitted, the integer or numeric data are printed out in
decimal, text data are printed out as characters strings.
The table below shows the print format by data type for Default and User-defined Print format.
Table Default and User-Defined Print Formats
Data type Default print format User-defined print format
Integer 10 digits (with no decimal part) 10 digits (with six decimal places)
Real number 10 digits (with one decimal place) 10 digits (with six decimal places)
Character 16 characters 16 characters
E090108E.ai
Notices for specifying the format are shown as follows:

• The default print format will print out the function block numeric data in the data’s original
digits.
• If [Digit after DP] is omitted in the user-defined print format, even integer data values are
printed out with six decimal places. To hide the decimal part, designate “0” for [Digit after
DP].
• With “0” designated for [Leading Zeros], data will be printed out in the user-defined print
format. For printing in the default print format, define “010.0” for integer data values and
“010.1” for real number data values.

l User-Defined Label Name
For each operator guide message, labels can be defined.
Labels may be omitted.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the user-defined labels, see the following:
l Defining Print Message

An example of print message definition is shown as follows.
Element No. Message Data1 Format1
%PR0001 Tank AΔInjection complatedΔQuantity=^ΔL FIC100.SUM 5
%PR0002
%PR0003
[Leading Zero]
= [Digits] . [DP] [Conversion]
=
=
Default 5 Default Default
%PR0001 Printout
Tank AΔInjection completedΔQuantity=12345ΔL
FIC100.SUM value
E090109E.ai
Δ: Space
Figure Example of Printout

n Sequence Message Request

▼ Function, Station Name
The sequence message request is sent by the Process Sequence Control Function at a certain
process timing to an HIS to execute certain Operation and Monitoring Functions. The functions
to be executed for the corresponding request message numbers may be defined in the HIS. After
the Operation and Monitoring Functions’ execution, the request messages are logged into the
historical message log files.
The trigger of request messages is shown as below:
• Calling up operation and • LED on the operation keyboard flashes

monitoring windows • Execution of programs
• Execution of system function key • Multimadia
• Start/Stop/Resume data trend • Printout of report
• Calling up panel set
FCS0102
sequence message
request definition
%RQ0001 Processing 01
HIS0164
Send request message
Control bus
FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103
%SW0205.PV ON Y
%RQ0002.PV NON Y
E090110E.ai
Figure Occurrence of a Request Message

l Specifying Sequence Message Request
The following functions may be specified to a sequence message request.
• Calling up operation and monitoring windows
• Executing a program assigned to the function key
• Start/stop/resume data Trend
• Operation keyboard LED ON/OFF/flash
• Run a designated program
• Multimedia
• Calling up a panel set
• Printing reports
Specify these in the same way as the Function Key Assignment.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the Function Key Assignment, see the following.
E13.2, “Function Keys”
l Specifying Station Name

The sequence message request is managed in an HIS. Usually, ALL is specified in the station
name item thus, the request received from all FCSs may be executed. If a station name is
designated, only the request from the designated station is executed.

n Signal Event Message

▼ Signal Name Character String, Signal Transmission Destination Tag Name, Parameter2, Comment
Signal event message is used to send text string from sequence table to SFC blocks or unit
instruments. The signal event message can be sent together with parameters as well.
The following shows the flow of the message processing when a signal event message occurs:
Example of signal event definition
Element No. Signal Name Dest. Tag Parameter2 Comment

%EV0001 ABC SFC001 20 Signal
%EV0002
%EV0003
SFC block
Sequence table
Tag Name SFC001
%SW0205.PV ON Y Send signal event
ABC 100 20 Initialization
%EV0001.PV 100 Y
Injection
Parameter1
Heating
Discharge
Signal Name Parameter1 Parameter2
Washing
End
E090111E.ai
Figure Flow of Signal Event Message Processing
SEE
ALSO For the details on SEBOL receiving signal event, see the following:
H1.12, “Signal Processing”

l Definition Items of the Signal Event Builder
• Character strings
Specify signal event name in up to 8 characters.
• Signal destination tag name
Specify the destination tag name of the SFC block or the unit instrument.
• User-definable label name
Define user-definable label name for each signal event message.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the user-definable label name, see the following:
• Parameter
Up to two parameters can be added.
Specify the Parameter1 as the action signal of the sequence table that transmits the signal
event. The Parameter1 can use a number from 0 to 65535. Define the Parameter2 within 16
alphanumeric characters. Both the Parameter 1 and the Parameter2 can be omitted.
• Comment
Up to 24 Alphanumeric characters may be used to define the comment. The comment may
be omitted.
n Help Messages
Help messages guide the user through monitoring the operation of the plant.
These messages are either pre-defined in the system or definable by the user.
They are system alarm help, user-defined help and system window help, and displayed in help
window.
l System Alarm Help

This is a help message that provides detailed information about the system alarm message. The
system alarm help is pre-defined in the system.
Using the message number of the system alarm message as a keyword, search for the
corresponding system alarm help can be performed.
l User-Defined Help
▼ User-Defined Help Message, Help, Help Message Number
This is a help message that the user can freely define. The user can define help messages to
explain the function and operating procedure for user-defined windows or help messages to
explain the function block.
As for the user-definable help message, define the arbitrary message to the help message
number between HW0001 and HW9999 in the Help Message Builder. The maximum size of one
help message is 21 lines; each line can contain 70 single-byte characters.
Moreover, the user can search for user-definable help by entering the window name, tag name,
or help message number as a key word.

l Sharing HIS Help Messages
▼ Share HIS Help Messages
The user-defined help messages can be displayed in each HIS uniquely. While the user-defined
help messages in one HIS can be shared and displayed in other HISs. When each HIS uniquely
displays its user-defined help messages, the user-defined help messages need to be defined
in each HIS uniquely. However, when displaying the user-defined help messages of one HIS
on other HISs, the option of [Share HIS Help Messages] on the [Detailed Setting] tab in Create
New HIS dialog box needs to be checked. Moreover, the master station of the user-defined help
messages must be specified. Therefore, once an HIS is specified to share the user-defined help
messages, this HIS will display the user-defined help messages of master HIS, and the builder
for defining help messages on this HIS will be inhibited and cannot be started.
Properties
Type Constant Network Detailed Setting
Share HIS Help Messages

Master Station
HIS0161
HIS0162
HIS0163
HIS0164
OK Cancel
E090114E.ai
Figure [Detailed Setting] Tab in Create New HIS Dialog Box
l System Window Help

These are help messages that explain the functions of the system window. The system window
help is pre-defined in the system.
Using the window name as keyword, the corresponding system window help can be searched.

n Voice Message
The notification of the process progress and errors during the plant operation are sent in the form
of a message displayed and a buzzer. Use of the voice message function allows the confirmation
of the process progress and errors through a voice message. The Multimedia allows the playing
of videos and buzzers as well as the voice message. The voice files including sound files, and
video files are hereinafter referred to as “multimedia files,” with the functions of playing and
stopping the voice messages and videos generally referred to as Multimedia Functions.
l Outline of the Voice Message

The voice message function plays a preset voice message upon request from the FCS.
HIS0164 Voice message
The input of material A has started.
The liquid level in tank

101 is abnormal.
Request for a message
Control bus
Process status
FCS0102 FCS0101
E090112E.ai
Figure Playing the Voice Message

l Playing the Voice Message or Video
Only one voice message or video can be played at a time by one of the following methods.
Multiple voice messages or videos cannot be played simultaneously.
• Define the function of activating the Multimedia in a sequence table block, etc.
• Define the function of activating the Multimedia in a graphic object.
• Define the function of activating the Multimedia in the Scheduler Builder.
• Define the function of activating the Multimedia in the Sequence Message Request Builder.
• Assign the function of activating the Multimedia to a function key.
The voice message or video is played the preset number of times according to the preset priority,
upon request for the activation of the Multimedia defined/assigned by the above methods.
SEE
ALSO For the settings for the activation of the Multimedia Functions, see the following:
E4.3.11, “Multimedia Tab”
l Stopping the Voice Message or Video

The voice message or video being played can be stopped by one of the following methods:
• Define the function of exiting the Multimedia in the graphic object.
• Define the function of exiting the Multimedia in the preset menu.
• Assign the function of exiting the Multimedia to a function key.
The stop operation stops the voice message being played, or closes the window for the video
being played. Any queued voice messages and videos are retained, and played upon stoppage
of the voice message being played (or upon closing of the window for the video being played).

l Priorities of the Voice Messages or Videos when They are Played
If a request for playing a voice message (or a video) is sent while another voice message (or
a video) is already being played, the priorities of these two voice messages (or videos) are
compared. The voice messages and videos are not distinguished when their priorities are
compared; the priorities for both of them are compared together. The following section describes
how to compare the priorities of voice messages as an example:
• When the voice message being played has a higher priority than the requested voice
message, the former remains played, while the latter is queued. The voice message with
the highest priority among all the queued voice messages is played upon completion of the
playing of the voice message.
• When the voice message being played has a lower priority than any of the queued voice
messages including the newly requested voice message, the former is stopped to start
playing the voice message with the highest priority among all the queued voice messages,
including the newly requested voice message. The stopped voice message is queued.
• Up to 10 voice messages and videos can be queued in total.
• When a request for another message (11th request) is sent with the buffer for queuing voice
messages/videos full, that request is discarded if the requested message has the same
priority as or a lower priority than the message with the lowest priority among all the queued
messages. Otherwise, the requested message is queued, while the message with the
lowest priority among all the queued messages is discarded (the latest message among
all the queued messages is discarded if multiple queued messages have the same lowest
priority).
Interrupted
The voice message 1

is played.
The voice message 2
is played.
The voice message 1
is replayed.
The voice message 3
is played.
A request for playing A request for playing A request for playing

the voice message 1 the voice message 2 the voice message 3
is sent. is sent. is sent.
Priority
Low High
Voice message 3 < voice message 1 < voice message 2
E090113E.ai
Figure Playing the Voice Messages and Priorities
l Simultaneous Playing of the Voice Message and the Buzzer

To output the voice message and the buzzer to a sound board simultaneously, the multimedia
files must be formatted in other protocols than midi. If “Beep” or “Operation Keyboard” is selected
in stead of “Sound” for “Buzzer Switching,” this restriction does not apply.
l Priorities of the Voice Message and the Buzzer

The voice message and the buzzer are played independently of each other. Therefore, their
priorities are not compared.

<E9.2 Message Output Actions> E9-25
E9.2 Message Output Actions

The Message Processing notifies the operator that the messages arise via various output
actions. The following section explains the message output actions.
n Message Output Actions

When a message is received, the HIS carry out message output action to notify the operator that
there has been a change in the system status.
The message output actions are listed below:
• The message displays in the operation and monitoring window
• The buzzer sounds
• The corresponding window display object flashes
• The message is output to printer
• The message is logged to a file
• The LED on the operation keyboard flashes
• The voice message is generated
Each output action varies depending on the type of a message.

The following table shows the output actions categorized by the message type:
Table Table of System Message Output Actions
Window Buzzer Window display Send to Save to LED
Number Message type display Sounds elements Flash printer file Flashs
00xx
Control station alarms x x x x x
07xx
Control station alarms

01xx x x x x x
of the previous system
02xx HIS alarm x x x x x

System
03xx Other system alarms x x x x x
Alarm
04xx System status notification view x x x
05xx System operation command x x x
06xx System operation record x x x
08xx Others x x x
System alarms related to x x x x x

40xx
Fieldbus
E090201E.ai
x: Output
blank: No output
Table Table of Process Message Output Actions

Window Buzzer Window display Send to Saving to LED
Number Message type
display Sounds elements Flash printer file Flashs
11xx Process alarm message Process x x x x x

Alarm
12xx Annunciator message view x x x x x
13xx Print message x x
14xx Status change notification x x
16xx Process operation record x x
Operator
17xx Operator guide message Guide x x x x x
view
18xx Request message x
19xx Application start message x x
3xxx Fieldbus-related message x x x
E090202E.ai
x: Output
blank: No output

n Buzzer Sounds
When the message originated within the operation and monitoring scope of the current user, the
buzzer sounds in the tone corresponding to the message type.
l Buzzer - ACK ID
▼ Buzzer ACK ID
The buzzer ACK ID allows the user to reset the buzzer sounds from all the HISs that have the
same ACK ID defined for the buzzer, when acknowledging a buzzer on one HIS.
The buzzer ACK ID is defined on the HIS folder - property menu. The definition for ACK ID is
limited to 8 alphanumeric characters.
l Message Types and Corresponding Buzzer Reset Operations

The table below shows the message types and corresponding buzzer reset operations for the
buzzer that has same ACK ID in multiple HISs:
Table Message Types and Buzzer Reset Operations
Message type Buzzer reset (Own HIS) Buzzer reset (Other HIS)
System alarm x x
High-priority alarm x x
Process alarm Medium- or low-priority alarm x x
Process alarm recover x x
Reconfirmation
Operation error x
Operator guide x x
E090203E.ai
x: Output
blank: No output
When acknowledge the buzzer from one HIS, all above 7 types of buzzer sound are silenced
except the reconfirmation tone.
The reconfirmation buzzer tone sounds when reconfirmation prompt box appears, this sound
is silenced when the operator confirms the prompt or responses the prompt from the operation
keyboard.
The buzzer tone for erroneous operation can only be acknowledged from the console where the
error caused, can not be reset from other consoles.

l Message Types and Corresponding Tone Numbers on the Operation
Keyboard
Each type of message may be defined with specific tone, volume and type of sound. The
definition may done on HIS Setup windows.
The table below lists the standard tone number of each message type.
Table Standard Buzzer Tone Numbers of the Operation Keyboard
Message type Tone number
System alarm 36
High-priority alarm 24
Process alarm Medium- or Low-priority alarm 30
Process alarm recover 0
Reconfirmation 6
Operation error 12
Operator guide 18
E090204E.ai
Tone number is selectable from 0 to 41.

Volume is selectable from 1 to 4
Sound type is selected from [Continuing] or [Notifying]
SEE
ALSO For more information on HIS Setup windows, see the following:
E4.3.3, “Buzzer Tab”
l Priorities of the Buzzers when They are Output

If a request for playing a buzzer is sent while another buzzer is already being played, the priorities
of these two buzzers are compared. The priorities of the buzzers depend on the types of the
buzzers (messages).
• When the buzzer being played has a higher priority than the requested buzzer, the former
remains played, while the latter is queued. The buzzer with the highest priority among all
the queued buzzers is played upon completion of the playing of the buzzer.
• When the buzzer being played has a lower priority than any of the queued buzzers including
the newly requested buzzer, the former is stopped to start playing the buzzer with the
highest priority among all the queued buzzers. The stopped buzzer is queued.
n Message Display on the Window

Various types of message are displayed in the windows shown below:
l System Message Banner

It displays three latest messages in Process alarm messages and System alarm messages with
Tag Mark which are not acknowledged.
SEE
ALSO For more information on System Message Banner, see the following:
E2.5, “System Message Banner”

l Process Alarm View
Process alarm messages and annunciator messages are displayed in this window.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the Process Alarm view, see the following:
E3.6, “Process Alarm View”
l System Alarm View

System alarm messages are displayed in this window.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the System Alarm view, see the following:
E4.2, “System Alarm View”
l Operator Guide View

Operator guide messages, such as operation instructions and requirements, are displayed in this
window.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the Operator Guide view, see the following:
E3.5, “Operator Guide View”
l Graphic View
Messages may be displayed in the designated area on a Graphic window. The types of message
are shown as below:
• Process alarm messages
• Annunciator messages
• System alarm messages
Also, the name of the dialog box displaying the operator guide may be displayed in the
designated area on a window.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the Graphic view, see the following:
E3.1, “Graphic View”

n Flashing of the Display Elements on Operation and Monitoring Windows

The window display object flashes when any of the following messages arises:
• Process alarm message
• Annunciator message
• System alarm message
l Window Display Object Starts Flashing when a Process Alarm Message or

Annunciator Message Arises
When a process alarm message or annunciator message arises, the following window display
objects start flashing:
• System Message banner
The process alarm button flashes.
The tag mark of the process alarm message starts flashing in the corresponding alarm color.
• Process Alarm view, Process Alarm Individual Acknowledgment window
The tag mark of the process alarm message flashes in the corresponding alarm color.
• Faceplate view, Tuning view
The tag mark of the instrument faceplate associated with the alarm starts flashing in the
corresponding alarm color.
• Graphic view
The display object that is designed to reflect the alarm status starts flashing in the
The button representing the process in which the alarm is present starts flashing in the
corresponding alarm color. (overview control).
• SFC view
The tag mark of the instrument faceplate associated with the alarm starts flashing in the
l Window Display Object Starts Flashing when a System Alarm Message Arises
When a system alarm message arises, the following window display objects start flashing:
The system alarm button flashes.
The system alarm message mark starts to flash in the corresponding alarm color.
• System Alarm view
The system alarm message mark starts flashing in red (arises) or green (recovers).
l Window Display Object Starts Flashing when an Operator Guide Message

Arises
The following window display objects start flashing when an operator guide message arises:
The Operator Guide window call button starts flashing.
• Operator Guide view, Operator Guide Individual Acknowledgement window
The operator guide message mark starts flashing.

n To Printer for Printing

All message exclude the sequence message request can be output to printer.
The following items need to be defined on printer definition tab of HIS Constant Builder.
• Contents of the print message (the detailed printout characters)
• Printer name (the printer to output)
• User group (the messages are arranged according to user groups)
• Print start position (start position when printing out a message)
• Auto print queuing time (queuing time for printing out a message less than one page long)
The following figures shows a sample format used when a system alarm message is printed out:
*** 0303 05.18 13:50:54 FCS0201 Fail
Message
Date and time (Month, day, hour, minute, second)
Message number
Message identifier
(Note) The asterisks (***) are added to the recovered alarm message identifiers to distinguish
them from the existing alarms.
E090205E.ai
Figure Sample Message Print Format
Messages are output to printer under the following circumstances:

• When the number of arisen messages fit for one page.
• When the auto print queuing time has elapsed.
• When the print output command is exerted.
The definition for message print may be carried out on the HIS Setup window.
SEE
ALSO For details on how to define message print out on HIS Setup window, see the following:
E4.3.2, “Printer Tab”
When an error occurs to the destination printer, the error is notified to the user in a system alarm
message.

l Date and Time Format when Printing Messages
After the computer startup, Windows can perform printing job even if no user has logged on.
However, the Date and Time printout format is different before and after logon.
<Examples>
After Windows logon (user-defined format) 03/23/08 1:13:50 PM
Before Windows logon (system-fixed format) 03/23/08 13:13:50
l HIS Printer Name

▼ HIS Printer Name
The message output can be assigned to different printers according to the message type.
Open the Printer Definition tab of HIS Constant Builder, select the printer from [None], [MSG1],
[MSG2], [MSG3], [MSG4] and [MSG5] according to the message type.
The printer name is set to [MSG1] by default in all the message types.
Table An example of Printer output definition
Message type HIS printer name
System message MSG1
Process alarm message MSG2
Sequence message request MSG2
Operator guide message None
Operation message MSG3
E090206E.ai
As the above example, since the process alarm message, and the sequence message request
are assigned to the same printer MSG2, both types of message are printed out from the same
printer in the order of their arising.
Set the correspondence between the output printer device and the HIS Printer Name in the HIS
Setup window.
SEE
ALSO For more information on Settings in HIS Setup window, see the following:
l User Group
▼ User Group Name
When printing, the scope of operation and monitoring of the designated user group decides the
scope of the message to print out. The message outside of the operation and monitoring scope
can not be printed.
The default user group is DEFGRP (all), messages of all stations may be printed out.

l Print Start Position
▼ Tab
To identify the message easily, the print start position of the message can be defined. Define it on
the Printer Definition tab of the HIS Constant Builder.
Tab: To define the number of tabs for each type of message.
System alarm message
3 Tabs Process alarm message
6 Tabs Operator guide message
9 Tabs Message
Note: The length of one tab varies with printers.
E090207E.ai
Figure Message Print Start Position
l Auto Print Queuing Time

▼ Message Print Wait Time
The messages are not printed out until they are piled up to fit one page for print. With definition
of the queuing time, the message may be sent to printer when the defined queuing time elapsed.
When Queuing time is specified as 0, the auto print does not function.
Define the auto print queuing time on the HIS Message Print Wait Time definition tab of the HIS
Constant Builder.
Printer queuing time:
Define in minutes per HIS printer
The default is 5 minutes.
l On Demand Print
The message can be printed out at any time on demand of users. The on demand print can be
carried out by assigning printing output to the function key or the scheduler.
As for assignment to the function key and the scheduler, define it in the Function Key Assignment
Builder and the Scheduler builder.
If the printing output is not defined, the printer automatically prints out when the messages are
accumulated to fill one page.
n Saving the Message to a File

The messages notified to the HIS are stored in the memory then saved into the historical
message file.
When the messages stored in the historical message file exceed the limitation capacity, the
messages for one day are sequentially deleted, starting from the oldest data. With various types
of the messages stored, about 40,000 messages can be stored.
The messages saved in the historical message file can be displayed in the Historical Message
Report window.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the Historical Message Report window, see the following:
E8.2, “Historical Message Report Window”

n LED on the Operation Keyboard Starts Flashing

When any of the following types of message arises, the LED on the operation keyboard starts
flashing.
• Process alarm message
• Annunciator message
Also, the function key’s LED reaction against the arising of alarm message is user-definable.
SEE
ALSO For the details on the user-definable function keys, see the following:
l LED Starts Flashing when a Process Alarm Message or Annunciator Message

Arises
When a process alarm message or annunciator message arises, the corresponding LED listed
below starts flashing:
• LED of the process alarm key
• LED of the function key that is assigned a function associated with the arisen alarm
l LED Starts Flashing when a System Alarm Message Arises

When a system alarm message is generated, the LED listed below start flashing:
• LED of the system alarm key
• LED of the system status overview display key
• LED of the function key associated with the arisen alarm
The status transition of the LED of the system status overview display key is shown as below:
• System alarm message exist and not been acknowledged: LED flashes
• System alarm message exist and has been acknowledged: LED on
• No system alarm message exists: LED off
l LED Starts Flashing when an Operator Guide Message Arises

When an operator guide message arises, the LED listed below start flashing:
• LED of the operator guide key
• LED of the function keys that is assigned a function associated with the message

<E9.3 Message Acknowledgment> E9-35
E9.3 Message Acknowledgment

Some types of message require the operator’s acknowledgment operation.
If the message is not acknowledged, it is notified to the operator by flashing the button
and icon in each operation and monitoring window which displays the messages and
sounding a buzzer. These operations stop when the operator completes the message
acknowledgment operation.
This section explains Message Acknowledgment Operation.
n Messages required for Acknowledgment Operation

The following shows the messages required for the operator’s acknowledgment operation and
the operation and monitoring windows where the acknowledgment operation can be done:
• Process alarm message and Annunciator message
The acknowledgment operation can be done in Process Alarm view.
The acknowledgment operation can be done in System Alarm view.
The acknowledgment operation can be done in Operator Guide view.
n Message Acknowledgment Methods

The message acknowledgment methods include Global Acknowledgment and Individual
Acknowledgment. Select either of them in the HIS Setup window. The acknowledgment method
is defined in each HIS.
• Global Acknowledgment
According to the message types such as Process alarm message, System alarm message,
or so on, the messages are globally acknowledged in each type.
• Individual Acknowledgment
One of the messages displayed in each operation and monitoring window is selected and
acknowledged individually.
While the Process Alarm view/System Alarm view/Operator Guide view is opened, even if the
HIS Setup window is opened and the acknowledgment method is modified, the modified setting
is not reflected in each view. To reflect the modification, close the view once, and then call it
again.
n Message Acknowledgment Operation

Select the button to acknowledge the message on the tool bar of the Process Alarm view/System
Alarm view/Operator Guide view. Or, assign the System Function Key [ACKN] to the function key
of the operation keyboard, and press the Key.
For the Individual Acknowledgment, select the target message in each view, and then perform
the above-mentioned operation.
When a check box of each message of [Operation Message On Acknowledgment] is checked on
the Alarm tab of the HIS Setup window, the acknowledgment operation is stored in the historical
message file.

<E9.3 Message Acknowledgment> E9-36
n Erasing Messages
There are various methods for erasing messages displayed in each operation and monitoring
window according to the message type.
l Erasing Process alarm message and Annunciator message

• The messages displayed in the message display area of the System Message banner are
erased after the acknowledgment operation is done.
• The messages displayed in the Process Alarm view are erased when recovering to the
normal state after the acknowledgment operation is done.
TIP
Unacknowledged messages displayed in the Process Alarm view will not be erased even after recovering to the
normal state. When the acknowledgment operation is done, the messages will be erased.
l Erasing System alarm message

The system alarm messages displayed in the System Message banner and System Alarm view
will not be erased even if returning to the normal state after the acknowledgment operation.
Select the button to erase the acknowledged System alarm message on the tool bar of the
System Alarm view.
n Setting of Message Acknowledgment Scope by the Operation Group

Identifier
The following messages share the acknowledgment and deletion states on multiple HISs with the
same operation group identifier setting:
• Operator guide messages
• System alarm messages
SEE
ALSO For more information on the operation group, see the following:
E1.6, “Operation Group”

<E9.4 Equalizing Message Status among Multiple HISs> E9-37
E9.4 Equalizing Message Status among Multiple

HISs
If more than one HIS exists in the same system, the past message status may be
recovered.
Also, when a user group is set up in the same system, message status sharing and
message filtering may be defined.
TIP
When the CAMS for HIS is enabled, message status sharing and restoration are automatically defined among
HISs in the Equalization Scope.
n Message Monitoring Scope

The message processing function operates according to the monitoring Scope of the user group.
All messages will be saved to the historical message file.
However, notification to the operator is performed within the monitoring scope of the user group
to which the operator belongs.
IMPORTANT
When user group or the operation and monitoring scope of the group changes during operation,
the message that have been received before changes may no longer be receivable.
n Message Filtering
Depending upon operation and monitoring scope of the user groups, messages are filtered in the
following two categories:
• LED, Buzzer, Windows display are filtered
The messages are output only to the HIS in which the user group and user operation and
monitoring scope are assigned.
• Filtering to printer
Only the messages within the user group’s operation and monitoring scope defined on the
printer definition tab of HIS Constant Builder are sent to the printer.
TIP
The monitoring scope that is referenced during message filtering is limited to the monitoring scope of the user
group. A message will be saved regardless of the security level of the function block if it was generated within the
monitoring scope defined for the user group.

<E9.4 Equalizing Message Status among Multiple HISs> E9-38
l Sharing the Message Status
When more than one HISs are assigned in the same user group, the message status may be
shared by all HISs.
When the message status is shared among all HISs, a message that generated from one HIS will
be sent to other HISs.
This HIS sharing function is not related nor restricted by the operators user group.
n The Recovery of the Message Status

When restarting the HIS, current information on alarm and message status can be obtained from
another HIS in the operation status to recover the message status before restarting the function.
It is available when multiple HISs exist in the same system, and the operation and monitoring
function of the HIS for reference is in operation.
Specify another HIS for reference in the HIS Setup window.
Messages displayed in the following views can be recovered.
• System Alarm view
• Process Alarm view
• Operator Guide view

<E9.5 Line Printer Output> E9-39
E9.5 Line Printer Output

The line printer output allows the serial, line-by-line printing of messages generated in the HIS on
a dot impact printer.
Use of a color dot impact printer allows the printing of each message in two colors, red and black.
The activation of the line printer output requires the preinstallation of the (optional) line printer
output package.
SEE
ALSO For the settings for the Line Printer Output installation, see the followings:
CENTUM VP Installation (IM 33M01A20-40E)
n Message Flow
The figure below shows the flow of a message generated with the line printer output in use:
Engineering PC HIS0164 Dot impact printer HIS0163
Page printer (for serial printing)
Message Message
processing processing
function function
Ethernet
Control bus
Message printing process flow
Line printer output
FCS0101 FCS0102
E090501E.ai
Figure Serial and Standard Message Printing Process Flow
The serial and standard message printings must be performed on separate printers.
Data to be serially printed by the line printer output must be set to be output to a dot impact
printer.
TIP
Limit the dot impact printer to use by the Line Printer Output. Printing in general-purpose applications, and
printing hardcopies and self-documents must be performed on another printer.

<E9.5 Line Printer Output> E9-40
n Serial Printing
In serial printing, one message is printed on a printer at a time upon generation of the message.
l Serial Printing Setting Method

Set serial printing for each logical printer on the Printer tab of the HIS Setup Window.
SEE
ALSO For more information on the settings of the serial message printing, see the following:
n Printing in Red and Black

Use of a color dot impact printer allows the printing of each message in two colors, red and black.
Printing colors for messages are fixed; error messages are printed in red, and the other
messages in black.

<E10. Alarm Processing> E10-1
E10. Alarm Processing

The Alarm Processing is a message processing function performed by the HIS when
alarm occurs during plant operation. The operator can use the issued alarm to determine
what action to take for abnormality and then process the alarm. Alarm priority, which
varies with the process and operation, may be distinguished through its operation and
color.
The operator can perform an acknowledgment action for the alarm output.
TIP
The alarm processing will act in the style of CAMS for HIS if the CAMS for HIS is enabled. Moreover, the occurred
messages or the operations records will be saved in the CAMS for HIS database as well as in the Historical
Message File.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the CAMS for HIS, see the following:
n Types of Alarms
The types of alarms that are subject to the alarm processing performed by the HIS is as follows:
l System Alarm
The system alarm notifies operator of the abnormalities in the hardware and communication
errors. The type and contents of the system alarm are predetermined.
When a system alarm occurs, the control station outputs a corresponding message. The
messages that are output in accordance with the corresponding system alarms are called system
alarm messages.
l Process Alarm
The process alarm notifies operator of the occurrence and recovery of abnormality in the
process. The type and contents of the process alarm are predetermined.
A process alarm message is the general term for messages that are output corresponding to the
process alarm.
The annunciator message is included in the process alarm category. User can define the trigger
signal and contents of the annunciator message.

<E10.1 Overview of Alarm Processing> E10-2
E10.1 Overview of Alarm Processing

This section describes the actions of alarm notification and alarm acknowledgement.
n Alarm Processing
The signals of the alarms occurred in a plant are sent to HIS. HIS performs alarm processing
after receiving the alarm signals, and then outputs the alarm information so as to notify the users.
n Output Alarm Information

The main outputs of alarm information are the Process Alarm Messages and System Alarm
Messages and the two types of messages are handled differently. For examples, Process Alarm
Messages are as follows:
• Displays the Process Alarm Messages on the Operation and Monitoring window.
• Blinks or changes the colors of the related buttons, icons and tag marks on the Operation
and Monitoring window.
• Blinks the related LED on the operation keyboard.
• Outputs audible alarm (Buzzer).
• Prints alarm message on printer.
• Logs the alarm messages to Historical Message file.
On the Operation and Monitoring window, the Process Alarm Messages are displayed in:
• System Message Banner
• Process Alarm View
On the Operation and Monitoring window, the tag mark (or the emblem for window status)
may blink or change color to indicate the alarm occurrence. The colors and emblems vary with
the occurred alarms and determined by the alarms from the function blocks that have highest
priorities.
• System Message Banner
• Browser Bar
• Process Alarm View
• Faceplate View
• Tuning View
• Graphic View (Overview Attribute, Control Attribute)
• Graphic View (Graphic Attribute (Window that supports the alarm-triggered blinking))

The output of process alarms is illustrated as follows:
Tag mark type Definition of a character

determination string for the alarm status
Reference
Process alarm of a function block
Example: TIC100 suction Suction port

Message display HI
port temperature TIC100 temperature
HI alarm
Process alarm
Printout
Alarm Acknowl- System

occurrence edgment recovery
Log to a file
• Alarm priority definition

Alarm processing (Defined)
Alarm operation
level determination • Alarm processing table
definition (Defined)
Reference
Repeated warning
alarm
Operation upon
returning to normal
Buzzer sounds
E100102E.ai
Figure Information Output for the Alarm (Process Alarm)

l Notification of Process Alarms
The following figure shows the process flow of alarm notification performed upon occurrence of
the process alarm:
Button flashes
Occurrence of
a process alarm Acknowledge
System Message banner
Lamp On
LED Flashes, Process Alarm view
Calling up
Process Alarm
view
Flashes
Flashes
# Acknowledge
Calling up
Lamp On
process overview
Graphic view Related window

with overview attribute
Browser Bar
LED on operation keyboard flashes
Printout
Output to Historical Message file
Reset buzzer
Silence buzzer
Buzzer sounds
E100103E.ai
Figure Flow of Process Alarm Notification by the Operation and Monitoring Functions

l Notification of System Alarms
The following figure shows the flow of system alarm notification performed upon occurrence of
the system alarm:
Button flashes
Occurrence of
a system alarm System Message banner Acknowledge Delete
Flashes
Lamp On Delete
LED Flashes, System Alarm view
Calling up
System Alarm
view
LED Flashes
SYSTEM
Calling up
System Status
Overview
System Status Overview
FCS Status Display view
Printout
Output to Historical Message file
Reset buzzer
Silence Buzzer
Buzzer sounds
E100104E.ai
Figure Process Flow of Alarm Notification by the Operation and Monitoring Functions upon Occurrence
of the System Alarm
SEE
ALSO Besides alarm message processing, there are several different types of processing performed to print messages,
request messages, etc. For the items relating to the message processing, see the following:
E9, “Message Processing”

n Acknowledging the Alarm

The alarm messages need to be acknowledged on Process Alarm View or System Alarm View.
SEE
ALSO For acknowledging the message, see the following:
“n Message Acknowledgment Operation” in E9.3, “Message Acknowledgment”
l Acknowledge Audible Alarms

The audible alarms need to be acknowledged on the System Message Banner. The audible
alarms can also be acknowledged on the operation keyboard by pressing the following key:
E100105E.ai
The buzzer for repeated warning alarms can only be stopped temporarily.

<E10.2 Alarm Priority> E10-7
E10.2 Alarm Priority

The alarm processing level is defined for each function block. The output operation for
each alarm priority can be selected.
The HIS performs alarm output action according to the alarm processing level.
n Alarm Processing Level

The alarm priority can be designated in the Function Block Overview Builder and the Function
Block Detail Builder. By designating priority for each function block, priority for each process
alarm can be determined.
Any combination of a tag mark, an alarm priority, and a function security level can be designated.
Table Tag Mark, Alarm Priority, and Security Level (Example)
Function
Tag mark Alarm priority
security level
Important tag High-priority alarm 4
Ordinary tag Medium-priority alarm 4
Auxiliary tag 1 Low-priority alarm 1
Auxiliary tag 2 Logging alarm 1
E100201E.ai
SEE
ALSO • For the function security level, see the following:
“n Security Levels” in F3.4, “Function Block Security”
• For designating the alarm priority, see the following:
“n Alarm Processing Levels” in C5.16, “Alarm Processing Levels”

n Alarm Priority and Alarm Processing

The Operation and Monitoring executes the following alarm processing according to the alarm
priority:
Table Designating the Alarm Priority (Default)
Printout Repeated Operation upon
Alarm Display in Buzzer Log to Alarm flashing
Status to warning returning to
priority a window sound a file action
a printer alarm normal
Alarm Dependent on
High- Y Y Y Y Lock type Y
initiated the alarm in action
priority
alarm System Y Dependent on
Y Y Y Y Lock type
recovered the alarm in action
Alarm
Medium- Y Y Y Y Lock type N N
initiated
priority
alarm System
Y Y Y Y Lock type N N
recovered
Alarm
Low- Y Y Y Y Non-lock type N N
initiated
priority
alarm System
Y Y Y Non-lock type N N
recovered
Alarm N Y Y Self-acknowledge type N N
Logging initiated (system-fixed)
alarm System Self-acknowledge type
N Y Y N N
recovered (system-fixed)
Alarm Self-acknowledge type
N N N N
Reference initiated (system-fixed)
alarm System Self-acknowledge type
N N N N
recovered (system-fixed)
E100202E.ai
Y: Yes
N: No
blank: The function is unavailable.
SEE
ALSO • For the alarm flashing action, see the following:
E10.3.1, “Alarm Flashing Action”
• For the priority and processing of the alarm during alarm inhibition, see the following:
“n Alarm Processing during Alarm Masking” in E10.3.3, “Alarm Inhibition (AOF)”

l Display in a Window
▼ CRT
Designate in the Alarm Priority Builder whether or not the status change is to be displayed in a
window upon occurrence of the alarm or upon recovery of the system.
l Printout to a Printer
▼ PRT
Designate in the Alarm Priority Builder whether or not the status change is to be printed out to a
printer upon occurrence of the alarm or upon recovery of the system.
l Log to a File
▼ Historical File
Designate in the Alarm Priority Builder whether or not the status change is to be logged in a
historical message save file upon occurrence of the alarm or upon recovery of the system. A
message logged in a historical message save file can be displayed in a Historical Message
Report window.

<E10.3 Alarm Output Actions> E10-10
E10.3 Alarm Output Actions

The alarm output actions by the HIS include messages output on the window screen and
the LED flashing. The repeated warning alarm can be issued to remind the user of the
occurrence of the alarm, and the priority of the alarm can be temporarily lowered to inhibit
the alarm (AOF).

E10.3.1 Alarm Flashing Action

▼ Alarm Action
Basically, the alarm flashing action starts upon receiving a message that indicates
occurrence of an alarm. The action stops upon receiving a message that indicates
returning to a normal status, or when acknowledgment operation is performed by
the operator. The alarm actions are classified into the following types based on the
flashing actions that correspond to alarm occurrence, returning to a normal status and
acknowledgment operation:
• Lock type (Default for high-priority and medium-priority alarms)
• Non-lock type (Default for low-priority alarms)
• Self-acknowledge type (Default for logging alarms and reference alarms)
Different types of alarm flashing actions can be set for different alarm priorities.
SEE
ALSO For alarm priorities, see the following:
E10.2, “Alarm Priority”
n Flashing Actions of the Lock Type

Until the operator performs acknowledgment operation, flashing continues even after the alarm
status returns to normal (NR).
Occur Recover Occur Recover
Alarm
Legend
Flash Lamp on
[Acknowledge] [Acknowledge] Alarm color
Normal color
Display
Output [Buzzer Reset] Output [Buzzer reset]
Alarm Buzz
E100301E.ai
Figure Time Chart of Flashing Actions of the Lock Type
n Flashing Actions of the Non-Lock Type

Without any acknowledgment operation performed by the operator, flashing stops when the
alarm status returns to normal (NR).
Occur Recover Occur Recover
Alarm
[Acknowledge] Legend
Flash Lamp on
Alarm color
Display
Output Output [Buzzer reset]
Alarm Buzz
E100302E.ai
Figure Time Chart of Flashing Actions of the Non-Lock Type

n Flashing Actions of the Self-Acknowledge Type (Self Recovery Type)

The system performs acknowledgment operation automatically upon occurrence of an alarm.
Thus, there is no flashing.
Occur Recover
Alarm
Acknowledge by system Alarm lamp on
Display
Alarm Buzz
E100303E.ai
Figure Time Chart of Flashing Actions of the Self-Acknowledge Type (Self Recovery Type)
n System Recovery Notification Actions

▼ NR
When the statuses of all alarms in one function block return to normal (NR), flashing starts to
notify the operator of the status change. The actions can be designated only for high-priority
alarms. The actions when alarm recover to normal include two types, “Alarm Occurance
Dependent (Exception Lock)” type and “Non-Lock (Recovery Notification)” type.
l Dependent on the Alarm in Action (XL : eXeption Lock Type)

When the statuses of all alarms return to normal, the flashing status continues; the alarms will
continue to flash if they were flashing, and they will not flash if they were not flashing when the
statuses of all alarms return to normal.
l Non-Lock Type (System Recovery Type)

When the statuses of all alarms return to normal, the normal display starts to flash. The
occurrence of a new alarm will stop the flashing, even if the new alarm has not been
acknowledged. The non-lock type notifies the operator that a function block has returned to
normal.

n Alarm Flashing and Recovery Action

The alarm flashing and the recovery action are explained with the following chart.
l Lock Type Alarm Flashing and Recovery Action

The flashing actions and the recover actions of lock type alarms including the Exception Lock
type and Recovery Notification type are illustrated in the following chart.
Alarm
Legend
Flash Lamp on
Acknowledge Acknowledge
Alarm color
Display Normal color
: Alarm buzzer output
Normal status
Legend
Acknowledge Flash Lamp on
Normal display Normal color
by XL type : Alarm buzzer output
Acknowledge
Normal display
by system recovery type
E100304E.ai
Figure Time Chart of Lock Type Alarm Flashing and Recovery Action
l Non-Lock Type Alarm Flashing and Recovery Action

The flashing actions and the recover actions of non-lock type alarms including the Exception
Lock type and Recovery Notification type are illustrated in the following chart.
Alarm
Legend
Flash Lamp on
Acknowledge
Alarm color
Normal color
Display
: Alarm buzzer output
Normal status
Normal display
by XL type
Acknowledge
Normal display
by system recovery type
E100305E.ai
Figure Time Chart of Non-Lock Type Alarm Flashing and Recovery Action

E10.3.2 Repeated Warning Alarm

The repeated warning alarm reminds the operator of the alarming status still present.
The repeated warning alarms are issued for the process alarms designated as “high-
priority alarms.” If multiple process alarms for which repeated warning alarms can be
issued occur in one function block simultaneously, a repeated warning alarm will be
issued only for the process alarm with the highest priority.
n Repeated Warning Alarms of the Timer Type and Event Type

▼ Rewarning
There are two types of repeated warning alarm actions, the timer type and the event type.
The timer type repeated warning alarm is processed at specified time intervals. The event type
repeated warning alarm processing is processed by a command issued from a sequence table
block, etc.
SEE
ALSO For detailed information on the repeated warning alarm, see the following:
C5.15.2, “Repeated Warning Alarm”
l Timer Type Repeated Warning Alarm

The timer type repeated warning alarm outputs a message at specified time intervals regardless
of whether or not the operator has performed acknowledgment operation when the alarm was
present.
The following figure is the time chart of the timer type repeated warning alarm:
Occurrence
Alarm occurrence status Stop
Legend
Time set Lamp
for the repeated Flash on
warning alarm timer Alarm color
Repeated warning timer
Occurrence message Occurrence Recovery message
message
Occurrence
HIS display Stop
Acknowledgment Acknowledgment
E100306E.ai
Figure Time Chart of the Timer Type Repeated Warning Alarm

l Event Type Repeated Warning Alarm
The event type repeated warning alarm can only be used for annunciator messages. When a
repeated warning command is issued from a Sequence Table Block (ST16, ST16E) while an
annunciator message is present, the event type repeated warning alarm outputs the annunciator
message again.
The following figure is the time chart of the event type repeated warning alarm:
Occur
Alarm Occurrence Status
Stop
Occur
Repeated Warning
Stop
Occurrence Occurrence Recovery Legend

Lamp
message message message
Flash on
Alarm color
HIS display
Acknowledge Acknowledge
E100307E.ai
Figure Time Chart of the Event Type Repeated Warning Alarm

n Designating the Repeated Warning Alarm

This section explains the designation of the repeated warning alarm.
l Designating the Alarm Priority

The repeated warning alarms can be issued for the process alarms designated as “high-priority
alarms.” To process the repeated warning alarms, first designate the process alarm as “high-
priority alarms.”
To designate the alarm priority, use the Function Block Overview Builder and the Function Block
Detail Builder.
SEE
ALSO • For the alarm priority, see the following:
• For designating the alarm priority, see the following:
“n Alarm Processing Levels” in C5.16, “Alarm Processing Levels”
l Designating the Repeated Warning Alarm Period

To designate the output interval of the repeated warning alarm, use the FCS Constant Builder of
each control station.
When Repeated Warning Alarm Period is designated as 0, the alarm does not repeat.
SEE
ALSO For designating the repeated warning alarm period, see the following:
“n Setting of Repeated Warning Alarm Period” in C5.15.2, “Repeated Warning Alarm”
l Repeated Warning Alarm for Process Alarm Messages

The timer type repeated warning alarm can be designated for process alarm messages.
l Repeated Warning Alarm for Annunciator Messages

The timer type or the event type repeated warning alarm can be designated for annunciator
messages.
The two types of repeated warning alarms operate independently of each other. To avoid
confusion, do not designate both types of repeated warning alarms for the same annunciator
message.

E10.3.3 Alarm Inhibition (AOF)

The alarm inhibition (AOF) temporarily converts the notification method of process
alarms to a lower priority action without turning off the alarm detection.
The alarm inhibition (AOF) temporarily converts to a lower priority action the notification
method of process alarms when they are notified to the HIS after being detected by the
control station. All process alarms including IOP and OOP become targets of alarm
inhibition. The state in which an alarm is masked is called “alarm off (AOF) state.”
n Designating the Alarm Masking (AOF)

Alarm inhibition (AOF) can be designated for each function block.
Also, it can be designated for all alarms globally or individually.
The tag mark display color of the function block in alarm inhibition (AOF) state will change to blue.
The alarm inhibition (AOF) designation can be changed to ON and OFF by the operator or
via operation from other function block (mainly from a sequence control block). However, the
operator can only designate alarm inhibition (AOF) for all function blocks at once. On the HIS, the
ON/OFF designation of alarm inhibition (AOF) can be performed for each instrument.
This designation can be performed in the Tuning view.
n Alarm Processing during Alarm Masking

Alarm processing to an instrument subject to alarm masking (AOF) is performed differently from
the way it is performed in a normal state, in accordance with the processing table shown below:
Table Alarm Process during Alarm Masking
Printout Repeated
Display in Buzzer Alarm flashing
Alarm priority to a warning
a window sound action
printer alarm
High-priority alarm N N N Self-acknowledge type N
Medium-priority
N N N Self-acknowledge type
alarm
Low-priority alarm N N N Self-acknowledge type
Logging alarm N N N Self-acknowledge type
E100308E.ai
Y: Yes
N: No
Blank: The function is unavailable.

n Suppressing the Alarm Display by Alarm Priority

The display mode of the Process Alarm view can be selected on the HIS Setup window. When
a display mode is selected, the display can be suppressed based on the alarm priority such as
high-priority alarm, medium-priority alarm and low-priority alarm.
One of the following display modes can be selected for each set of HIS:
• Display all alarms
• Display the representative alarm of each function block
Display the most recent alarm among all alarms relating to one function block.
• Display high-priority alarms only
• Display high- and medium-priority alarms
SEE
ALSO • For selecting the display mode of the Process Alarm view, see the following:
E4.3.6, “Alarm Tab”
• For detailed information on the alarm priority, see the following:
n Relationship between the Repeated Warning Alarm and Alarm Output

Masking
The control station has a function to mask (suppress) output of messages corresponding to
specific alarms during initial cold start. This function masks messages that correspond to the
alarms occurred before the initial cold start (before stopping).
The default setting only allows output of messages that correspond to the alarms occurred after
the initial cold start. However, if there are alarms whose repeated warning alarm specification
is “enabled,” the messages corresponding to these alarms will be output during initial cold start
even when they occurred before the initial cold start (before stopping).
SEE
ALSO For detailed information on the repeated warning alarm, see the following:
C5.15.2, “Repeated Warning Alarm”

<E10.4 Alarm Status Character String and Alarm Processing> E10-19
E10.4 Alarm Status Character String and Alarm

Processing
Upon occurrence of the alarm, the FCS alarm detection function detects the alarm and
then the alarm notification function notifies the HIS of the occurrence of the alarm.
Upon occurrence of the alarm, the color of the tag mark for the function block
corresponding to the alarm changes to the alarm color. The alarm status is displayed in a
character string, and the alarm is processed in a predetermined manner. The alarm status
character string can be either a system-fixed character string or a user-defined character
string.

n Designating the Alarm Status

To engineer the alarm status, designate the following:
1. Alarm status character string (alarm name)
Designate the alarm status character string in the User-Defined Status Character String
Builder.
2. Alarm priority
Designate alarm priorities one by one in the Alarm Priority Builder. Multiple alarm priorities at
the same level cannot be designated for each function block simultaneously.
3. Alarm processing table
Designate the alarm processing table in the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
4. Alarm processing level for each function block
Designate the alarm processing level in the Function Block Overview Builder, the Function
Block Detail Builder, the Control Drawing Builder, the Annunciator Builder, and the Tag List
Builder.
User-Defined Status Character String Builder
HI
LO.AL
HH LL User-Defined Status Character String Builder - [Pjt:MYPJT File:AlmStsLabeledf - Alarm Status Definition]
File Edit View Tool Window Help
Designate the alarm status character
HI
LO.AL
HH LL
USER9
string for each user-defined block.
Bit USER9 USER10 USER11 USER12 USER13 USER14 USER15 USER16
1
2
3
4
5
6 Alarm Priority Builder
7
8
9 NR NR NR
10 OOP ALARM01 ALARM01
11 IOP ALARM02 ALARM02
12 IOP- ALARM03 ALARM03
13 ESTP ALARM04 ALARM04
14
15 HIHI
ALARM05
ALARM06
ALARM05
ALARM06
Designate the output format and
16 LOLO ALARM07 ALARM07 the operation for the alarm priority.
17 HI ALARM08 ALARM08
18 JO ALARM09 ALARM09
19 ALARM10 ALARM10
20 ALARM11 ALARM11
21 DV+ ALARM12 ALARM12
22 DV- ALARM13 ALARM13
23 ALARM14 ALARM14
Message
High-priority alarm : .........

Medium-priority alarm : .........
Ready Position: Line 8 Colimn2
Low-priority alarm : .........
Logging alarm : .........
These bit positions correspond. Reference alarm : .........
Alarm Processing Table Builder

Alarm Processing Table Builder - [Pjt:MYPJT File:AlmTbledf]
Color [5] Bit

7
Color [2] Priority[2] Color [3] Priority[3] Color [4] Priority[4] Designate colors and priorities for
Blue Medium-priority Alarm Blue Low-priority Alarm Blue Alarm Logging Only
N: Black
R: Red
8 Cian Medium-priority Alarm Cian Low-priority Alarm Cian Alarm Logging Only alarm processing levels 5 to 16.
9 Green Medium-priority Alarm Green Low-priority Alarm Green Alarm Logging Only
G: Green
10 Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only
Y: Yellow
B: Blue 11 Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only
M: Magenta 12 Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only
C: Cyan 13 Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only
W: White 14 Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only
SB: Steel Blue
PK: Pink
15 Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Function Block Detail Builder
SG: Spring
OR: Orange
YG: Yellow
VO: Violet 19 Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only
21 Yellow Medium-priority Alarm Yellow Low-priority Alarm Yellow Alarm Logging Only
24 Yellow Medium-priority Alarm Yellow Low-priority Alarm Yellow Alarm Logging Only Designate the alarm processing level
25
26
Yellow
Yellow
Medium-priority Alarm
Medium-priority Alarm
Yellow
Yellow
Low-priority Alarm
Low-priority Alarm
Yellow
Yellow
Alarm Logging Only
Alarm Logging Only
at [User-defined Alarm Process].
Message
Ready
E100401E.ai
Figure Engineering the Alarm Status

n System-Fixed Alarm Status Character String

The alarm status character strings that are output upon occurrence of the alarm are available for
each type of function block. The character string can be confirmed with the system-fixed status
character string viewer. The table below shows the alarm status character strings available for
each function block:
▼ Alarm Status
Table System-Fixed Alarm Status Character String (Alarm Status)

Alarm status
Bit
position PI- ASRV3 to
PID ABSETU FSBSET MC CALCU SBSD ALM-R AN ECS VPM ASRV2
BLEND ASRV8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 CAL CAL CAL CAL CAL CAL CAL CAL CAL CAL CAL
9 NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR
10 OOP OOP OOP OOP OOP OOP OOP SGNL
11 IOP IOP IOP IOP IOP IOP IOP IOP VPTN IOP
12 IOP- IOP- IOP- IOP- IOP- IOP- IOP- DATA
13 HH HH NPLS NPLS TRIP HALM TYPE HTRP
14 LL LL LL DV2 LTRP
15
16 OUTS
17 HI HI HI EMST HI END MALM HI HHH
18 LO LO LO LO PRE LO LLL
19 LEAK LEAK LEAK
20
21 DV+ DV+ BDV+ DV1 PERR CERR LALM DV+ OVR
22 DV- DV- BDV- DV- PWON
23
24
25 VEL+ HDV ANS+ RALM VEL ANS+
26 VEL- LDV BEND ANS- ABAL ANS-
27 MHI MHI BPRE INT MHI
28 MLO MLO MLO
29
30
31
32 CNF CNF CNF CNF CNF CNF CNF CNF ALM
33 NR
PI- ASRV3 to
Bit PID ABSETU FSBSET MC CALCU SBSD ALM-R AN ECS VPM ASRV2
BLEND ASRV8
position
Alarm status
E100402E.ai

▼ Alarm Flashing Status, Alarm Output off Status, Alarm Detection
Table System-Fixed Alarm Status Character String (Other than the Alarm Status)
Alarm flashing Alarm detection
Bit Alarm off status
status designation
position
AFLS AOFS AF
1 AFL
2 AOF
3 AF
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
31
32
33
E100403E.ai
The alarm status character string is displayed in the system-fixed status character string viewer.
By designating the alarm status character string color in the Alarm Processing Table Builder, the
display color of the alarm status will change when the corresponding alarm occurs.

n User-Defined Alarm Status Character String

▼ USER9 (Faceplate Block), USER10 (SFC Block), USER11 to 16 (Unit Instrument), Alarm Status
Besides the system-fixed alarm status character strings, there are eight tables (USER9 to
USER16) for alarm status character strings that the user can designate in the User-Defined
Status Character String Builder for user-defined blocks.
HI
LO.AL
HH LL User-defined Status Character String Builder - [Pjt:MYPJT File:AlmStsLabeledf - Alarm Status Definition]
HI
LO.AL
HH LL
USER9 Bit USER9 USER10 USER11 USER12 USER13 USER14 USER15 USER16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 NR NR NR
10 OOP ALARM01 ALARM01
14 ALARM05 ALARM05
15 HIHI ALARM06 ALARM06
16 LOLO ALARM07 ALARM07
17 HI ALARM08 ALARM08
18 JO ALARM09 ALARM09
19 ALARM10 ALARM10
20 ALARM11 ALARM11
21 DV+ ALARM12 ALARM12
22 DV- ALARM13 ALARM13
23 ALARM14 ALARM14
Message
Ready Position: Line 8 Column 2

E100404E.ai
Figure User-Defined Status Character String Builder
TIP
The character strings cannot be overwritten or downloaded in the User-Defined Status Character String Builder,
the Alarm Processing Table Builder, and the Alarm Priority Builder simultaneously.

The function blocks that can use the alarm status character strings designated here are faceplate
blocks, SFC blocks, and unit instruments. There is a table reserved for each of these function
blocks, used for designating the alarm status character strings. The figure below shows the
relationship between the alarm status character string and the bit position (default) for each
function block:
Table Alarm Status Character String Definition (Default)
For For For For

For SFC For SFC
For faceplate unit For faceplate unit
block block
bit block instrument bit block instrument
position USER11 position USER11
USER9 USER10 USER9 USER10
to USER16 to USER16
1 17 HI ALARM08 ALARM08
2 18 LO ALARM09 ALARM09
3 19 ALARM10 ALARM10
5 21 DV+ ALARM12 ALARM12
6 22 DV- ALARM13 ALARM13
9 NR NR NR 25 TRP ALARM16 ALARM16
10 OOP ALARM01 ALARM01 26 SCBL ALARM17 ALARM17
11 IOP ALARM02 ALARM02 27 INT ALARM18 ALARM18
12 IOP- ALARM03 ALARM03 28 ERR ALARM19 ALARM19
13 ESTP ALARM04 ALARM04 29 DISC ALARM20 ALARM20
14 ALARM05 ALARM05 30 BLCK ALARM21 ALARM21
15 HIHI ALARM06 ALARM06 31 ALARM22 ALARM22
16 LOLO ALARM07 ALARM07 32 CNF ALARM23 ALARM23
33
E100405E.ai
l Precaution on Designating the Character String

Designate the character string for Nos.9 to 32 (with up to eight alphanumeric characters starting
with an alphabetical character).
• Designate for No.9 the alarm status character string indicating the normal status.
• The same character string cannot be designated more than once in one table. For example,
with “NR” designated for No.9, “NR”cannot be designated for Nos.10 to 32 in the same
table.
• If using the same character string in multiple tables, add the same number to the string in
all of the tables. For example, with “NR” designated for No.9 in table USER9, if designating
“NR” in other tables (USER10 to 16), use No.9 in all of these tables.
• Designate for No.33 the character string for default processing. The character string for
default processing refers to a character string output in the user-defined block status other
than that for Nos.1 to 32.
• In the case that the alarm status of faceplate block is connected, the sequence table can
only use the bits 10, 11, 12, 13, 17, 18, 25, 26, 27, 28 of USER9 to carry out the change.
Other bits can not be used for the change even they are defined on the table.
• The bits 15, 16, 21, 22, 29, 30 of USER9 are used for link ALARM_SUM of fieldbus blocks
via ACF11.

n Alarm Processing
The user can designate the alarm display color and priority to process each alarm of function
blocks in the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
TIP
The above designation cannot be overwritten or downloaded in the Alarm Processing Table Builder, the Alarm
Priority Builder, and the User-Defined Status Character String Builder simultaneously.
l Alarm Status Bit Position and Alarm Processing Level No.

The alarm status conforms to the designation performed in the Alarm Processing Table Builder
and the User-Defined Status Character String Builder. The alarm status bit positions in the Alarm
Processing Table Builder correspond to the character string Nos. in the User-Defined Status
Character String Builder.
Alarm status bit positions 1 to 6 are not displayed in a window because they are system-fixed.
Alarm processing level Nos. 1 to 4 are also system-fixed. The user can designate the color and
the priority for alarm processing level Nos. 5 to 16 for alarm status bit positions 7 to 32. The user
can change alarm status bit positions 7 and 8 that are for existing control stations.
Alarm status bit position Alarm processing level No.

Color [5] Bit Color [3] Priority[3] Color [4] Priority[4] Color [5] Priority[5]
7 Blue Low-priority Alarm Blue Alarm Logging Only Blue High-priority Alarm
N: Black 8 Cian Low-priority Alarm Cian Alarm Logging Only Cian High-priority Alarm
R: Red
9 Green Low-priority Alarm Green Alarm Logging Only Yellow High-priority Alarm
G: Green
Y: Yellow 10 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red High-priority Alarm
B: Blue 11 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red High-priority Alarm
M: Magenta 12 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red High-priority Alarm
C: Cyan 13 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Orange High-priority Alarm
W: White 14 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
SB: Steel Blue
15 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
PK: Pink
SG: Spring 16 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
OR: Orange 17 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
YG: Yellow 18 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
VO: Violet 19 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
DB: Deep Sky 20 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
GR: Gray
21 Yellow Low-priority Alarm Yellow Alarm Logging Only Yellow Medium-priority Alarm
Message
Ready
System-fixed User-defined
E100406E.ai
Figure Alarm Processing Table Builder

l Designating the Alarm Status Color and Priority
▼ Color 5 to 16, Priority 5 to 16
Designate the color and the priority for alarm processing level Nos. 5 to 16 for alarm status bit
positions 7 to 32. At the same alarm processing level, designate a higher priority in ascending
order of the bit positions. For example, with a medium-priority alarm designated for bit position 8,
a high-priority alarm cannot be designated for bit positions 9 to 32.
• Color
Choose from 16 colors corresponding to the alarm.
• Priority
Designate the alarm priority.
SEE
ALSO For the alarm priority, see the following:

n Designating Alarm Processing

This section explains how to change the system-fixed alarm status character string color and the
user-defined alarm status character string.
l When Changing the System-Fixed Alarm Status Character String Color

The system-fixed alarm status character string itself cannot be changed, but its color and priority
can be changed.
For example, the PID controller block assigns “HI” to bit position 17. By default this will be
processed as a medium-priority alarm upon its occurrence, and displayed in red.
To change the above medium-priority alarm to the high-priority alarm and display “HI” in
magenta, do the following:
1. To change it to the high-priority alarm, use the Alarm Priority Builder.
Note that changes made here will be effective for high-priority alarms of other function
blocks.
2. In the Alarm Processing Table Builder, select the field for alarm processing level No.5 for
bit position 17, and then select [M: Magenta] for [Color (5)], and [1: High-priority Alarm] for
[Priority (5)]. (The color and the priority can be changed for any of alarm processing level
Nos. 5 to 16.)
7 Blue Low-priority Alarm Blue Alarm Logging Only Blue High-priority Alarm
N: Black 8 Cian Low-priority Alarm Cian Alarm Logging Only Cian High-priority Alarm
R: Red
9 Green Low-priority Alarm Green Alarm Logging Only Yellow High-priority Alarm
G: Green
Y: Yellow 10 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red High-priority Alarm
B: Blue 11 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red High-priority Alarm
M: Magenta 12 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red High-priority Alarm
C: Cyan 13 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Orange High-priority Alarm
W: White 14 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
SB: Steel Blue
15 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
PK: Pink
SG: Spring 16 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
OR: Orange 17 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Mgenta Medium-priority Alarm
YG: Yellow 18 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
VO: Violet 19 Red Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
Low-priority Alarm Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm
Yellow Alarm Logging Only Yellow Medium-priority Alarm
Alarm Logging Only Yellow Medium-priority Alarm
Yellow Medium-priority Alarm
Designate magenta.
Designate the high-priority alarm.
E100407E.ai
Figure Designation in the Alarm Processing Table Builder
3. Select the [Alarm] tab in the Function Block Detail Builder, and then select [5: User-defined
Alarm Process (5)] at [Alarm Processing Level].

l When Changing the User-Defined Alarm Status Character String
For the unit instrument to process alarm “ESTP” as a medium-priority alarm and display “ESTP”
in yellow, do the following:
1. In the User-Defined Status Character String Builder, enter [ESTP] for [USER11] at bit
position 10. (The character string can be entered for any of bit positions 9 to 32.)
HI
LO.AL
HH LL User-defined Status Character String Builder - [Pjt:MYPJT File:AlmStsLabeledf - Alarm Status Definition]
HI
LO.AL
HH LL
USER9 Bit USER9 USER10 USER11 USER12 USER13 USER14 USER15 USER16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 NR NR NR
10 OOP ALARM01 ESTP
ALARM05 ALARM05
ALARM06
Enter “ESTP.”
E100408E.ai
Figure Designation in the User-Defined Status Character String Builder
2. To process the alarm as an alarm other than the medium-priority alarm, make the change in
the Alarm Priority Builder.
Note that changes made here will be effective for medium-priority alarms of other function
blocks.
3. In the Alarm Processing Table Builder, select the field for alarm processing level No.6 for
bit position 10, and then select [Y: Yellow] for [Color (6)], and [2: Medium-priority Alarm] for
[Priority (6)]. (Any of alarm processing level Nos. 5 to 16 can be used.)
7 Blue Alarm Logging Only Blue High-priority Alarm Blue Medium-priority Alarm
N: Black 8 Cian Alarm Logging Only Cian High-priority Alarm Cian Medium-priority
R: Red
9 Green Alarm Logging Only Yellow High-priority Alarm Green Medium-priority
G: Green
Y: Yellow 10 Red Alarm Logging Only Red High-priority Alarm Yellow Medium-priority
B: Blue 11 Red Alarm Logging Only Red High-priority Alarm Red Medium-priority
M: Magenta 12 Red Alarm Logging Only Red High-priority Alarm Red Medium-priority
C: Cyan 13 Red Alarm Logging Only Orange High-priority Alarm Orange Low-priority Alarm
W: White Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm
SB: Steel Blue
Red Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm
R Alarm Logging Only Red Medium-priority Alarm Red Low-priority Alarm
Alarm Logging Onl Mg Medium-priority Alarm
Designate yellow.
Designate the medium-priority alarm. E100409E.ai
Figure Designation in the Alarm Processing Table Builder
4. Select the [Alarm] tab in the Function Block Detail Builder, and then select [6: User-defined
Alarm Process (6)] at [Alarm Processing Level].

<E10.5 Advanced Alarm Filter> E10-29
E10.5 Advanced Alarm Filter

An advanced alarm filter filters out according to specific purposes the alarms generated
on the HIS during the plant operation. It is possible to define a filter for each operator and
only notify the operator regarding alarms corresponding to the operator’s level and range
of rights. In order to use advanced alarm filters, it is necessary to install the Advanced
Alarm Filter package on the HIS.
This section explains the operation of advanced alarm filters, the Advanced Alarm Filter
window, and the syntax for the conditional expressions used for filtering alarms.

E10.5.1 Advanced Alarm Filter Overview

This section provides an overview of the operation and configuration of advanced alarm
filters.
TIP
If CAMS for HIS is enabled, the advanced alarm filters will not be functioning. Thus, the advanced alarm filter
settings on the Alarm tab of HIS Setup window become invalid.
n What is an Advanced Alarm Filter ?

An advance alarm filter can perform the following operations:
• It can suppress alarm buzzer output, LED output and window output generated during
plant operation, according to user-defined filter settings. Note, however, that printer output,
historical output and LED output for user-assigned information (*1) cannot be filtered.
• It is possible to specify conditions for the filtering of alarms using logical operators such
as AND, OR, XOR and NOT. The conditions are specified via fixed qualifiers, such as tag
names, project names, station names and types of alarms, rather than being based on
dynamic conditions that depend on the status for the generation of a given alarm.
• Choose a proper filter from the previously defined filters, and the switch the filter. The filter
can also be disabled.
• It is possible to set security when creating and switching between filters.
• It is possible to export advanced alarm filters created in one HIS, and to import and use
them in another HIS.
*1: LED outputs generated by tag name monitoring defined in graphic, overview and function key assignments.

n Windows Relating to Advanced Alarm Filters

Advanced alarm filters are created and operated in each of the following windows:
• Advanced Alarm Filter window
• HIS Setup window
An overview of each of the windows is given below;
l Advanced Alarm Filter Window

• Creating and Editing Advanced Alarm Filters
New advanced alarm filters are created and existing advanced alarm filters are edited. Up to
20 types of advanced alarm filters can be created.
• Setting Advanced Alarm Filter Security
Configures security settings for enabling/disabling alarm filters and security settings for
editing advanced alarm filters.
• Printing Definitions of Advanced Alarm Filters
Prints out the definitions of advanced alarm filters.
l HIS Setup Window

• Alarm tab
Choose the message type for filtering.
• Preset Menu tab, Function Key tab
These tabs are used to assign operations such as calling up the Advanced Alarm Filter
window and enabling/disabling filters to preset menus and function keys.
l System Message Banner

The names of enabled filters are displayed in the icon display area of the System Message
banner.

E10.5.2 Using Advanced Alarm Filters

This section explains how to call an advanced alarm filter, how to enable/disable it, and
the HIS operation while advanced alarm filter is enabled.
n Sequence of Advanced Alarm Filter Operation

An advanced alarm filter can be used through performance of the following sequence of
operations;
1. Perform the settings pertinent to advanced alarm filters in the Alarm tab of the HIS Setup
window. Register the function of calling up the Advanced Alarm Filter window to preset
menu or function key as necessary.
2. Call up the Advanced Alarm Filter window to create an advanced alarm filter on the HIS.
SEE
ALSO • For a detailed explanation of how to create advanced alarms, see the following:
E10.5.3, “Advanced Alarm Filter Window”
• For information on calling up the Advanced Alarm Filter window, see the following in this section:
“l Calling Up the Advanced Alarm Filter Window” in “n How to Operate Advanced Alarm Filters”
3. Enable the new advanced alarm filter from the name entry tool box or the Advanced Alarm
Filter window.
IMPORTANT
The settings of the advance alarm filter are valid within the HIS. If multiple users are login
and logout the HIS, or when the HIS is restarted, the settings of the advanced filter cannot be
changed automatically. When a different user login, the advanced filter may need to be setup
again. This is important to prevent the unexpected accidents caused by improper use of the
advanced alarm filter.

n How to Operate Advanced Alarm Filters
l Settings in the HIS Setup Window

When the Advanced Alarm Filter package is installed on the HIS, the following advanced alarm
filter setting items are displayed in the Alarm tab.
• Process Alarm Filter
• Operation Guide Message Filter
• Keep the Filtering Out Messages
The details of each of the setting items are described below;‑‑‑

• Process Alarm Filter
Check the [Process Alarm Filter] check box to enable the filtering of process alarm
messages so that process alarms are filtered according to the settings of the specified
advanced alarm filter. This check box is checked by default.
• Operation Guide Message Filter
Check the [Operation Guide Message Filter] check box to enable the filtering of operator
guide messages so that operator guide messages are filtered according to the setting of the
specified advanced alarm filter. This check box is cleared by default.
• Keep the Filtering Out Messages
Check the [Keep the Filtering Out Messages] check box to store on the HIS messages
suppressed by the specific filter. There is a maximum number of messages that can be
stored, and messages are stored until the maximum is reached. Up to 200 process alarms
and 40 operator guide messages are stored. As a general rule, older messages are deleted
first when the maximum number is exceeded, although the confirmation status of the
messages is taken into consideration. Any messages that have been suppressed will be
displayed if the filtering is canceled. This check box is cleared by default.
SEE
ALSO For details on how to perform settings in the HIS Setup window, see the following:
E4.3.6, “Alarm Tab”

l Calling Up the Advanced Alarm Filter Window
The Advanced Alarm Filter window can be called up on an HIS in the following ways;
• Call from Name Entry Tool Box
The Advanced Alarm Filter window can be called from the Name Entry Tool Box. On the
Browser Bar of HIS, click the label of Name Input Tool Box so as to display the Name Entry
– Toolbox, and then click [Call] after entering the follows:
.AF
• Registration to Preset Menu or a Function Key
It is possible to assign the function of calling up the Advanced Alarm Filter window to preset
menu and/or a function key. The following format is used for this assignment:
OΔ.AF
SEE
ALSO • For the detailed explanations of registering an operation to the Preset menu, see the following:
E4.3.7, “Preset Menu Tab”
• For the detailed explanations of registering an operation to a function key, see the following:
E4.3.9, “Function Keys Tab”
l Basic Security for Advanced Alarm Filter Operations

Security settings have been made for advanced alarm filter operations. Additionally, it is possible
to specify basic security settings for each advanced alarm filter from Advance Filter window.
• Creating New Advanced Alarm Filters
Only the user with S3 privilege can create a new advanced alarm filter.
• Changing Security Settings of Advanced Alarm Filters
Only the user with S3 privilege can change the security settings for an advanced alarm filter.
• Enabling/Disabling Advanced Alarm Filters
For each advanced alarm filter, the S1 to S3 and U1 to U7 user groups can be permitted to
enable/disable the advanced alarm filter.
• Editing Operation
For each advanced alarm filter, the S1 to S3 and U1 to U7 user groups can be permitted to
edit the conditional expressions and comments of the advanced alarm filters.

l Enabling/Disabling Advanced Alarm Filters
If an advanced alarm filter is enabled, alarms are displayed according to the specified advanced
alarm filter conditions. If the advanced alarm filter is disabled, all alarms will be displayed. In order
to enable/disable an advanced alarm filter, perform either of the following operations from an HIS:
• Enabling/Disabling Advanced Alarm Filters from the Name Entry Tool Box
From the Name Entry – Toolbox, the advanced alarm filter can be enabled or disabled. On
the Browser Bar of HIS, click the label of Name Input Tool Box so as to display the Name
Entry – Toolbox, and then click [Call] after entering the follows:
.AFΔFilterID
If “0” is specified for FilterID, an advanced alarm filter that has been previously enabled
becomes disabled.
Example of enabling: .AFΔ1
Example of disabling: .AFΔ0
• Registration to Preset Menu or a Function Key
It is possible to assign the operation for enabling/disabling specific advanced alarm filters to
preset menu or a function key. Use the following format for the assignment:
OΔ.AFΔFilterID
If “0” is specified for FilterID, an advanced alarm filter that has been previously enabled
becomes disabled.
Example of enabling: OΔ.AFΔ1
Example of disabling: OΔ.AFΔ0
SEE
ALSO • For details on registering an operation to the Preset menu, see the following:
• For details on registering an operation to a function key, see the following:
E4.3.9, “Function Keys Tab”
• Enabling an Advanced Alarm Filter from the Advanced Alarm Filter Window
It is possible to enable an advanced alarm filter from the Advanced Alarm Filter window, as
follows:
1. Call up the Advanced Alarm Filter window.
2. Select [Change] - [Filter On] from the [Filter] menu to display the filter list dialog box.
Select a filter to enable, then click the [OK] button. The selected advanced alarm filter
will be enabled.
• Disabling an Advanced Alarm Filter from the Advanced Alarm Filter Window
Select [Change] - [Filter Off] from the [Filter] menu to disable the currently enabled
advanced alarm filter.
SEE
ALSO For a detailed explanation of operations in the Advanced Alarm Filter window, see the following:
E10.5.3, “Advanced Alarm Filter Window”

n HIS Operations when an Advanced Alarm Filter is Enabled

If an advanced alarm filter is enabled, the notification and display statuses of alarms on an HIS
will change according to the conditions of the enabled filter.
l Notification and Display of Alarms

Advanced alarm filters act on operator guide messages and process alarm messages. The
following messages and output signals are affected:
• Windows
Messages in the Process Alarm view, System Message banner and Operator Guide view
• LED output
Notifications via the Browser bar and operation keyboard
• Buzzer output
l Display on System Message Banner

On System Message Banner, the filter name and the number of unacknowledged alarms
(blinking) as well as the total number of process alarms are displayed.
Example: AF01
l Display on Process Alarm View and Operator Guide View

When the advanced alarm filter is enabled, the name of the advanced alarm filter and the
comment text of the filter will be displayed on the title bars of Process Alarm View and the
Operator Guide View.

E10.5.3 Advanced Alarm Filter Window

This section explains the configuration of and operations in the Advanced Alarm Filter
window.
n Configuration of the Advanced Alarm Filter Window

The configuration of the Advanced Alarm Filter window is shown below.
.AF Alarm Filter - AF01 :
File Edit View Filter Tool Window Help
AF
AF01 :
Ready
E100501E.ai
Figure Advanced Alarm Filter Window
l Menu Bar
The Advanced Alarm Filter window has the following menus in the menu bar;
[File], [Edit], [View], [Filter], [Tool], [Window], [Help]
l Toolbar
Menu items are placed on the toolbar of the Advanced Alarm Filter window, starting at the left;
[New], [Open], [Save], [Print], [Cut], [Copy], [Paste], [Filter On], [Filter Off], [Online Manual]

n Operations in the Advanced Alarm Filter Window

In the Advanced Alarm Filter window, it is possible to create new advanced alarm filters, edit
existing advanced alarm filters and enable/disable advanced alarm filters.
l Creating New Advanced Alarm Filters

A new advanced alarm filter can be created in the following manner:
1. Select [New] from the [File] menu of the Advanced Alarm Filter window. A file will open, in
which new filter conditions can be entered.
2. Enter appropriate filter conditions according to the purpose, and edit them if necessary.
SEE
ALSO For details on the syntax for filtering conditions, see the following:
E10.5.4, “Syntax of Advanced Alarm Filter Rules”
3. Select [Property] from the [Filter] menu. The Property dialog box will be displayed.
Property - [AF01]
Filter comment Security

entry Box
S1 S2 S3 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 U7
Filter On/Off
Edit
OK Cancel
E100502E.ai
Figure Property Dialog Box
In the Property dialog box it is possible to enter a comment for the filter, specify security
settings for enabling/disabling the filter, as well as security settings regarding the filter
editing.
Up to 64 single-byte characters or 32 double-byte characters can be entered as the filter
comment. After setting the properties, click the [OK] button of the Property dialog box to
close the Property dialog box.
4. Select [Save] from the [File] menu, or click [Save] on the toolbar.
l Input Support for Advanced Alarm Filter

Input support is available for entering conditional expressions.
1. Click the right mouse button while entering a conditional expression in the Advanced Alarm
Filter window. A pop-up menu will be displayed and contains keyword strings used in
conditional expressions.
2. Select an appropriate keyword string.
The selected keyword is inserted at the current cursor position.

l Making Changes to Advanced Alarm Filters
An advanced alarm filter can be modified in the following manner:
1. Select [Open] from the [File] menu of the Advanced Alarm Filter window. Select Filter dialog
box will be displayed.
Select Filter - [Open]
Browse
FILTER COMMENT
OK Cancel
E100503E.ai
Figure Select Filter Dialog Box
2. Select an advanced alarm filter to modify from the Select Filter dialog box. The data of the
selected filter is displayed.
3. Change the filter conditional expression on the screen or change the comment and basic
security settings by calling up the Property dialog box.
IMPORTANT
When the settings of the advanced alarm filter are modified, if the user logout without saving the
settings, the settings will be lost when the next user who does not have the privilege to modify the
advanced alarm filter login.
l Deleting Advanced Alarm Filters

An advanced alarm filter can be deleted in the following manner;
1. Select [Delete] from the [Filter] menu of the Advanced Alarm Filter window. Filter List dialog
box will be displayed.
2. Select the advanced alarm filter to delete and click the [OK] button. The selected advanced
alarm filter will be deleted. Click the [Cancel] button to close the Filter List dialog box without
deleting the advanced alarm filter.

l Importing Advanced Alarm Filters
An advanced alarm filter can be imported in the following manner;
1. Select [External File] and then [Import] from the [File] menu in the Advanced Alarm Filter
window. Select Filter dialog box will be displayed.
2. Click the [Browse] button in the Select Filter dialog box. A dialog box for browsing folders will
be displayed.
3. Select a folder that contains exported advanced alarm filter files and click the [OK] button.
4. From the Select Filter dialog box, select an advanced alarm filter to import and click the [OK]
button.
5. A confirmation dialog box for overwriting a file will be displayed. Click the [OK] button to
overwrite the existing advanced alarm filter of the same name with the data of the selected
export file.
l Exporting Advanced Alarm Filters

An advanced alarm filter can be exported in the following manner;
1. Select [External File] and then [Export] from the [File] menu in the Advanced Alarm Filter
window. Select Filter dialog box will be displayed.
2. Click the [Browse] button in the Select Filter dialog box. A dialog box for browsing folders will
be displayed.
3. Select an advanced alarm filter to be exported from the Select Filter dialog box and click the
[OK] button.
4. Select an export destination folder and click the [OK] button.

n Advanced Alarm Filter Test

It is possible to check the conditional expression entered for an advanced alarm filter before
actually operating it on an HIS.
l Syntax Check
A syntax check can be performed on the conditional expression in the Advanced Alarm Filter
window.
Once the conditional expression has been entered, select [Check Syntax] from the [Tool] menu
on the menu bar. If any errors are found in the conditional expression for the advanced alarm
filter, they will be highlighted on the display.
l Operation Test of Conditional Expressions

It is possible to create test data that can be used for the testing of conditional expressions rather
than using actual process alarms and operator guide messages generated in the HIS. This test is
performed in the following manner:
1. Select [Test Filter Rules] from the [Tool] menu on the menu bar. Select File dialog box will be
displayed.
2. Select a historical file to be used as basis for test data from the Select File dialog box. A
CSV format file will be created based on the historical file and displayed. The conditional
expression will be tested using this test file.
3. Change the contents of the displayed file as necessary. If any changes are made, be sure
to save the file before closing it. Since the file format is CSV, the file can be edited using
Microsoft Excel after closing it. In this case, the file must be saved in CSV format.
4. Select [Create Test Message] from the [Tool] menu on the menu bar. Select File dialog box
will be displayed.
5. Select the displayed test file to open the file. Either the number “0” or “1” is inserted at the
beginning of each line in the file. “0” indicates false, meaning that the corresponding alarm
will not be displayed and “1” indicates true, meaning that the corresponding alarm will be
displayed.

E10.5.4 Syntax of Advanced Alarm Filter Rules

This section explains the syntax for the conditional expression that specifies the behavior
of an advanced alarm filter.
n Overview of Alarm Filtering Conditions

The rules for alarm-filtering conditional expressions are explained below.
l Rules of Filtering Conditional Expressions

• Generated alarms are evaluated according to the entered conditional expression. If the
expression evaluates to true (1), that alarm will be activated. If the expression evaluates to
false (0), that alarm will be suppressed.
• Only one conditional expression may be entered for one advanced alarm filter. One
conditional expression may consist of multiple operators, special characters, keyword
strings and pattern strings.
• The strings entered in the conditional expression are not case-sensitive.
• It is possible to enter approximately 100 patterns in one conditional expression. Even if
one conditional expression contains more than 100 patterns, no error messages will be
displayed when entering it in the Advanced Alarm Filter window, and it will operate on
an HIS. However, as a guideline, no more than 100 patterns should be used in a single
conditional expression.
n Components of Conditional Expressions

The details of each of the elements from which filtering conditions can be constructed are
explained here.
l Keyword Strings
Keyword strings include “KIND:,” “PJT:,” “PL:,” “AL-C:,” “AL:,” “AL-P:,” “STN:,” “TAG:,” “NO:,” and
“TYPE:.” A keyword string determines the type of filtering pattern.
• KIND: (Type of Message)
This keyword string is used to define the types of messages to be filtered. AL (process
alarms) or OG (operator guide messages) can be specified.
Example: KIND:AL
Meaning: This filter will produce output for process alarms.
• PJT: (Project ID)
This keyword string is used to define the projects to be filtered by specifying the project ID.
This can be used when multiple project connection is present. P1, P2, and so on can be
specified.
Example: PJT:P1
Meaning: This filter will produce output for process alarms and operator guide
messages of the project with the project ID P1.
• PL: (Plant Hierarchy Name)
This keyword string is used to define the plant to be filtered by specifying a plant hierarchy
name or plant hierarchy number (1, 2, 3, and so on). The plant hierarchy number can be
looked up in the Plant Hierarchy Viewer, which can be called up from System View.
Example: PL:S1
messages whose plant hierarchy name is S1.

• AL-C: (Alarm Color)
This keyword string is used to define the alarm color to be filtered. Specify either an
alphabetical string that indicates a color name or a color number. The correspondence
between color numbers and color names is shown below.
No.42 to 65: Black, Red, Green, Yellow, Blue, Magenta, Cyan, White, SteelBlue,
Pink, SpringGreen, Orange, YellowGreen, Violet, DeepSkyBlue, Brown,
MidnightBlue, LimeGreen, DarkOliveGreen, Gray10, Gray25, Gray40,
Gray50, Gray75
No.65: Gray
No.66 to 245: UD1 to UD180 (user-defined colors)
Example: AL-C:RED
messages whose alarm color is RED.
• AL: (Alarm Name)
This keyword string is used to define the alarm names to be filtered. Specify an alarm status
string, such as HI, LO. This keyword string cannot be used for filters targeting operator guide
messages. In such cases, that portion will be ignored, and the evaluation and calculation will
not be performed.
Example: AL:HH
Meaning: This filter will produce output for process alarms in alarm status HH.
SEE
ALSO For a detailed explanation of alarm status, see the following:
C6.3, “Alarm Status”
• AL-P: (Alarm Priority)

This keyword string is used to define the alarm priority to be filtered. Specify either H (High
Priority Alarm), M (Medium Priority Alarm), L (Low Priority Alarm), or 0 (High Priority Alarm),
1 (Medium Priority Alarm), or 2 (Low Priority Alarm). This keyword string cannot be used for
filters targeting operator guide messages. In such cases, that portion will be ignored, and
the evaluation and calculation will not be performed.
Example: AL-P:M
Meaning: This filter will produce output for medium priority alarms.
• STN: (Station Name)
This keyword string is used to define the stations to be filtered by specifying station names.
Example: STN:S0101
• TAG: (Tag Name)
This keyword string is used to define the tag names to be filtered by specifying tag names.
Example: TAG:FIC*
messages whose tag names start with “FIC.”
• NO: (Message Number)
This keyword string is used to define the messages to be filtered by specifying the message
number.
Example: NO:1101
Meaning: This filter will produce output for messages with message number 1101.

• TYPE: (Alarm Type)
This keyword string is used to define the type of alarms to be filtered. Specify either BLK
(Function Block), ANN (annunciator message), or OTH (others). This string cannot be used
for filters targeting operator guide messages. In such cases, that portion will be ignored, and
the evaluation and calculation will not be performed.
Example: TYPE:BLK
Meaning: This filter will produce output for process alarms of function blocks.
l Operators
Operators include “|” (OR), “&” (AND), “^” (XOR), and “!” (NOT).
An expression is evaluated from the left. If an operator is omitted between two patterns, it will be
processed as if “|” (OR) were inserted.
Example: TAG:A B is processed as TAG:A|B.
• l
The following calculation rules are applied to “|” (OR):
1|1=1, 1|0=1, 0|1=1, 0|0=0
The combinatory rule applies from left to right. If several patterns are combined by “|,” the
entire combination will become true as soon as an individual pattern is evaluated as true, at
which point the evaluation will end.
Example: TAG:A* |TAG:B* |TAG:C*
Operation: If this pattern is entered and an alarm with the tag name B001 is
generated, internally, the pattern TAG:C* will not be evaluated against the
tag name B001, and the alarm will be output.
• &
The following calculation rules are applied to “&” (AND):
1&1=1, 1&0=0, 0&1=0, 0&0=0
The combinatory rule applies from left to right. If several patterns are combined by “&,” the
entire combination will become false as soon as an individual pattern is evaluated as false,
at which point the evaluation will end.
Example: STN:S0101 &TAG:B* &AL-C:RED
Operation: If this pattern is entered and an alarm with the tag name C001 is
generated by station S0101, the alarm color will not be evaluated
internally and the alarm will be suppressed.
• ^
The following calculation rules are applied to “^” (Exclusive or):
1^1=0, 1^0=1, 0^1=1, 0^0=0
The combinatory rule applies from left to right.
Example: TAG:(FIC*^FIC*Z)
Operation: If this pattern is entered, only alarms with tag names that match with FIC*
but do not match FIC*Z will be output.
• !
The following calculation rules are applied to “!” (NOT):
!1=0, !0=1
The combinatory rule applies from right to left.
Example: TAG:!Z*
Operation: If this pattern is entered, all alarms with tag names that do not match Z*
will be output.

l Pattern Strings
A pattern string follows a keyword string to form a filtering pattern. Arbitrary string as well as “*”
(wildcard) and “?” (any one character) can be used.
• Arbitrary Strings
An arbitrary string can consist of any string that will define a pattern. Use it when describing
tag names, station names, etc. An expression evaluates to true (1) if a value matches the
specified string, but to false (0) if they do not match.
Example: STN:S0101
Meaning: This indicates a station with the name described by the character string
S0101. The expression evaluates to true if the station name matches
S0101.
• * (Wild Character)
Use “*” to indicate any string when defining a pattern such as a tag name. The wildcard
character may represent 0 or more characters.
Example: TAG:F*
Meaning: This indicates all tag names starting with F. The expression evaluates to
true for all tag names starting with F, such as FIC100 or F0001.
• ? (Any One Character)

Use the symbol “?” to indicate any one character when entering a pattern such as tag name.
Example: TAG:FIC00?
Meaning: The expression is true if the tag name begins with FIC00 and contains
one arbitrary character at the end, such as FIC001 or FIC00A. FIC00 and
FIC0012 evaluate to false.

l Special Characters
Special characters include “( )” (parentheses), “ “ “ ” (escape string), “\” (escape character), “//”
(comment) and “/* */” (comment).
• ( ) (Parentheses)
Parentheses can be used in the same way as parentheses are used in mathematical
expressions. A pattern enclosed by ( ) is evaluated before other patterns.
Example: TAG:(FIC* ^ FIC*Z)
messages with tag names that match FIC* but do not match FIC*Z.
• “ “ (Escape String)
A character string enclosed by “ “ is treated as a pattern string. Use these characters to
specify Japanese characters as a pattern string, to specify a lowercase pattern, or to specify
an operator or a keyword string as a pattern.
• \ (Escape Character)
The character immediately following “\” is treated as a pattern character. Use this character
for instance to specify an operator as part of a pattern character string.
• // (Comment)
All characters after “//” to the next carriage return character are treated as comments. It is
possible to disable a part of a condition using a comment.
Example: ...
// STN:S0101 &
TAG:FIC* &
...
In the conditional expression string above, all alarms with tag names that match FIC* will
produce output. If “//” is removed, only alarms generated at the station named S0101 with
tag names matching FIC* will produce output.
• /* */
All characters within the range enclosed by “/* */” are treated as comments. It is possible to
disable a part of a condition using a comment.
Example: ...
TAG:(FIC00? /* |TIC00? |HIC00? */)
In the conditional expression string above, only alarms with tag names that match FIC00?
will produce output. If “/*” and “*/” are removed, alarms with tag names that match either
FIC00?, TIC00? or HIC00? will produce output.

<E11. Consolidated Historical Message> E11-1
E11. Consolidated Historical Message

Consolidated Historical Message is comprised of two functions: “Historical Viewer” that
displays and outputs historical messages and “Historical Server Storage” that stores
historical messages. It uniformly manages historical messages collected by multiple HISs
on a general-purpose PC. Install “Consolidated Historical Message Viewer (Meeting FDA)”
on a general-purpose PC connected to a higher level network.
Consolidated Historical Message can be used as FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 compatible.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the settings of Consolidated Historical Message, see the following:
E11.1, “Setting Up Consolidated Historical Message”
For more information about Historical Viewer, see the following:
E11.2, “Historical Viewer”
n What Is Consolidated Historical Message?

Consolidated Historical Message stores historical message save files collected by multiple HISs
on a general-purpose PC, searches the historical messages stored, displays them in a window
and outputs them to a printer.
With the uniform management of historical messages, the tracking of plant product materials that
were previously performed by using multiple HISs can now be performed on a single general-
purpose PC.
Historical Message Integration Package is comprised of the following two functions:
l Historical Server Storage

The Historical Server Storage service copies historical message files collected by HISs to a disk
(destination) of a general-purpose PC according to the timings of system-defined schedule.
The Historical Server Storage service can run separately in all the HISs that applied with
Consolidated Historical Message.
l Historical Viewer
The Historical Viewer function is used to search the historical message save files copied from
each of HISs to a general-purpose PC using specified search criteria, and to display the result.
This function can also be used to output the search result as a report to a printer. The Historical
Viewer function is included in Consolidated Historical Message Viewer (Meeting FDA), and runs
on a general-purpose PC connected with a higher level network.
Furthermore, together with an accessory tool for displaying usage history, this function can
analyze the historical message save files and display the usage history of HISs or batches.
n Difference with Long - Term Data Storage Package

Long-Term Data Storage Package can store the historical message save file of one HIS.
On the other hand, Consolidated Historical Message is designed to manage the historical
message save files of multiple HISs, and to run on a general-purpose PC connected to a higher
level information system network.

n Systems Applicable with Consolidated Historical Message Package

The Consolidated Historical Message Package can be applied in a system that CENTUM VP
project and CENTUM CS 3000(*1) project are integrated.
*1: Only support release R3.08 or later.
n Use with Adobe Acrobat Products

By using both Consolidated Historical Message and Adobe Acrobat products together, reports
generated by the Historical Viewer function can be converted into PDF files as electronically
recorded documents, thus making it possible to prevent unauthorized alteration to historical
reports.
Furthermore, by using the e-signatures feature of Adobe Acrobat products, electronic signatures
can be used in converted PDF files to expedite approval process for electronically recorded
documents.

n Overall Configuration of Consolidated Historical Message

The following shows the overall configuration of Consolidated Historical Message.
General-purpose PC
Electronic signatures
utilizing Adobe Acrobat
HIS0163 HIS0164
Historical Historical Historical Historical

message message message message
save file 1 save file 2 save file 1 save file 2 Reference
Historical Viewer
Historical Historical
message message
save file 3 save file 3
Save the historical message files according Save the historical message files according
to the timings of system-defined schedule to the timings of system-defined schedule
Information system Ethernet
HIS0163 HIS0164
Operation and Operation and
Long-term monitoring function Long-term monitoring function
data storage basics data storage basics
Historical Server Historical Server
Report Storage Report Storage
Historical Historical Historical Historical Historical Historical

message message message message message message
save file 1 save file 2 save file 3 save file 1 save file 2 save file 3
Control bus
FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103
Each function block Each function block Each function block

• Process data • Process data • Process data
• Process alarm • Process alarm • Process alarm
E110001E.ai
Figure Entire Configuration of Consolidated Historical Message

n Mutual Relationship of Each Function

The following shows the mutual relationship of each function of Consolidated Historical Message.
Signed electronic document

Signed report
(*.pdf)
Adobe
Acrobat Self-Sign Acrobat
Range of profile E-Signatures
Adobe Acrobat
products
Report
(*.pdf)
Output
Historical Report
Filtering condition
Viewer (*.CSV)
Print
Range of
Consolidated Historical
Message Viewer Historical file
(Meeting FDA) dedicated for Report
reading (*.log)
Effective to be indelible
• Setting for storage Historical
destination PC Server
• Setting for storage Storage
destination folder
Range of Historical
basic operation message
and save file (*.log)
monitoring function
Basic
• Process alarm Operation
• System alarm and
• Operation record Monitoring
Function
E110002E.ai
Figure Mutual Relationship of Each Function of Consolidated Historical Message

n Operating Environment of Consolidated Historical Message Viewer

(Meeting FDA)
Install Consolidated Historical Message Viewer (Meeting FDA) on a general-purpose PC
connected to a higher level network. For more information, refer to the documents listed below.
SEE
ALSO For the operating environment of Consolidated Historical Message Viewer (Meeting FDA), refer to the following
GSs:
LHS5100 Standard Builder Function (GS 33M10D10-40E)
n Setting Preferences for HISs

Make settings with respect to message output uniform among HISs to be integrated by using
this package. In particular, “Tag Name Length” in HIS settings must be made uniformly among
all the HISs. Also, make the user’s password of each HIS to be used for consolidated historical
message the same.

<E11.1 Setting Up Consolidated Historical Message> E11-6
E11.1 Setting Up Consolidated Historical Message

This section describes the procedure for setting up Historical Server Storage in order to
construct an environment in which historical message save files can be stored from an
HIS to a general-purpose PC.
n Operation Flow
The following shows an operation flow for setting up Consolidated Historical Message.
Start setup
Setup of the storage destination folder for

historical message save files
Setup in the PC where Historical Viewer is installed
Creation of a server storage definition file
Setup of the server storage definition file
Setup on the HIS side
Troubleshooting
Set up for saving files in PDF format

Setup using Adobe Acrobat products only if they are used
and for e-signatures
End setup Operation on a general-purpose PC
Operation on an HIS
E110101E.ai
Figure Operation Flow for Setting Up Historical Message Integration
SEE
ALSO For more information about each of the setup steps above, see the following sections:
• About the setup of the storage destination folder for historical message save files, see
E11.1.1, “Setting Up the Storage Destination Folder for Historical Message Save Files”
• About the creation of a server storage definition file, see
E11.1.2, “Creating a Server Storage Definition File”
• About the setup of the server storage definition file, see
E11.1.3, “Setting Up the Server Storage Definition File”
• About troubleshooting, see
E11.1.4, “Troubleshooting”
• About the setup for saving files in PDF format and for e-signatures, see
E11.1.5, “Settings for Saving Files in PDF Format and for E-Signatures”

n Settings for Storing a Historical Message Save File

In order to search, display and output historical messages using Consolidated Historical
Message, it is necessary to perform the following settings:
• Creating a storage destination folder for historical message save files
• Creating a server storage definition file
• Setting up the server storage definition file
n Settings for Saving Files in PDF Format and for E-Signatures

To save the search results in PDF files and add e-signatures, it is necessary to install Adobe
Acrobat products in advance and set up e-signatures as listed below:
• Installing Adobe Acrobat products
• Creating an Acrobat Self-Sign profile
n Commands for Consolidated Historical Message

Two commands, “BKHSetHistMgr” and “BKHSrvHistMgr,” that run on an HIS are used to set up
Historical Server Storage in Consolidated Historical Message.
SEE
ALSO • For the BKHSetHistMgr command, see the following:
E11.1.3, “Setting Up the Server Storage Definition File”
• For the BKHSrvHistMgr command, see the following:
“n BKHSrvHistMgr Command Details” in E11.1.4, “Troubleshooting”

E11.1.1 Setting Up the Storage Destination Folder for

Historical Message Save Files
Historical Server Storage that runs on each HIS copies the historical message files save
in HISs into the storage destination folders of a general-purpose PC. The Historical Viewer
is required for displaying the historical messages. Therefore, for the saved historical
message files, it is necessary to set up the destination folders in advance on a general-
purpose PC where Historical Viewer is installed.
n Creating a Storage Destination Folder for Historical Message Save

Files
Create a folder to be used as the storage destination of historical message save files on a
general-purpose PC on which Historical Viewer is installed.
l Creating a User
Logon to the general-purpose PC using a user account with Administrator privilege of the PC
where the historical message file are stored, and create a user to start Historical Viewer.
User name: The name of the user
Password: The password of the user
The created user needs to be added to CTM_ENGINEER group. If the created user is a local of a
general-purpose PC, the procedure is as follows:
1. Choose the user in the Computer Management window, and then right click the mouse, and
then choose [Properties] from the menu.
2. Open Member Of tab and then add the user to the user group.
If the user is a domain user, you need to confirm with your computer administrator.
l Creating CENTUM User

This user needs to be created for CENTUM VP system to collect the historical messages from
CENTUM CS 3000 project for integration in the general-purpose PC, which Consolidated
Historical Message Viewer is installed.
On the general-purpose PC for saving the historical messages, logon the PC using an
administrative account and then create the following user account.
User Name: CENTUM
Password: Password for CENTUM
l Create Groups
Creating groups is not required if the IT security setting is defined as a legacy model.
Logon to the general-purpose PC using a user account with Administrator privilege of the PC
where the historical message file are stored, and create the following groups.
• CTM_ENGINEER_ADM
• CTM_ENGINEER
• CTM_MAINTENANCE

Moreover, you need to confirm that the administrative user of the general-purpose PC should
also be a member of CTM_MAINTENANCE group. The procedure is as follows:
1. Choose the user in the Computer Management window, and then right click the mouse, and
then choose [Properties] from the menu.
2. Open Member Of tab and then confirm the user group.
l Creating a Storage Destination Folder for Historical Message Save Files

Create a folder to be used as the storage destination of historical message save files. The
storage destination folder must be created on a hard disk with ample free space. The following
describes the procedure for creating a folder:
TIP
If the Historical Viewer is installed in the same PC where the CENTUM VP is installed, the folders for holding the
historical message files should not be created in the folder of system builders, or in the folder of project files.
1. Create a folder from Windows Explorer.

Example: Create a folder C:\CENTUM and make the folder shared.
SEE
ALSO For more information about sharing folders in Windows XP, see the following:
“l Sharing (Windows XP/Vista)”
2. Create a folder for storing historical message save files under the folder created in step 1
above. Use the folder name “HisHist.”
Example: Create a folder C:\CENTUM\HisHist.
IMPORTANT
Do not create any folders under the folder name “HisHist.” Folders to be required for storage will
be created automatically by the system.
l Security Settings
If the Standard-Model or Strengthening-Model IT Security setting is applied for IT security
settings, the permissions for accessing the designated folders need to be added to the group of
the user who generated the folder, to the Everyone group, and to the Administrator group of the
general-purpose PC.
If the Legacy-Model IT Security setting is applied for IT security settings, the permission should
be added to the Everyone group and the Administrator group of the general-purpose PC.
Defined the security settings for the folder of automatically saved messages and the folder of
historical messages in the Historical Server so as to make sure the saved files of the historical
messages will not be modified or deleted.
However, since the users of general-purpose PC with Administrators privileges have the full
control permission in the PC and the users are able to modify and delete files so that when a user
logs on the system with Administrator privilege, the user will be able to alter and delete the stored
files. Thus file operations in the folder must be performed carefully.

l Security Setup (Windows Vista)
1. Logon to the general-purpose PC using a user account with Administrator privilege of that
PC that the Historical Viewer is installed.
2. Use Windows Explorer to find the folder of HisHist which is designated as the storage
destination. Right click the folder and choose Properties from the context menu. And then
open Security tab.
3. On the displayed Security tab, click [Edit…] button so as to display the Permission Entry for
HisHist dialog box.
Permissions for HisHist
Security
Object name: C:\CENTUMVP\HisHist
Group or user names:

CTM_ENGINEER_ADM (HIS0164\CTM_ENGINEER_ADM)
CTM_OPERATOR (HIS0164\CTM_OPERATOR)
CREATOR OWNER
SYSTEM
Users (ENGPC¥Users)
Add... Remove
Permissions for CTM_ENGINEER_ADM Allow Deny

Full control
Modify
Read & execute
List folder contents
Read
Leam about access control and permissions
OK Cancel Apply
E110114E.ai
Figure Permission Entry for HisHist
4. Choose a user of Administrators of general-purpose PC, and check [Allow] box for [Full
control].
Then all the Allow boxes will be checked.
If you cannot find any administrator user of the general-purpose PC exists, you need to click
[Add] button on Permission Entry for HisHist dialog box and add an administrative user. And
then setup the access permissions for the added administrative user.
5. Click [OK] button so as to return to Security tab.
6. Click [Advanced] button so as to display the Advanced Security Settings for HisHist dialog
box.

7. Click [Edit] button so as to display the dialog box shown below:
Advanced Security Settings for HisHist
Permissions
To view or edit details for a permission entry, select the entry and the click Edit.
Object name: C:\CENTUMVP\HisHist

Permission entries:
Type Name Permission Inherited From Apply To
Allow Administrator Full control <not inherited> This folder, subfolders a...
Allow Administrator Full control Parent Object This folder, subfolders a...
Allow Administrator Full control Parent Object This folder, subfolders a...
Allow CREATOR OWNER Full control Parent Object This folder, subfolders a...
Allow SYSTEM Full control Parent Object This folder, subfolders a...
Add... Edit... Remove
Include inheritable permissions from this object’s parent

Replace all existing inheritable permissions on all descendants with inheritable permissions from this object
Manaqinq permission entries
OK Cancel Apply
E110115E.ai
Figure Permissions of Advanced Security Settings for HisHist
8. Uncheck the option of [Include inheritable permissions from this object’s parent] after
choosing a user that has some object to inherit.
And then a [Windows Security] dialog box will be displayed.
Windows Security
Selecting this option means that the parent pemission entries that apply to
child objects will no longer be applied to this object.
-To copy the permission entries that were previously applied from the
parent to this object, click Copy.
-To remove the permission entries that were previously applied from the
parent and keep only those permissions explicitly defined here. click Remove.
-To cancel this action, click Cancel.
Copy Remove Cancel
E110116E.ai
Figure Windows Security Dialog Box
9. Click [Remove] button.

Then, on the Permissions of Advanced Security Settings for HisHist dialog box, all the users
will disappear except the previously created users.

10. Click [Add] button on the Permissions of Advanced Security Settings for HisHist dialog box
so as to display the Select User or Group dialog box.
Select User or Group
Select this object type:

User, Group, or built-in security principal Object Types...
From this location:

ENGPC Locations...
Enter the object name to select (examples):

Check Names
Advanced... OK Cancel
E110117E.ai
Figure Select User or Group
11. Click [Advanced] button and then click [Find Now] button on the displayed dialog box.
The results of Find will be displayed at the lower part of the dialog box.
Select the object type:

User, Group, or Built -in security principal Object type...
From this location:

ENGPC Location...
Common Queries
Columns...
Name Starts with
Find Now
Description Starts with
Stop
Disabled accounts
Non expinng password
Days since last logon:
OK Cancel
Search results:
Name (RDN) In Folder
CENTUM ENGPC
CREATOR G...
CREATOR O...
DIAL UP
CTM_ENGINEER...
Guest ENGPC
Guests ENGPC
HELP Assistant ENGPC
HELP Services... ENGPC
INTERACTIVE
E110118E.ai
Figure Select User or Group (Find)
12. If the Standard-Model or Strengthening-Model IT Security setting is applied, select CTM_

MAINTENANCE from the search result and then click [OK] button.
CTM_MAINTENANCE will be added to the list in the Select User or Group dialog box.
If the Legacy-Model IT Security setting is applied, select Everyone from the search result
and then click [OK] button.
Everyone will be added to the list in the Select User or Group dialog box.

13. Click [OK] button, so as to display Permissions Entry for HisHist dialog box.
14. Check [Allow] for [Full control], all the permissions will be allowed.
Permission Entry for HisHist
Object
Name: CTM_MAINTENANCE Change...
Apply to: This folder, subfolders and files
Permissions: Allow Deny

Full control
Traverse folder / execute file
List folder / read data
Read attributes
Read extended attributes
Create files / write data
Create folders / append data
Write attributes
Write extended attributes
Delete subfolders and files
Delete
Apply these permissions to objects and/or Clear All

containers within this container only
Managing permissions
OK Cancel
E110119E.ai
Figure Permissions Entry for HisHist
15. If the Standard-Model or Strengthening-Model IT Security setting is applied, return to step

12. to select Everyone from the search result and then click [OK] button. And then repeat the
operations regarding Everyone described in steps 13. and 14.
If the Legacy-Model IT Security setting is applied, the operations described in steps 15. and
16. are not required.
16. Click [OK] buttons on all the displayed dialog box and then close the Properties sheet.

l Security Setup (Windows XP)
2. Use Windows Explorer to find the folder of HisHist which is designated as the storage
destination. Right click the folder and choose Properties from the context menu. And then
open Security tab.
HisHist Properties
General Sharing Security Customize

CTM_ENGINEER_ADM (HIS0164\CTM_ENGINEER_ADM)
CTM_OPERATOR (HIS0164\CTM_OPERATOR)
CREATOR OWNER
SYSTEM
Users (ENGPC\Users)
Add... Remove

Full Control
Modify
Read & Execute
List Folder Contents
Read
Write
For special permissions or for advanced settings, Advanced
click Advanced.
OK Cancel Apply
E110106E.ai
Figure HisHist Properties – Security Tab
3. Choose a user of Administrators of general-purpose PC, and check [Allow] box for [Full
Control].
Then all the Allow boxes will be checked.
4. Click [Advanced] button so as to display the Advanced Security Settings for HisHist dialog
box.
Advanced Security Settings for HisHist
Permissions Auditing Owner Effective Permissions
To view more information about Special permissions, select a permission entry, and then click Edit.
Permission entries:
Type Name Permission Inherited From Apply To
Allow CTM_ENGINEER_ADM(HIS...) Full Control <not inherited> This folder, subfolders...
Allow CTM_ENGINEER_ADM(HIS...) Full Control Parent Object This folder only
Allow CTM_ENGINEER_ADM(HIS...) Full Control Parent Object This folder, subfolders...
Allow CREATOR OWNER Full Control Parent Object Subfolders and files only
Allow SYSTEM Full Control Parent Object This folder, subfolders...
Allow Users (ENGPC\Users) Special Parent Object This folder and subfolders...
Allow Users (ENGPC\Users) Read & Execute Parent Object This folder, subfolders...
Add... Edit... Remove
Inherit from parent the permission entries that apply to child objects. Include these with entries explicity defined here.
Replace permission entries on all child objects with entries shown here that apply to child objects
OK Cancel Apply
E110107E.ai
Figure Advanced Security Settings

5. Uncheck the option of [Inherit from parent the permission entries that apply to child objects.
Include these with entries explicitly defined here.] after choosing a user that has the parent
object to inherit.
And then a [Windows Security] dialog box will be displayed.
Security
Selecting this option means that the parent permission entries that apply to
child objects will no longer be applied to this object.
-To copy the permission entries that were previously applied from the
parent to this object, click Copy.
-To remove the permission entries that were previously applied from the
parent and keep only those permissions explicitly defined here, click Remove.
-To cancel this action, click Cancel.
Copy Remove Cancel
E110108E.ai
Figure Security Dialog Box
6. Click [Remove] button.

Then, on the Permissions of Advanced Security Settings for HisHist dialog box, all the users
will disappear except the previously created users.
7. Click [Add] button on the Permissions of Advanced Security Settings for HisHist dialog box
so as to display the Select User or Group dialog box.

User, Group, or Built-in security principal Object Types...
From this location:

ENGPC Locations...
Enter the object name to select [examples]:

Check Names
Advanced... OK Cancel
E110109E.ai
Figure Select User or Group Dialog Box

8. Click [Advanced] button and then click [Find Now] button on the displayed dialog box.
The results of Find will be displayed at the lower part of the dialog box.

User, Group, or Built-in security principal Object Types...
From this location:

ENGPC Locations...
Common Queries
Columns...
Name: Starts with
Find Now
Description: Starts with
Stop
Disabled accounts
Non expiring password
Days since last logon:
OK Cancel
Name (RDN) In Folder

CENTUM ENGPC
CREATOR GROUP
CREATOR OWNER
DIALUP
CTM_ENGINEER ...
Guest ENGPC
Guests ENGPC
HelpAssistant ENGPC
HelpServicesGroup ENGPC
INTERACTIVE
E110110E.ai
Figure Select User or Group Dialog Box (Queries)
9. If the Standard-Model or Strengthening-Model IT Security setting is applied, select CTM_

MAINTENANCE from the search result and then click [OK] button.
CTM_MAINTENANCE will be added to the list in the Select User or Group dialog box.
If the Legacy-Model IT Security setting is applied, select Everyone from the search result
and then click [OK] button.
Everyone will be added to the list in the Select User or Group dialog box.
10. Click [OK] button, so as to display Permissions Entry for HisHist dialog box.

11. Check [Allow] for [Full Control], all the permissions will be allowed.
Permission Entry for HisHist
Object
Name: CTM_MAINTENANCE Change...
Apply onto: This folder, subfolders and files
Permissions: Allow Deny

Full Control
Traverse Folder / Execute File
List Folder / Read Data
Read Attributes
Read Extended Attributes
Create Files / Write Data
Create Folders / Append Data
Write Attributes
Write Extended Attributes
Delete Subfolders and Files
Delete
Read Permissions
Apply these permissions to objects and/or Clear All

containers within this container only
OK Cancel
E110111E.ai
Figure Permission Entry for HisHist dialog box
12. If the Standard-Model or Strengthening-Model IT Security setting is applied, return to step

9. to select Everyone from the search result and then click [OK] button. And then repeat the
operations regarding Everyone described in steps 10. and 11.
If the Legacy-Model IT Security setting is applied, the operations described in steps 12. and
13. are not required.
13. Click [OK] buttons on all the displayed dialog box and then close the Properties sheet.
l Sharing (Windows XP/Vista)

In the Windows XP/Vista environment, for sharing the folder on the network, the access
permissions need to be configured for the shared folder. By default, other users only have the
permission to read the folder.
The setting procedure is as follows:

2. On the Windows Explorer, right click the created folder (such as CENTUM), and then open
Sharing tab.
CENTUM Properties
General Sharing Security Customize
You can share this folder with other users on your

network. To enable sharing for this folder, click Share this
folder
Do not share this folder
Share this folder
Share name: CENTUM
Comment:
User limit: Maximum allowed

Allow this number of users:
To set permissions for users who access this

Permissions
folder over the network, click Permissions.
To configure settings for offline access, click

Caching
Caching.
Windows Firewall is configured to allow this folder to be shared

with other computers on the network.
View your Windows Firewall settings
OK Cancel Apply
E110112E.ai
Figure Sharing Tab (Windows XP)
CENTUM Properties
General Sharing Security Prervious Versions Customize
Network File and folder Sharing

CENTUM
Not Shared
Network Path:
Not Shared
Share...
Advanced Sharing
Set custom permissions, create multiple shares, and set other
advanced sharing options.
Advanced Sharing...
Password Protection
People must have a user account and password for this
computer to access shared folders.
To chage this setting. use the Network and Sharing Center.
OK Cancel Apply
E110120E.ai
Figure Sharing Tab (Windows Vista)

For Windows Vista, click [Advanced Sharing] button on Sharing tab so as to display the following
dialog box.
Advanced Sharing
Share this folder

Settings
Share name:
CENTUM
Add Remove
Limit the number of simultaneous users to: 10
Comments:
Permissions Caching
OK Cancel Apply
E110121E.ai
Figure Advanced Sharing (Windows Vista)
3. Choose the option [Share this folder] and then click [permissions] button.
Permissions for CENTUM dialog box will be displayed.
Permissions for CENTUM
Share Permissions

Everyone
Add... Remove
Full Control
Change
Read
OK Cancel Apply
E110113E.ai
Figure Permissions for CENTUM
4. To set the access permissions for Everyone, check the [Allow] box for [Full Control] so as to
allow all the permissions.
5. Click [OK] continuously to close all the displayed dialog boxes as well as the property sheet.

n To Integrate Historical Messages of CENTUM VP in CENTUM CS 3000

system
CTM_PROCESS user needs to be created for CENTUM CS 3000 system to collect the
historical messages from CENTUM VP project for integration in the general-purpose PC, which
Consolidated Historical Message Viewer is installed.
On the general-purpose PC for saving the historical messages, logon the PC using an
administrative account and then create the following user account.
User Name: CTM_PROCESS
Password: Password for CTM_PROCESS will be automatically defined.
SEE
ALSO • For more information about creating “CTM_PROCESS”, see the following:
CENTUM VP Installation (IM 33M01A20-40E)
• For more information about integrating the CENTUM CS 3000 historical messages, see the following:
E15.1.1, “Setting Up the Storage Destination Folder for Historical Message Save Files” in CS 1000/CS
3000 Reference Human Interface Station (IM 33S01B30-01E)

n Selecting the Storage Destination Folder for Historical Message Save

Files
When Historical Viewer is started for the first time after Consolidated Historical Message Viewer
(Meeting FDA) is installed, be sure to select the storage destination folder for historical message
save files in the folder reference dialog box.
The following describes the procedure for selecting the storage destination folder:
1. To display the folder reference dialog box, perform one of the following operations in
Historical Viewer.
• Click the [Open] button on the toolbar.
• Select [File] and then [Open] from the menu bar.
Browse for Folder
C:\CENTUM\HisHist
My Documents
My Computer
3 1 2 Floppy (A:)
Local Disk (C:)
CENTUM
HisHist
HIS0164
HistMerge
CENTUM VP
Documents and Settings
OK Cancel
E110104E.ai
Figure Folder Reference Dialog Box
2. Specify the path up to the folder that is used as the storage of historical message save files.
The historical message save file of each HIS is stored in the folder having the same name
as that HIS station. All the folders having their corresponding HIS station names are stored
in one folder managed by Historical Viewer. Therefore, a path to be set will be the path one
level higher than that for the folders storing the historical message save file of each HIS. For
example, if a historical message save file of HIS0164 is stored under “C:\CENTUM\HisHist\
HIS0164,” the path for the folder to be set will be “C:\CENTUM\HisHist.”
3. Click the [OK] button.
The contents of settings are saved, and the folder reference dialog box is closed. The
contents of settings will become effective the next time Historical Viewer is started.

E11.1.2 Creating a Server Storage Definition File

The server storage definition file is used to set the storage destination of historical
message save files for Historical Server Storage installed on each HIS.
Create a server storage definition file by starting Historical Viewer on a general-purpose
PC on which the storage folder for historical message save files has been created. Save
the file created on a floppy disk.
n Creating a Server Storage Definition File

Create a server storage definition file in the general-purpose PC where the Historical Viewer is
installed. And save the server storage definition file to a floppy disk. However, the floppy disk
should be blank and formatted beforehand.
The following describes the procedure for creating a server storage definition file:
1. Logon the general-purpose PC where the Historical Viewer is installed, and select
[Program]-[YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Consolidated Historical Viewer] from Windows [Start]
menu. The window of Historical Viewer appears.
2. Select [Tool] and then [Server Options] from the menu bar of Historical Viewer. The server
storage setting dialog box appears.
Server Options
Share Name CENTUM
Folder Name HisHist
OK Cancel
E110105E.ai
Figure Server Storage Setting Dialog Box
3. Set the sharing name and folder name in the server storage setting dialog box. The sharing
name and folder name must match with the settings made when the storage folder for
historical message save files was created. The above mentioned dialog box was illustrated
in the examples of creating the C:\CENTUM\HisHist folder for holding the historical
message files.
4. Insert a formatted, blank floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
5. Click the [OK] button. The file storage dialog box appears.
6. Specify the floppy disk drive as storage destination for the files, enter the file name, and
then click the [Save] button.
When the [Save] button is clicked, the setting contents of the server storage setting dialog
box are output to the server storage definition file (SetHistMgr.hdb).

E11.1.3 Setting Up the Server Storage Definition File

Set up a folder to be used as the storage destination of historical message save files for
Historical Server Storage on an HIS. The server storage definition file that was stored
on the floppy disk and the “BKHSetHistMgr” command available from Historical Server
Storage of each HIS are used for this process. Note that this process must be performed
on the HIS from which you want to collect historical message save files. To collect
historical message save files from multiple HISs, perform this operation on each of the
target HISs.
n Downloading the Station Common Section

It is necessary to download the station common section to an HIS to be set before setting up the
server storage definition file for Historical Server Storage.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the downloading of the station common section to the HIS, see the following:
F2.1.5, “Load Menu of System View”
n Executing the BKHSetHistMgr Command

Set the contents of the server storage definition file for Historical Server Storage that runs on an
HIS. Carry out this process by using the “BKHSetHistMgr” command available from Historical
Server Storage.
TIP
The BKHSetHistMgr command should be used when HIS is running.
Execute the following procedure on all of the HISs from which historical message save files will
be collected:
1. Insert the floppy disk containing the server storage definition file into the floppy disk drive of
an HIS.
2. Start the command prompt.
3. Execute the BKHSetHistMgr command at the command prompt.
C:\> (CENTUM VP install folder) \his\tool\BKHSetHistMger.exe

Δ-aΔA:\SetHistMgr.hdb
4. Restart the PC on which the HIS is installed.
This now makes it possible to save the historical message save files of an HIS on the disk of a
general-purpose PC used for Consolidated Historical Message.

n BKHSetHistMgr Command Details

Set this command so that the historical message save files collected by an HIS can be stored on
a general-purpose PC. Or, this command can be used to clear such a setting. After executing this
command, the new settings or current settings become effective or are cleared, respectively, by
restarting the PC on which the HIS is installed.
This command must be executed on an HIS on which you want to store historical message save
files.
l Syntax
BHKSetHistMgr.exeΔ[ -a | -d ]Δ[ filename ]
l Parameters
-a:
Sets a server storage definition in an HIS. If -a is specified, filename must also be specified.
-d:
Clears the server storage definition set in an HIS.
filename:
Specify the path for the server storage definition file (file extension: .hdb) created in the server
storage setting dialog box. This can be specified only if “-a” is specified.
l Examples
To set a server storage definition
BKHSetHistMgr.exeΔ-aΔA:\SetHistMgr.hdb
To clear a server storage definition
BKHSetHistMgr.exeΔ-d
l Security Level
A security level is set for this command. It operates at security level 3. Also, as a security
measure for command execution, the settings of [window operation] for Security Builder are
used.

E11.1.4 Troubleshooting
If historical message save files were not copied due to some system problem,
it is necessary for the user to restore the system and then load these files. The
“BKHSrvHistMgr” command available from HIS Historical Server Storage is used to load
them to the disk of a general-purpose PC.
n If historical message save files are not copied automatically

If historical message save files are not copied automatically to the disk of a general-purpose PC
due to some system problem, a system alarm message is issued to an HIS. In this case, check
the status of the HIS and general-purpose PC and restore the system so that historical message
save files can be copied automatically to the disk of the general-purpose PC. In addition, copy
the historical message save files that could not be copied automatically using the applicable
command.
l Restoring the System

Check the status of the HIS and general-purpose PC. The following may be considered as the
causes for why the historical message save files could not be copied automatically to the disk of
the general-purpose PC.
• Problem in the general-purpose PC
Stopping operation for maintenance, insufficient disk capacity, shared access violation of
the storage folder on the general-purpose PC, etc.
• Problem in the network
Disconnection of communication route, error in the network settings, etc.
Find and remove the cause, and restore the system.
l Loading the Historical Message Save Files that Have not Been Copied
The historical message save files that have not been copied remain on the HIS for several days.
Even if the system has been restored, however, the historical message save files remaining
on the HIS will not be loaded automatically to the disk of the general-purpose PC. It is thus
necessary to load them to the disk of the PC while they are still on the HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about storing to the historical message save file in the HIS, see the following:
“n Saving the Message to a File” in E9.2, “Message Output Actions”

The “BKHSrvHistMgr” command available from Historical Server Storage is used to load
historical message save files.
Execute the following procedure on the HIS:
1. Start the command prompt.
2. Execute the “BKHSrvHistMgr” command at the command prompt.
Enter the following and press the <Return> key.
C:\> (CENTUM VP install folder) \his\tool\BKHSrvHistMgr.exeΔ-s
This loads the historical message save files that have not be stored on the disk of a general-
purpose PC and the historical message save files that are currently being collected are loaded to
the disk of the general-purpose PC.
n Backing Up Stored Historical Message Save Files

Be sure to back up the historical message save files stored by this package on a general-purpose
PC occasionally, using Windows backup function or any general-purpose backup application
program.
n BKHSrvHistMgr Command Details

This command loads the historical message save files that have not been stored on a general-
purpose PC and the historical message save files that are currently being collected to the disk of
a general-purpose PC. When this command is executed, its record is stored as an operation log
message.
Execute this command on the HIS whose historical message save files you want to store at the
storage destination.
l Syntax
BKHSrvHistMgr.exeΔ[ -s ]
l Parameter
-s: Copies historical message save files to the disk of a general-purpose PC in a batch.
l Example
To copy historical message save files to the disk of a general-purpose PC in a batch
BKHSrvHistMgr.exeΔ-s
l Security Level
A security level is set for this command. It operates at security level 3. Also, as a security
measure for command execution, the settings of [window operation] for Security Builder are
used.

E11.1.5 Settings for Saving Files in PDF Format and for

E-Signatures
Historical message save files can be saved as an electronically recorded document (PDF
file) by using Adobe Acrobat products in Consolidated Historical Message. The files
saved can be signed electronically. This now makes it possible to make electronically
recorded historical messages compatible with the FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 standard.
Before this function can be used, it is necessary to install Adobe Acrobat products on a
general-purpose PC on which Historical Viewer is installed, and to create a profile for e-
signatures in advance.
If it is not necessary to save historical messages in PDF format, this process is not
required, however.
TIP
The FDA: 21 CFR Part 11 standard allows to replace paper records and handwritten signatures conventionally
required for products by the FDA with records saved as electronic data and e-signatures attached to them. Note,
however, that an indelible function for preventing any alteration is requested for the arrangement of electronic
records and e-signatures.

n Installing Adobe Acrobat Products

Adobe Acrobat consists of the following products. Use Version 5.0 or later.
• Acrobat
Acrobat can be used to convert various documents such as Microsoft Office documents into
PDF format. It also allows to use the e-signature function.
To use the function that stores historical messages in a PDF file in Historical Viewer, Adobe
Acrobat 5.0 or later is required on a general-purpose PC on which Historical Viewer is
installed.
• Acrobat Approval
This product provides the e-signature function. However, it cannot create PDF format
documents.
Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later, or Acrobat Approval 5.0 or later is required on the PC that will be
used to make approvals for PDF files saved using Historical Viewer.
• Acrobat Reader
This product is used to display PDF format documents. It is also used to call up
electronically signed documents.
Acrobat Reader 5.0 or later is required for the PC that will be used to reference PDF files.
TIP
Acrobat Distiller that comes with Adobe Acrobat is used to create PDF files. Use Acrobat Distiller to save files as
PDF files in Historical Viewer. Acrobat Distiller can be installed during the standard installation of Adobe Acrobat
5.0.
SEE
ALSO • For more information about Adobe Acrobat products, refer to the web site of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• For more information about how to install each of Adobe Acrobat products, refer to the document of each
product.
n Creating an Acrobat Self-Sign Profile

It is necessary to check the authenticity of e-signatures in PDF files. Acrobat Self-Sign
Signature Handler, which is available as one of the Adobe Acrobat products, is used as a default
authenticity verification feature. To use this handler, it is necessary to create an Acrobat Self-Sign
profile in advance.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to create an Acrobat Self-Sign profile, refer to the Help function of Adobe Acrobat
products.

<E11.2 Historical Viewer> E11-29
E11.2 Historical Viewer

The Historical Viewer function can be used to view historical messages stored, as well as
to start the operation performance display of HISs and batches. This function runs on a
general-purpose PC on which Consolidated Historical Message Viewer (Meeting FDA) is
installed.
n Starting Historical Viewer

Consolidated Historical Message does not include any proprietary user management function.
The log-on user of Windows becomes the user of Consolidated Historical Message.
Select [Program], [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] and then [Consolidated Historical Viewer] from
Windows [Start] menu. The following Historical Viewer window appears.
Consolidated Historical Viewer – LongHi1
File Edit View Window Tool Help
STOP
LongHi1
Ready
List view display area

E110201E.ai
Figure Historical Viewer Window
• When Historical Viewer is started, the above window appears without displaying any search
result.
• By setting search criteria in the search dialog box and clicking the [Search Now] button,
the search result is displayed in the list view of Historical Viewer. Multiple list views can be
displayed in Historical Viewer, so that multiple search criteria can be set and the search
result can be displayed respectively in the multiple list views.
• The search target is the historical message save file included in the folder set in the folder
reference dialog box that appears when [Open...] is selected from the [File] menu.

E11.2.1 Component Elements of Historical Viewer

The component elements of Historical Viewer include a menu bar, toolbar and list view.
This section describes each of these elements.
n Toolbar of Historical Viewer

The following shows the buttons on the toolbar.
Folder reference dialog box
Print
Refresh
Search dialog box
Stop search
Memo dialog box
Save to file
HIS usage history dialog box
Batch usage history dialog box
STOP
E110202E.ai
Figure Buttons on the Toolbar
l Folder Reference Dialog Box

The folder reference dialog box is displayed. The historical message save file included in the
folder selected in this dialog box is used for reference by Historical Viewer.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the folder reference dialog box, see the following:
“n Selecting the Storage Destination Folder for Historical Message Save Files” in E11.1.1, “Setting Up the
Storage Destination Folder for Historical Message Save Files”
l Print
The list view currently being displayed is printed. It can also output to a PDF file as an
electronically recorded document by using Adobe Acrobat products.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the print dialog box, see the followings:
E11.3.2, “Printing Historical Messages”
E11.3.3, “Saving Historical Messages in a PDF File”
l Refresh
The active list view display is refreshed.

l Search
The search dialog box is displayed. When the [OK] button is clicked in the search dialog box, a
list view is displayed again using new search criteria.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the search dialog box, see the following:
E11.2.2, “Search Dialog Box”
l Stop Search
Search is stopped. The menu becomes active only during the search operation.
l Memo
The memo dialog box is displayed. The contents of the memo tab in the search dialog box are
displayed in this memo dialog box. Because it is displayed in text format, texts can be loaded with
flexibility. The contents that are set are printed together with the list view. The following shows
a display example of the contents of a memo that was carried over from the batch operation
performance dialog box.
Memo
AB-011201-01 ,U0002 ,0168.0 ,2008/03/23 10:45 ,2008/03/30 10:45

AB-011201-01 ,UTPB0001 ,0048.0 ,2008/03/23 10:46 ,2008/03/25 10:46
OK Cancel
E110203E.ai
Figure Memo Dialog Box
l Save to File
The contents of the list view (historical message search result) are output to a CSV format file.
l HIS Usage History Dialog Box

The usage history of HISs are displayed by analyzing historical message save files.

l Batch Usage History Dialog Box
The usage history of batches are displayed by analyzing historical message save files.
n Menu Bar of Historical Viewer

The menu bar of Historical Viewer contains “File,” “Edit,” “View,” “Window,” “Tool” and “Help.” The
following describes some of the important menu items that are not included on the toolbar.
l New
When [New] is selected on the [File] menu, a new list view is created.
l Page Setup
When [Page Setup] is selected on the [File] menu, the page setup dialog box appears. Set the
print layout in the page setup dialog box. The settings specified in this dialog box is valid for all list
views. These settings are carried over to Historical Viewer to be started from the next time on.
Page Setup
Print
Number of Signatures 0
Font
OK Cancel
E110204E.ai
Figure Page Setup Dialog Box
l Server Options Setup

When [Server Options] is selected on the [Tool] menu, the server options setup dialog box
appears. The setup information of a general-purpose PC that is used as the storage destination
is output.
l Online Manual
When [Online Manual] is selected on the [Help] menu, a document map of electronic documents
appears using StoryVIEW. If there is no key code for electronic documents, the online manual
cannot be displayed.

n List View of Historical Viewer

In the list view, the historical messages that matched the search criteria are displayed in list
format.
The list view contains HISs, message numbers, time generated, time received, operators, batch
IDs and message strings.
• Each column width can be enlarged/reduced in the list view.

• Whether or not each column is displayed can be set in the search dialog box.
• The sort function can be used in the list view. When a label of each column such as
“Message No.” or “Operator” is clicked, that column is used as a key and the entire list is
rearranged with string comparison. The sort key can be specified in the message No., time
generated, time received, operator or batch ID column.
SEE
ALSO For the priority order of HISs in the search dialog box, see the following:
TIP
Sorting is performed for about 500 messages that are currently being displayed, not for all search results. Also,
the sorted result cannot be printed as is.

The following are descriptions of items to be displayed in each column of the list view.
l HIS
The station name of the HIS for which a historical message save files are to be searched is
displayed. This item is always displayed.
l Message Number
Sequence numbers to be assigned to historical messages are displayed. This item is always
displayed.
l Time Generated
The time when each historical message was generated is displayed. For a message that has
no information about time of generation, time of reception is displayed. This item is always
displayed.
TIP
This time is different from the time displayed in the historical message report window.
l Time Received
The time when each historical message was received on an HIS for which a historical message
save file is to be searched is displayed. This item is displayed when it is selected in the search
dialog box.
TIP
This time is the same as the time displayed in the historical message report window.
l Operator
The name of the user who operated an HIS is displayed. This item is displayed when it is
selected in the search dialog box.
l Batch ID
The batch ID is displayed for a message with a batch ID. This item is displayed when it is
selected in the search dialog box.
l Message Text
Message texts to be printed are displayed. This item is always displayed.

E11.2.2 Search Dialog Box

The search dialog box is used to set various criteria to search historical messages.
Historical messages that match with the various criteria set in the search dialog box are
displayed in the list view of Historical Viewer.
n How to Display the Search Dialog Box

To display the search dialog box, perform one of the following operations:
• Click the [Search Condition] button on the toolbar.
• Select [Edit] and then [Find] from the menu bar.
Tabs for setting various search categories.
Search
Occurrence Source User Arbitrary Character Memo

General Message Type
Direction
Set HIS Priority Backward

Specified Date
Forward
HIS0164 between 2008/03/23 17:01
and 2008/07/01 17:01 Display
Print Messages
Time Received
Operator Name
Batch ID
Search Now Cancel
E110205E.ai
Figure Search Dialog Box
TIP
To display the search dialog box for the first time after Consolidated Historical Message Viewer (Meeting FDA) is
installed, set the storage destination folder of historical message save files in the folder reference dialog box in
advance.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to set the storage destination folder for historical message save files in the folder
reference dialog box, see the following:
“n Selecting the Storage Destination Folder for Historical Message Save Files” in E11.1.1, “Setting Up the
Storage Destination Folder for Historical Message Save Files”

n Component Elements of the Search Dialog Box
l Search Criteria
The following six types of search items are provided.
• General
• Message type
• Occurrence Source
• User
• Arbitary Character
• Memo
A separate tab is provided for each of the above search items for setting detailed search criteria
in these tabs.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the search criteria, see the following described later:
“n Setting Up the Search Criteria”
l View Direction
Select the view direction of historical messages in the list view of Historical Viewer.
Select either the [Backward] or [Forward] radio button. When the [Backward] radio button is
selected, the searched historical messages are displayed beginning with the one with the most
recent time of message generation in a time series. When the [Forward] radio button is selected,
the searched historical messages are displayed beginning with the one with the oldest time of
message generation in a time series.
l View Items
Select the items that you want to view in the list view of Historical Viewer.
The following view items can be selected (multiple selections are allowed):
• Print messages
• Time received
• Operator name
• Batch ID
SEE
ALSO For more information about the view items, see the following described later:
“n Setting Up the View Items”
l [Start Search] Button

When the [Start Search] button is clicked, search is executed and the search dialog box is
closed. The search result is displayed in the list view of Historical Viewer.

n Setting Up the Search Criteria

Various search criteria can be set up in the search dialog box.
Select a tab for each search item.
l Search by Specifying the Time Period

The following shows a display example of the search dialog box to be used for search by
specifying the generated date and time of historical messages.
Search

Direction

Specified Date
Forward
HIS0164 between 2008/03/23 17:01
and 2008/07/01 17:01 Display
Print Messages
Time Received
Operator Name
Batch ID
Search Now Cancel
E110206E.ai
Figure General Tab of the Search Dialog Box
• Priority Order of HISs

Specify the station names of the HISs to be searched in sequence. Five HISs from 1 to 5
can be specified for search, and are searched in the order from 1 to 5. Aliases cannot be
used. Click the drop-down arrow button on the right edge of the combo box. The station
names of the HISs available appear in a list as selections.
Search is executed from the HIS having the station name with the first priority order.
If a message that does not exist in the HIS to be searched first exists in the second or
subsequent HIS to be searched, that message is added and then displayed. Note that, if
multiple HISs are specified to be searched, a longer time is required to display the result.
Search period
HIS0164 Operating Operating
HIS0163 Operating
HIS0162 Operating
Search target
HIS0164 HIS0164 HIS0163 HIS0164 HIS0164
HIS0163 HIS0162 HIS0163 HIS0162
HIS0162
E110207E.ai
Figure Transition of Search Targets

• Specify dates
By clicking the [Specified Date] radio button, you can enter the starting date and time and
end date and time of the time period for search. Specify the starting date and time, and the
end date and time.
l Search by Specifying Message Types

specifying the message type of historical messages.
Search

Direction
Backward
All
Forward
Specify Message Type
Process Alarm Maintenance Display

Status Change Operation Message
Print Messages
Operation Guide Message System Alarm
Time Received
Sequence Message Fieldbus
Operator Name
Specify Number ['*'OK] Batch ID
Message No
Search Now Cancel
E110208E.ai
Figure Message Type Tab of the Search Dialog Box
• All
All historical messages are searched.
• Specify message types
Select the types of historical messages to be searched. More than one message type can
be selected. The following table shows the correspondence between message types and
message numbers.
Table Correspondence Between Message Types and Message Numbers
Message type Message number

Process alarm 11**, 12**
Status change 14**
Operation guide message 17**
Sequence message 13**
Maintenance 05**
Operation message 16**
System alarm 00** to 04**, 06** to 09**
Fieldbus 3***
E110209E.ai
• Specify number
You can directly enter the number of the historical message you want to search. Enter a
message number in four digits, including numbers and “*” (wildcard) (*1).
*1: “*” denotes the repetition of an arbitrary character more than 0 times, and “?” denotes one arbitrary character.

l Search by Specifying Message Occurrence Sources
specifying the generation source of historical messages.
Search

Direction
Backward
All
Specify Occurrence Source Forward
Station Name
Display
FCS0101
Hierarchy Name Print Messages
Time Received
Tag Name Operator Name
Batch ID
Batch ID
Search Now Cancel
E110210E.ai
Figure Source Tab of the Search Dialog Box
• All
All historical messages are searched, regardless of their generation sources.
• Specify occurrence sources
Specify the sources from which historical messages were generated. Multiple generation
sources can be selected.
• Tag names
Up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be specified as a tag name.
“*” and “?” (wildcards) (*1) can be entered.
• Batch IDs
Up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be specified as batch IDs.
“*” and “?” (wildcards) (*1) can be entered.
*1: “*” denotes the repetition of an arbitrary character more than 0 times, and “?” denotes one arbitrary character.

l Search by Specifying User Names
The following shows a display example of the search dialog box to be used for searching
historical messages by specifying user names.
Search

Direction
Backward
All
Specify User Forward
Display
Print Messages
Time Received
Operator Name
Batch ID
Search Now Cancel
E110211E.ai
Figure User Tab of the Search Dialog Box
• All
All historical messages are searched, regardless of their user names.
• Specify Users
Up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered as a user name.

l Search by Arbitrary Characters
The following shows a display example of the search dialog box to be used for searching
historical message by arbitrary characters.
Search

Direction
Backward
No Check
Check [* is available] Forward
Display
Print Messages
Time Received
Operator Name
Batch ID
Search Now Cancel
E110212E.ai
Figure Character Tab of the Search Dialog Box
• No check
All historical messages are searched.
• Check
Up to 16 double-byte or 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters of a string can be entered.
However, “*” and “?” (wildcards) cannot be entered.

l Search by Memo
The following shows a display example of the search dialog box to be used for search by entering
a memo relevant to historical messages.
Search

Direction
Backward
Forward
Display
Print Messages
Time Received
Operator Name
Batch ID
Search Now Cancel
E110213E.ai
Figure Memo Tab of the Search Dialog Box
• Memo
Enter comments.

n Setting Up the View Items

The following describes the settings of the view items in the search dialog box of Historical
Viewer.
l Print Messages
Because all messages are saved in a historical message save file, messages that are not
suitable for report output may also be displayed by Historical Viewer. To view only messages
that are to be output to a report, check only the [Print Messages] check box. The check box is
checked by default.
For example, a history statement in SEBOL-language saves messages in a historical message
save file, but it does not print the messages. Checking this check box may suppress these
messages.
SEE
ALSO For more information about message output actions, see the following:
E9.2, “Message Output Actions”
l Time Received
To view the time when message were received, check the [Time Received] check box. The
received time displayed is the time when an HIS received the message. This is the same as the
time displayed in the historical message report window on the HIS side.
l Operator Name
To view the operators of messages, check the [Operator Name] check box.
l Batch ID
To view the batch IDs of messages related to process control, check the [Batch ID] check box.

n Cautions for Executing Search

Be aware of the following points when executing search.
l Search Starting Conditions

Search cannot be started unless the following conditions are met:
• One or more HISs are set to be searched.
• Search time period is set.
The search time period can be set in the General tab of Search Criteria.
If search cannot be started, an error message is displayed.
l Combining Historical Messages

If multiple HISs are specified when setting up the priority order of HISs, the historical messages
of multiple HISs are combined and then displayed. The following describes the rules applied
when they are combined.
• If the time generated and message string are the same for multiple messages, they are
treated as the same message, and only one of the messages is displayed.
• If the time of an HIS was changed, messages are displayed in the order of message
generation as much as possible.
• For messages that do not have the information on the time generated, they are always
added to the list view.
IMPORTANT
• In order to correctly combine the historical messages of multiple HISs, it is necessary that
HIS settings such as [Tag Name Length] must match among all the HISs to be searched in
advance.
• If the time of an HIS is changed during the search period, historical messages among
multiple HISs may not be combined correctly.
TIP
To display the search result in a new list view, it is necessary to create a new list view by choosing [Create New]
- [List View] from te [File] menu, and then search in the new list view.

E11.2.3 HIS Usage History Dialog Box

The HIS usage history dialog box displays the usage history of HISs during the specified
time period. Items that are displayed include the HIS station name, operation status,
operating hour, and starting time and end time of operation. Note that the displayed usage
history information can be carried over to the search dialog box.
n How to Use the HIS Usage History Dialog Box

The HIS usage history dialog box displays the operation performances of HISs for the specified
time period in Gantt chart format for each HIS station name. The usage history of HISs that was
analyzed based on the collected historical messages are displayed.
The HIS usage history dialog box can be displayed by performing the following operation:
1. Perform one of the following operations from Historical Viewer.
• Click the [HIS Usage History] button on the toolbar.
• Select the [Tool] and then [HIS Usage History] from the menu bar.
The HIS usage history search dialog box appears.
HIS Usage History
Specified Date
between 2008/03/23
and 2008/07/01
Search Stop Cancel
E110214E.ai
Figure HIS Usage History Search Dialog Box
2. Set the time period to search for usage history using [Specified Date] of the HIS operation
performance search dialog box.

3. Click the [Search] button to start searching for HIS usage history.
If you click the [Cancel] button, the dialog box is closed without starting search. Also, if you
click the [Stop] button, the search operation currently being executed is stopped. Once the
search operation is complete, the HIS usage history dialog box appears.
Search period
HIS Usage History

2008/03/23 2008/07/01
001 HIS0163 Search TARGET ,0168.0,2008/06/01 10:45 ,2008/06/08 10:45
002 HIS0164 Search VIRTUAL ,0144.0,2008/06/04 10:45 ,2008/06/10 10:45
003 Search
004 Search
005 Search
006 Search
007 Search
008 Search
009 Search
010 Search
Number HIS station name Search dialog call button Operation performance Detailed item (displayed in combo box format)
E110215E.ai
Figure HIS Usage History Dialog Box

n Component Elements of the HIS Usage History Dialog Box
l Search Period
The time period to search for operation performances that was set in [Specified Date] in the HIS
usage history search dialog box is displayed.
l Number
The sequence number assigned to each HIS is displayed.
l HIS Station Name

The station names of HISs to be searched are displayed. Only the station names of those HISs
that can be selected by [Set HIS priority] in the search dialog box--i.e., HISs to be searched--are
displayed.
l Usage History
The usage history of each HIS is displayed in Gantt chart format. Each usage history is color-
coded depending on the status. The display colors of operation performances are as follows:
Table Display Colors of HIS Operation Performances
Selection status in Detailed Items Status Color

Being selected – Red
Operation and monitoring under the actual machine environment Green
Not being selected
Operation and monitoring under the virtual test environment Blue
E110216E.ai
The operation performance selected in the combo-box for Detailed Items is always displayed in
red. If “ALL” is selected in the combo-box for Detailed Items.

l Detailed Items
The detailed information of each usage history displayed in Gantt chart format is displayed. The
display format of the detailed information is as follows:
Name, operating hour, starting time, end time

• Name
This item shows the status of HIS operation performance. The following three types are
available:
ALL: All operation performances
TARGET: Operation and monitoring under the target system environment
VIRTUAL: Operation and monitoring under the virtual test environment
• Operating hour
This item shows the operating hours from the starting time to the end time in units of hours.
• Starting time
This item shows the starting time of HIS operation performance. It is displayed in the format
of “YY/MM/DD hh:mm.” If it is not started within the search time period, “***” is displayed.
• End time
This items shows the end time of HIS operation performance. It is displayed in the format of
“YY/MM/DD hh:mm.” If it is not completed within the search time period, “***” is displayed.
Detailed information is displayed in combo box format. When you click the drop-down arrow
button on the right edge of the combo box, a list of detailed information is displayed. The detailed
information of HIS operation performances is arranged in the order of the starting time in the list.
You can switch the detailed information to be displayed by selecting one from the list.
TIP
Up to 32 lists of status change are available within the search period to be stored in the combo box.
l Search Dialog Call Button

When this button is clicked, the search dialog box appears. The HIS station name, starting time,
end time and detailed items of the operation performance selected in the Detailed Items combo
box are automatically set in the search dialog box.
If the starting time is “***,” the starting time of the search period is applied. If the end time is “***,”
the end time of the search period is applied.
Detailed items are set as a memo. If specification of Detailed Items is “ALL,” the detailed items of
all the operation performances for the corresponding HIS are displayed. In the case of “TARGET”
or “VIRTUAL,” only the applicable detailed items are displayed.
If you click the [Search] button in the search dialog box, search is started using the information
carried over as search criteria, and historical messages are displayed in the list view.
SEE

E11.2.4 Batch Usage History Dialog Box

The batch usage history dialog box displays the usage history of batches during
the specified time period. Items that are displayed include the batch ID, batch name,
operating hour, starting time and end time of operation. Note that the displayed usage
history information can be carried over to the search dialog box.
n How to Use the Batch Usage History Dialog Box

Batch usage history dialog box is used to display the usage history of batch for the specified time
period in a Gantt chart format by each batch ID. The usage history of batch that was analyzed
based on the collected historical messages is displayed.
The batch usage history dialog box can be displayed by performing the following operation:
1. Perform one of the following operations from Historical Viewer.
• Click the [Batch Usage History] button on the toolbar.
• Select the [Tool] and then [Batch Usage History] from the menu bar.
The Batch usage history search dialog box appears.
Batch Usage History
Choose HIS
HIS0164
Specified Date
between 2008/03/23
and 2008/04/22
Search Stop Cancel
E110217E.ai
Figure Batch Usage History Search Dialog Box
2. Select the station names of HISs to be searched using [Choose HIS] in the batch usage
history search dialog box.
3. Set the time period to search for usage history using [Specified Date] of the batch usage
history search dialog box.

4. Click the [Search] button to start searching for batch operation performances.
If you click the [Cancel] button, the dialog box is closed without starting search. Also, if you
click the [Stop] button, the search operation currently being executed is stopped. Once the
search operation is complete, the batch usage history dialog box appears.
Search period
Batch Usage History

2008/03/23 2008/04/22
001 AB-011201-01 Search U0002 ,0120.0,2008/03/23 10:45 ,2008/03/28 10:45
002 AB-011201-012 Search UTPB0003 ,0168.0,2008/03/25 10:45 ,2008/04/01 10:45
003 Search
004 Search
005 Search
006 Search
007 Search
008 Search
009 Search
010 Search
Number Batch ID Search dialog call button Operation performance Detailed item (displayed in combo box format)
E110218E.ai
Figure Batch Usage History Dialog Box

n Component Elements of the Batch Usage History Dialog Box
l Search Period
The time period to search for operation performances that was set in [Specified Date] in the batch
operation performance search dialog box is displayed.
l Number
The sequence number assigned to each batch is displayed.
l Batch ID
The batch ID is displayed.
l Usage History
The usage history of each batch is displayed in Gantt chart format. Each usage history is color-
coded depending on the status. The display colors of usage history are as follows:
Table Display Colors of Batch Operation Performances
Selection status in Detailed Items Status Color

Being selected – Red
Not being selected – Green
E110219E.ai
The usage history selected in the combo-box for Detailed Items is always displayed in red.
l Detailed Items
The detailed information of each usage history displayed in Gantt chart format is displayed. The
display format of the detailed information is as follows:
Name, operating hour, starting time, end time
• Name
This item shows the status of batch operation performance. The following two types are
available.
Recipe name: Used for batch operation performance
Unit name: Used for operation performance of the unit started to operating in batch
• Operating hour
This item shows the operating hours from the starting time to the end time in units of hours.
• Starting time
This item shows the starting time of batch operation performance. It is displayed in the
format of “YY/MM/DD hh:mm.” If it is not started within the search time period, “***” is
displayed.
• End time
This item shows the end time of batch operation performance. It is displayed in the format of
“YY/MM/DD hh:mm.” If it is not completed within the search time period, “***” is displayed.

TIP
Up to 32 lists of usage histories are available per batch within the search period to be stored in the combo box.
The detailed information is displayed in combo box format. When you click the drop-down arrow
button on the right edge of the combo box, a list of detailed information is displayed. The detailed
information of operation performances of each unit in a single batch is arranged in the order of
the starting time in the list. You can switch the detailed information to be displayed by selecting
one from the list.
l Search Dialog Call Button

When this button is clicked, the search dialog box is displayed. The batch ID, starting time, end
time and detailed items of the operation performance selected in the Detailed Items combo box
are automatically set in the search dialog box.
If the starting time is “***,” the starting time of the search period is applied. If the end time is “***,”
the end time of the search period is applied.
Detailed items are set as a memo. If the specification of Detailed Items is “Recipe name,” the
detailed items of all operation performances for the corresponding batch are displayed. In the
case of “unit name,” only the applicable detailed items are displayed.
If you click the [Search] button in the search dialog box, search is started using the information
carried over as search criteria, and historical messages are displayed in the list view.
SEE

<E11.3 Searching, Printing and Saving Historical Messages into a PDF Filer> E11-53
E11.3 Searching, Printing and Saving Historical

Messages into a PDF File
Once the settings for store historical messages are complete, you can search, print and
save historical messages stored in the storage destination into a PDF file from Historical
Viewer.
This section describes the procedures for the above operations.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to start Historical Viewer, see the following:
“n Starting Historical Viewer” in E11.2, “Historical Viewer”

n Operation Flow
The following flowchart shows the operation flow from searching for historical messages, printing,
saving in a PDF file, and finally to attaching e-signatures. This series of operations are performed
on a general-purpose PC on which Consolidated Historical Message Viewer (Meeting FDA) is
installed.
Start
Start Historical Viewer
Search for historical messages Historical Viewer is used.
Print historical messages
Save historical messages

in a PDF file
Adobe Acrobat products are used.

E-signatures of the creator
and approver
End
E110301E.ai
Figure Flow of Normal Operations using Historical Viewer
SEE
ALSO For more information about each of the steps above, see the following sections:
• About the startup of Historical Viewer, see
E11.2, “Historical Viewer”
• About the search for historical messages, see
E11.3.1, “Searching for Historical Messages”
• About the printing of historical messages, see
E11.3.2, “Printing Historical Messages”
• About the saving of historical messages in a PDF file, see
• About the e-signatures of the creators and approvers, see
E11.3.4, “E-Signatures of the Creator and Approver”

E11.3.1 Searching for Historical Messages

Nothing is displayed in the list view by just starting Historical Viewer. Historical messages
will be displayed in the list view by setting search targets and search criteria in the search
dialog box.
n How to Search for Historical Messages

1. Perform one of the following operations to display the search dialog box:
• Click the [Search Dialog] button on the toolbar.
• Select [Edit] and then [Find] from the menu bar.
Tabs for setting various search categories.
Search

Direction

Specified Date
Forward
HIS0164 between 2008/03/23 17:01
and 2008/07/01 17:01 Display
Print Messages
Time Received
Operator Name
Batch ID
Search Now Cancel
E110302E.ai
Figure Search Dialog Box
2. Set the following items:

• Priority order of HISs
• One of the tabs for search criteria
• View direction
• View items
SEE
ALSO For more information about the setting items listed above, see the following:
3. Once the settings are complete, click the [Search Now] button.
A search operation is started. When the search is complete, historical messages are
displayed in the list view of Historical Viewer.

E11.3.2 Printing Historical Messages

A historical message report can be printed to sheets of paper and saved as an
electronically recorded document (PDF file). To print historical messages to sheets of
paper, select the name of a printer that can output to sheets of paper when printing.
The following describes the operating procedure for printing historical messages to
sheets of paper.
TIP
To save historical messages in a PDF file, it is necessary to install Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later on a general-
purpose PC on which Historical Viewer is running.
n How to Print Historical Messages

1. Perform one of the following operations using Historical Viewer:
• Click the [Print] button on the toolbar.
• Select [File] and then [Print] from the menu bar.
The print dialog box appears.
2. Select the name of a printer that can output to sheets of paper.
If Acrobat Distiller is selected as a printer, a historical message report can be saved in a
PDF file.
TIP
Select a printer that can output to sheets of paper. If no printer that can output to sheets of paper is set up, close
the print dialog box by pressing the [Cancel] button, set up a printer, and then print it again.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the procedure for saving a historical message report in a PDF file, see the following:
3. Click the [OK] button in the print dialog box.

The contents of the active list view are printed.

n Print Format of Historical Messages

The following shows the print format of historical messages. The same print format is also used
to output images to a PDF file.
Consolidated Historical Viewer HISOperation and Monitoring Message 2008/07/01 09:57:39 AM Page 1
Log On User HISSRV\Nakata
Computer (HIS) HIS0164,
Display Print Messages,
Time Span 2008/04/01 17:57:00 - 2008/07/01 17:57:00
Message Type All
Occurrence Source All
User All
Remarks
Others Number of Matches: 1551
Memo
HIS0164 0236 2008/04/01 8:48:50 HIS Start
HIS0164 0231 2008/03/31 19:46:21 HIS Shutdown
•
•
•
E110303E.ai
Figure Print Format of Historical Messages (1st Page)
Consolidated Historical Viewer HISOperation and Monitoring Message 2008/07/01 09:57:39 AM Page 2
HIS0164 0236 2008/03/23 9:03:30 HIS Start
HIS0164 0231 2008/03/22 18:55:27 HIS Shutdown
•
•
•
E110304E.ai
Figure Print Format of Historical Messages (2nd and Subsequent Pages)

E11.3.3 Saving Historical Messages in a PDF File

To save historical messages in a PDF file as a report, select “Acrobat Distiller” as the
printer name when printing.
The following describes the operating procedure for outputting historical messages to a
PDF file.
n How to Save Historical Messages in a PDF File

1. Perform one of the following operations using Historical Viewer:
• Click the [Print] button on the toolbar.
• Select [File] and then [Print] from the menu bar.
The print dialog box appears.
2. Select “Acrobat Distiller” as the printer name.
3. Click the [OK] button.
The PDF file save dialog box appears.
4. Enter the name of the PDF file you are saving.
5. Click the [Save] button.
A report is created as a PDF file.
n Print Format of Historical Messages

The same print format is used to output images to a PDF file as printing to sheets of paper.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the print format of historical messages, see the following:
“n Print Format of Historical Messages” in E11.3.2, “Printing Historical Messages”

E11.3.4 E-Signatures of the Creator and Approver

If historical messages have been saved in a PDF file as a report, the creator of the report
should electronically sign the file immediately after saving it to prevent the PDF file from
being altered
Also, if the PDF file will be viewed by the approver for approval, the approver should
electronically sign the file.
n E-Signatures of the Creator

Generally, when a PDF file is created, Adobe Acrobat automatically starts to display the PDF
file just created. The creator of the file should electronically sign the file using the e-signature
function of Adobe Acrobat products.
TIP
• If Adobe Acrobat does not start automatically, start Adobe Acrobat manually, and then open the PDF file.
• The e-signature function cannot be used with Acrobat Reader. If a PDF file is being displayed using Acrobat
Reader, close Acrobat Reader once, start Adobe Acrobat manually, and then open the PDF file.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to use the e-signature function of Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later, refer to Help for
Adobe Acrobat.
n E-Signatures of the Approver

If the approver will view a PDF file in order to approve the contents, the approver should
electronically sign the PDF file using the e-signature function of Adobe Acrobat.
TIP
• E-signatures of the approver can be executed using Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later, or Acrobat Approval 5.0
or later. It is necessary to install these Acrobat products on a PC on which PDF files will be viewed and
approved in advance.
• The e-signature function cannot be used with Acrobat Reader. If a PDF file is being displayed using Acrobat
Reader, close Acrobat Reader once, start Adobe Acrobat manually, and then open the PDF file.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to use the e-signature function of Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later, refer to Help for
Adobe Acrobat.

Blank Page
<E12. Consolidated Alarm Management Software> E12-1
E12. Consolidated Alarm Management

Software
CENTUM VP provides Consolidated Alarm Management Software for HIS (hereinafter
referred to as “CAMS for HIS”) customized for HIS applications. A CAMS for HIS supports
EEMUA No.191 that defines a set of guidelines for alarm management.
n What Is CAMS for HIS?

CAMS for HIS permits alarm and event (hereinafter referred to as “A&E”) messages like system
alarm messages, process alarm messages, operation guide messages to be centrally managed.
After enabling the CAMS for HIS on [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, System Alarm view and
Process Alarm view will be replaced by the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Moreover, after
un-checking the option of [Exclude operation guide messages], (since operation guide messages
can also be handled by CAMS for HIS) the Operator Guide view will be replaced by the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is shown below.
CAMS for HIS : Message Monitor
File Edit View Operation Tools
Shelving
Filters
All Filters Favorites
E120001E.ai
Figure The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
SEE
ALSO For more information about the settings of Enabling CAMS for HIS, see the following:
E12.7, “Settings to Enable CAMS for HIS”

n System Configuration of CAMS for HIS

A CENTUM VP system configuration using CAMS for HIS is shown below.
By connecting an OPC A&E server, A&E messages generated in the connected STARDOM or
PRM systems can also be consolidated and managed on the HIS, along with A&E messages
generated in the CENTUM system.
A&E messages are equalized between multiple HISs in which CAMS for HIS is enabled. Desired
HISs can also be selected, from these multiple HISs, to implement A&E message equalization.
On the HISs in the Equalization Scope, all A&E messages including alarms received via an
OPC server are equalized. In each Equalization Scope, only one Download Master exists for
downloading data with Configurator of CAMS for HIS. Database files are always downloaded to
each HIS via the Download Master.
HIS #2
Every HIS can activate CAMS
for HIS Configurator to create Information which requires equalization
an alarm configuration database. among CAMS for HIS is equalized via open bus.
CAMS
HIS #1 for HIS HIS #3
DB
CAMS
for HIS
Configurator CAMS CAMS
for HIS for HIS
DB DB
Subject to
equalization
Open bus
Control bus
A&E A&E
Messages from CENTUM VP are broadcast

simultaneously to every STN by control bus.
FCS
PRM OPC Server OPC Server
Messages from OPC server is

noticed to specific CAMS for STARDOM
HIS via open bus. FCN/FCJ
E120002.ai
Figure System Configuration of CAMS for HIS
SEE
ALSO For more information about the settings of the Download Master, see the following:
“n HIS Utility Settings” in E12.7, “Settings to Enable CAMS for HIS”
TIP
If the power of Download Master is turned off, data cannot be downloaded to the database. However, operation
and monitoring of A&E messages is not affected.

n Terminology of CAMS for HIS

The terms listed below are used in this Instruction Manual, in addition to basic terms, in
describing the functions of CAMS for HIS. These terms are defined by the Engineering
Equipment and Materials Users Association (EEMUA). Refer to the following definitions as
necessary.
• Suppression: To suppress unnecessary A&E messages.
• Eclipsing: A type of operation to suppress unnecessary A&E messages. CAMS for HIS
displays groups of associated A&E messages in a tree.
• Obvious: A&E messages that are self-evident and do not require alarm information.
• Chattering: A phenomenon in which a given A&E message generates repeatedly in the
same pattern.
• Chained: A phenomenon in which one alarm triggers a series of other A&E messages.
• Nuisance: A&E messages that are unnecessary.
• Filtering: An operation to select A&E messages that serve your purpose.
• Sorting: An operation to sort the displayed A&E messages.
• Shelving: An operation to temporarily move alarms of lower priorities to other location.
• Shelf: A “shelf” on which to place alarms of lower priorities. Shelves are used in shelving.
• One-Shot Shelving: A type of shelving. Only one A&E message specified as the target of
shelving is shelved.
• Auto-Shelving: A type of shelving. All alarms matching the shelving conditions are shelved
continuously.
• Continuous: A type of shelving. Each A&E message specified as the target of shelving as
well as all identical messages generating repeatedly thereafter are shelved continuously for
a specified period.
• Load Shedding: When too many A&E messages occur, load shedding can restrict the
messages and only displays the messages of the designated categories.
• Auto Load Shedding: When the quantity of occurred A&E messages reaches a predefined
threshold, load shedding will restrict the messages and only displays the messages of the
designated categories.
• Purpose: Of each A&E message. What purpose the A&E message is raised for.
• Consequence: The scale of impact on the system if no appropriate step is taken for the
alarm.
• Time-to-respond: The allowable time within which an action must be taken after an alarm
generates.
• Alarm Priority: Priority of A&E messages.
• Guidance: Information on actions to be taken against generated alarms.
• Grouping: To divide associated alarms into groups based on their attributes.
• Normalization: To normalize specific information defined for each subsystem (e.g., attribute
name, alarm priority, plant hierarchy).
• Re-classification: To reclassify acquired A&E messages based on whether they are alarms
or events.
• Attribute Addition: To add identifiers used for message selection (e.g., Purpose or
Consequence), as well as value-added information (e.g., Guidance or Time-to-respond), to
A&E messages.

<E12.1 Functions of CAMS for HIS> E12-4
E12.1 Functions of CAMS for HIS

CAMS for HIS provides various functions to make CENTUM VP system compliant with
EEMUA No.191. This section explains these functions.
n A&E Message Processing by CAMS for HIS

The following describes the A&E message processing functions available in CAMS for HIS.
l Alarm Acquisition
Receives A&E messages from PRM and STARDOM via an OPC server, in addition to which
generated within CENTUM VP.
l Normalization
Adds attributes, such as source name, timestamp and priority, to received A&E messages based
on the settings file created by the Configurator of CAMS for HIS. Normalization standardizes
the way A&E messages are expressed in different systems, to make comparison of these A&E
messages easy.
l Grouping
Consolidates associated alarms into an alarm group. The user defines the conditions for
grouping alarms.
l Attribute Addition, or Change

Adds conditions for grouping alarms, or changes existing conditions.
l Suppression
Suppresses unnecessary alarms.
l Shelving
Temporarily moves (shelves) alarms of lower priorities to other location from the A&E Messages
pane, in order to facilitate the recognition of more important alarms in the A&E Browser pane
and A&E Messages pane. This prevents the operator from overlooking important alarms among
lower-priority alarms when many alarms are present.
l Load shedding
Shows only those messages matching the pre-defined search conditions once the number of
alarms generating in a specified period exceeds the threshold.
l Sorting
Sorts A&E messages based on desired items and shows the sorted A&E messages in the A&E
Messages pane.
l Filtering
Shows, among the A&E messages displayed in the A&E Messages pane, only those alarms
meeting specific conditions. It is possible to reduce the number of displayed alarms.

<E12.1 Functions of CAMS for HIS> E12-5
l Audit Trails
Manages audit trails regarding the settings information relating to CAMS for HIS created by
Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
l User Security Policy

Restricts the permissions on A&E Messages monitoring, change of system settings and other
operations for each user.
l Management of Alarms
Manages the statuses of alarms and alarm groups (acknowledged, unacknowledged, etc.) and
deletes unnecessary alarms.
l Alarm System Design

Using CAMS for HIS, this function sets various items needed to implement the specific alarm
processing desired by the user. This function is provided by Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO • For more information about shelving, see the following:
E12.3.1, “Shelving”
• For more information about filtering, see the following:
E12.3.2, “Filtering”
• For more information about suppression, see the following:
E12.3.5, “Suppression”

<E12.2 Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> E12-6
E12.2 Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

This section explains the structure of the message monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Appearance of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The figure below shows the appearance of the message monitor of CAMS for HIS.
Menu Bar
Toolbar
Shelving
A&E Browser Pane

Shelves Pane
Filters
A&E Messages Pane
Filters Pane
Details Pane
Dynamic Filters Pane
Status bar
E120201E.ai
Figure Appearance of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

E12.2.1 Action Modes for the Message Monitor of CAMS for

HIS
The following three action modes are provided for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Normal mode
• Configuration mode
• Function Check mode
Description of each mode follows.
n Normal mode
Used for operation and monitoring function. Scope of operation allowed is determined by the
configurator of CAMS for HIS for each user.
SEE
ALSO For details of setting up the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS using the configurator of CAMS for HIS, see the
following:
“n Message Monitor Settings” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
n Configuration mode
Used for editing items which are not allowed to change by the configurator of CAMS for HIS.
To start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in Configuration mode, you have to enter
username. You can change the window configuration in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
for you (i.e., each username).
TIP
The display areas set to [Hide Always] by the configurator of CAMS for HIS are kept hidden in Configuration
mode except for Menu bar and Dynamic filter pane.
SEE
ALSO For how to start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in Configuration mode, see the following:
“n Message Monitor with Configuration Mode” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for
HIS”
n Function Check mode

When running Function Check, the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS will be started in
Function Check mode. The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in Function Check mode runs
independently from that in Normal mode, they can run in parallel.
TIP
The display areas set to [Hide Always] by the configurator of CAMS for HIS are kept hidden in Function Check
mode.
SEE
ALSO For details of the Function Check, see the following:
E12.12, “Function Check of CAMS for HIS”

E12.2.2 Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of CAMS for

HIS
This section explains how to start and exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n How to Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

Only one Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS can be started on each HIS.
How to start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is explained below.
l Calling from a Button in the System Message Banner

When calling Process Alarm view, System Alarm view or Operator Guide view from System
Message Banner, the contents in the above views will be displayed in the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS instead of the above views(*1). The contents displayed in the Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS are the same contents of the above views in condition that all the filters are
enabled.
If the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is already open, the filter conditions for the Process
Alarm view, System Alarm view or Operator Guide view, whichever corresponds to the selected
button, will be selected in the open Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. If the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS is used in the window mode and behind other window, it will be brought to the top.
*1: Operator Guide view is replaced by the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS only when the option for integrating the operation
guide messages to the CAMS for HIS is checked.
l Calling from Overview Tool Boxes on Browser Bar

When calling Process Alarm view, System Alarm view or Operator Guide view from the Overview
Tool Boxes on Browser bar, the contents in the above views will be displayed in the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS in condition that all the filters of the above views are enabled. (*1)
Calling the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is shown as follows:
• From View tab, a Process Alarm view, System Alarm view or Operator Guide view can be
called up.
• From Trend tab, a Process Alarm view can be called up.
• From Plant tab, a Process Alarm view can be called up
l Calling from Tool Button Tool Box on Browser Bar

From the [Call View] of Tool Button Tool Box on Browser bar, the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS can be called up.
Or, when calling the Process Alarm view or the Operator Guide view from the [Call View] of Tool
Button Tool Box on Browser bar, the contents in the above views will be displayed in the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS in condition that all the filters of the above views are enabled. (*1)
l Calling by Specifying a Window Name

From the Name Input Tool Box on Browser bar, when calling a Process Alarm view, a System
Alarm view or an Operator Guide view, the contents in the above views will be displayed in the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in condition that all the filters of the above views are enabled.
(*1)

l Calling from Assigned Window Call Function
The Process Alarm view, System Alarm view and Operator Guide view can be called by
assigning the window call function to an object such as a function key. (*1)
The objects can be assigned with the window call function are as follows:
• Preset menus in the Browser bar
• Function keys on the operation keyboard
• Touch targets in the Graphics view, Product Control view, etc.
When entering a Batch ID as a filter key on Product Control view, the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS will be displayed. The filtered results regarding the Batch ID will be displayed in the A&E
Messages pane.
SEE
ALSO For more information about assignment of window call functions, see the followings:
E13.2.1, “Assigning a Window Call”
F12, “Graphic Builder”
G7, “Recipe-Related Windows”
n How to Exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The different ways to exit the CAMS for HIS are listed below.
• Select the button, which closes all operation and monitoring windows, from Tool Button Tool
Box on Browser Bar.
• Press the ERAS key on the operation keyboard.
• A new user logs on to the system or the current user logs out of the system.
• Select the [Close] button in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Click [File] in the menu bar of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, and then select [Exit].

E12.2.3 Layout of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The CAMS for HIS consists of the following bars and panes.
• Menu Bar
• Toolbar
• Shelves Pane
• Filters
• A&E Browser Pane
• A&E Messages Pane
• Details Pane
• Dynamic Filters Pane
• Status Bar
These bars and panes are explained individually.

n Menu Bar
Operations available in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS can be selected using the menu
items in the menu bar. A list of menu items is shown below.
Table Menu Items in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
Menu Description
File
Commit Changes Saves the settings for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The committed changes
will affect all the CAMS for HIS message monitors for the same user privileges in the
equalization scope.
Reset to System Default Reverts all changes made by the operator to the original system common settings.
Properties Displays the properties of the specified element, such a shelf or filter.
Print Print the screen image being displayed.
Exit Exits the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
Edit
Add Filter Adds a filter under the specified filter.
Delete Filter Deletes the specified filter.
Cut Cuts the specified filter.
Copy Copies the specified filter.
Paste Pastes the cut or copied filter.
Add Favorites Adds the specified filter to the Favorites tab sheet.
Delete Favorites Deletes the specified filter from Favorites tab.
View
Switch Layout Switches the window layout.
Show Alarm Tree Shows the A&E Messages pane in the tree view.
Shelves Pane Sets whether to show or hide the Shelves pane.
Filter Pane Sets whether to show or hide the Filter pane.
A&E Browser Pane Sets whether to show or hide the A&E Browser pane.
Details Pane Sets whether to show or hide the Details pane.
Suppression... Calls the Suppression dialog box.
Operation
Acknowledge Acknowledges individually the alarms specified in the A&E Messages pane.
Acknowledge All Acknowledges simultaneously all alarms currently displayed in the A&E Messages pane.
Manual Reset Resets individually the alarms specified in the A&E Messages pane.
Manual Reset All Resets simultaneously all alarms currently displayed in the A&E Messages pane.
Reset Shelf Resets the specified shelves.
Shelve
Shelf 1 Put the selected A&E messages or the filter settings to this shelf.
Shelf 2 Put the selected A&E messages or the filter settings to this shelf.
Shelf n (n indicates Put the selected A&E messages or the filter settings to this shelf.
the shelf number)
Clear Details Pane Deselects the selected A&E messages and clears the contents in Details pane.
Tools
Options... Displays the Option Window.
E120203E.ai

n Toolbar
You can define the buttons such as Acknowledge, Acknowledge All, or Manual Reset on the
Toolbar. The figure below shows an example of Toolbar in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
with defined buttons.
E120204E.ai
Figure Toolbar Buttons in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Default)
The toolbar buttons are explained below.
E120205E.ai
Print: Prints the contents currently shown in the A&E messages pane.
E120206E.ai
Acknowledge: Acknowledges the A&E messages selected from the list in the A&E messages
pane.
E120207E.ai
Acknowledge All: Acknowledges all the A&E messages shown in the A&E messages pane.
E120208E.ai
Manual Reset: Resets the acknowledged A&E messages selected from the list in the A&E
messages pane. (Only A&E messages that are allowed to reset manually)
E120209E.ai
Switch Alarm View: Switches between “Alarm list” and “Show Alarm Tree” in A&E messages
pane with each click.
E120210E.ai
Clear Details Pane: Deselects the selected A&E messages and clears the contents in Details
pane.
E120211E.ai
Clear Shelf: Removes all the A&E messages for shelving from the shelves.

E120212E.ai
Suppression: Displays the Suppression dialog box.
E120213E.ai
Show Shelves Pane: Switches between “Show” and “Hide” Shelves pane with each click.
E120214E.ai
Show Filter Pane: Switches between “Show” and “Hide” Filter pane with each click.
E120215E.ai
Show A&E Browser Pane: Switches between “Show” and “Hide” A&E Browser Pane with each
click.
E120216E.ai
Show Details Pane: Switches between “Show” and “Hide” Details Pane with each click.
E120221E.ai
Manual Reset All: Resets all the acknowledged A&E messages displayed in the A&E messages
pane. (Only A&E messages that are allowed to reset manually)
E120222E.ai
Change Window Layout: Changes the width of the A&E message displaying area on the A&E
Browser pane by one clicking.
E120223E.ai
Show/Hide A&E Browser Pane Background: Changes between the Standard and Zebra patterns
for the background pattern of the A&E Browser pane by one clicking.
E120224E.ai
Show/Hide A&E Messages Pane Background: Changes between the Standard and Zebra
patterns for the background pattern of the A&E Messages pane by one clicking.
E120225E.ai
Run...: Starts a pre-assigned application.

HIS
E120226E.ai
Call HIS Window: Calls the assigned operation and monitoring window.
E120227E.ai
Commit Changes: Saves the settings for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
E120228E.ai
Reset to System Default: Reverts all changes made by the operator to the original system
common settings.
SEE
ALSO For more information about customization of toolbars, see the following:
E12.5.3, “Customizing Toolbar”

n Shelves Pane
This pane is used to perform shelving of alarm messages. The Shelves pane shows shelf icons,
shelf names and information of alarms that are currently shelved. An example of the Shelves
pane is shown below.
Shelving
Shelf01
Contenuous_test
Shelf02
Auto_test
1h Shelving
OneShot_1h_test
4h Shelving
OneShot_4h_test
E120217E.ai
Figure Example of the Shelves Pane
SEE
ALSO • For more information about Shelving, see the following:
E12.3.1, “Shelving”
• For more information about Shelves settings, see the following:
“n Shelves Settings” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
n Filter Pane
This pane is used to filter alarm messages. An example of the Filter pane is shown below.
- USER1
- SIS
System
Process
System
Process
Operator Guide
PRM
Shift01
Shift02
filter icons
E120218E.ai
Figure Example of the Filter Pane
SEE
ALSO • For more information about Filtering, see the following:
E12.3.2, “Filtering”
• For more information about Filter Rules settings, see the following:
E12.5.6, “Customizing Filters Pane”

n A&E Browser Pane

This pane is used to reference A&E messages. You cannot perform shelving or filtering,
acknowledgment operations or display detail information in this pane.
New A&E messages can be inserted either at the beginning or end of the display pane. By
default, they are inserted at the beginning of the display pane.
A&E messages can also be sorted. Where new A&E messages will be shown follows the sorting
conditions.
l What Happens upon Overflow of Displayed Messages

If CAMS for HIS has been set so that new A&E messages are inserted at the beginning of the
display pane, new A&E messages are shown at the top of the display pane, while the messages
shown at the bottom of the pane are scrolled out.
If CAMS for HIS has been set so that new A&E messages are added at the end of the display
pane, new A&E messages are inserted at the end of the display pane.
l Sorting A&E Messages

A&E messages can be sorted by each item, such as [Timestamp] or [Messages]. Click a desired
item name, and a ▲ mark (ascending order) or ▼ mark (descending order) will be shown at the
beginning of the item name you have selected as the sorting condition.
You can also sort alarms in two steps by a combination of two conditions, such as sorting alarms
by tag name first and then sorting them again by priority. Click a desired item name to perform
the first sort, and then click another item name while holding down the Shift key. When the two-
step sort is complete, a + (plus) mark (ascending order) or - (minus) mark (descending order)
will be shown at the beginning of the item name you have selected as the sorting condition for
the second sort. A&E messages will not be sorted in the first sort, even if an item name is clicked
while holding down the Shift key.
If a new A&E message is issued while the sorting is still in progress, the applicable message will
also be sorted by the specified sorting condition(s) and inserted/shown in an appropriate position.
n A&E Messages Pane

This pane is used to display A&E messages. One message is shown in one line.Shelving,
filtering, acknowledgment operations, display detail pane and other operations are performed on
the messages shown in this pane.
New A&E messages can be inserted either at the beginning or end of the display pane. By
default, they are inserted at the beginning of the display pane. In the Filter pane, filter icons
associated with unacknowledged A&E messages, if any, also blink.
If the Emphases on Unread Alarms function is enabled, new A&E messages are shown in bold,
while the names of associated filters are also shown in bold.
A&E messages can also be sorted. Where new A&E messages will be shown follows the sorting
conditions.
SEE
ALSO What happens when the number of A&E messages exceeded the limit for the display pane due to generation of
new messages, or sorting operations of A&E messages, are the same as the behaviors and operations explained
in connection with the A&E Browser pane. For details, see the following:
“l What Happens upon Overflow of Displayed Messages” in “n A&E Browser Pane”
“l Sorting A&E Messages” in “n A&E Browser Pane”

n Details Pane
This pane is linked to the A&E Messages pane, and when one alarm is selected in the A&E
Messages pane, the causes, actions to take and other detail information of the alarm are shown
here.
Clicking the [Clear Details Pane] in the toolbar cancels the alarm selections in the A&E Messages
pane. The Details pane is also cleared and only the background color is shown.
n Dynamic Filter Pane

You can narrow down alarms by combining multiple filter conditions. Combinations of filter
conditions are set in the Dynamic Filter pane.
This pane is not normally displayed. To display the Dynamic Filter pane, select a filter icon in the
Filter pane and drag it to near the status bar.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Dynamic Filter pane, see the following:
E12.3.3, “Dynamic Filtering”
n Status Bar
On Status bar, the following items are displayed
• ALM: Number of A&E messages occurred per time unit (1 hour, 8 hours or 24 hours)
• RCV: Number of alarms recovered per time unit (1 hour, 8 hours or 24 hours)
• ACK: Number of A&E messages acknowledged per time unit (1 hour, 8 hours or 24 hours)
• MRCV: Number of manually reset alarms per time unit (1 hour, 8 hours or 24 hours)
• EVT: Number of events out of the A&E messages per time unit (1 hour, 8 hours or 24 hours)

E12.2.4 Changing the Layout of the Message Monitor of CAMS

for HIS
The layout of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS can be changed to enhance the
visibility of A&E messages.
n Switching the Layout of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS can be shown in two layout patterns: one in which the
A&E Browser pane is positioned to the right of the Shelves and Filter panes, and the other
in which the A&E Browser pane is positioned above the Shelves and Filter panes. To switch
between the two display patterns, click [View] in the menu bar and then select [Switch Layout], or
click the [Change Window Layout] button in the toolbar.
Menu Bar
Toolbar
A&E Browser Pane
Shelving
A&E Messages Pane

Shelves Pane
Filter
Details Pane
Filters Pane
Status bar
E120220E.ai
Figure Switching the Layout of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Example of A&E Browser Pane
Shown Above)
You can also change the size of each display pane by moving the boundaries of the pane. At
least one message line is always shown even in a minimized pane.
The display panes whose size can be changed are listed below.
• Shelves Pane
• Filters Pane
• A&E Browser Pane
• A&E Messages Pane
• Details Pane

n Showing/Hiding the Display Panes in the Message Monitor of CAMS

for HIS
Each display pane in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS can be shown or hidden.
The display panes that can be shown or hidden are listed below.
l Shelves Pane
Click [View] in the menu bar, and then select [Shelves Pane]. Or, click the [Show Shelves Pane]
button in the toolbar. If this pane is hidden, the Filters pane increases proportionally.
l Filters Pane
Click [View] in the menu bar, and then select [Filter Pane]. Or, click the [Show Filter Pane] button
in the toolbar. If this pane is hidden, the Shelves pane increases proportionally.
l A&E Browser Pane

Click [View] in the menu bar, and then select [A&E Browser Pane]. Or, click the [Show A&E
Browser Pane] button in the toolbar. If this pane is hidden, the A&E Messages pane increases
proportionally.
l Details Pane
Click [View] in the menu bar, and then select [Details Pane]. Or, click the [Show Details Pane]
button in the toolbar. If this pane is hidden, the A&E Messages pane increases proportionally.

E12.2.5 Notes on Using the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

There are items you should remember regarding CAMS for HIS. Take note of the following
items when using the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Notes on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The items you should note when using the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS are explained
below.
• Present process variable or the current value of the alarm status of the occuring process
alarm cannot be displayed.
• The whole message text is always shown in one line. Though text-wrapping break is
ignored, the text may be wrapped on Details pane.
• The color of message text cannot be changed. The specified color for the operation guide
messages will be ignored.

<E12.3 Screening Alarms> E12-21
E12.3 Screening Alarms

The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS lets you effectively manage frequent alarms. With
the help from this window, there are no more oversights of important alarms.
The applicable functions are listed below.
• Shelving
• Filtering
• Dynamic Filtering
• Message Tree View
• Suppression

E12.3.1 Shelving
Alarms of lower priorities can be temporarily moved (shelved) to other location from the
A&E Messages pane to make it easier to recognize more important alarms.
n Display of Shelved Alarms

The Shelves pane is divided into several fields corresponding to different shelving conditions.
These fields are called “buttons.” The information of shelved alarms is shown below each button
with a shelf name.
A display example of button is shown below.
Shelf name
4h Shelving (3/5/7/0)
OneShot_4h_test
Comment Alarm information
Shelf icon
E120301E.ai
Figure Button for Shelved Alarms
The alarm information shown on the button includes, from the left, the number of A&E messages
currently present, number of unacknowledged A&E messages, number of shelved A&E
messages, and A&E messages that remain shelved beyond the timeout period.
When a desired button associated with shelved alarms is selected, the shelved A&E messages
will be shown in the A&E Messages pane.

n Types of Shelving
Three types of shelving are available.
• Continuous Shelving
• One-Shot Shelving
• Auto-Shelving
The following explains each of these shelving types.
l Continuous Shelving
A&E messages identical to each A&E message specified for shelving are shelved continuously.
Any reset messages associated with these messages are also shelved continuously.
Once the specified time elapses, CAMS for HIS notifies that A&E messages remain shelved.
Thereafter, CAMS for HIS will not shelve any of those identical messages even when they are
issued.
l One-Shot Shelving
Only the A&E message specified for shelving is shelved.
Once the specified time elapses, CAMS for HIS notifies that the A&E message remains shelved.
l Auto-Shelving
Applicable alarms are shelved continuously in accordance with the filter conditions set for these
alarms specified for shelving.
Once the specified time elapses, CAMS for HIS notifies that A&E messages remain shelved.
Thereafter, CAMS for HIS will not shelve any of those identical messages even when they are
issued.
The filters that use Batch ID as criterion are not subject to Auto-Shelving.

n Starting Shelving
In CAMS for HIS, shelving conditions are set for each button in the Shelves pane. To start
shelving, select an A&E message to be shelved, or a filter condition, and drag and drop it onto a
desired button.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Shelves Settings, see the following:
An example of how shelving is started is shown below.

Drag and drop it onto
a desired shelf.
CAMS for HIS : Message Monitor CAMS for HIS : Message Monitor
Shelving Shelving
2008/03/23 11:01:10.400 FIC001.PV HI CL-102Cm
Filter Filter
All Filters Favorites All Filters Favorites
2008/03/23 11:24:10.400 TIC001.PV HH CY555 L 2008/03/23 11:24:10.400 TIC001.PV HH CY555 L

2008/03/23 11:14:10.400 TIC051.PV HI CY222 LG 2008/03/23 11:05:10.400 PID001.PV HI CG320
2008/03/23 11:05:10.400 PID001.PV HI CG320
2008/03/23 11:01:10.400 FIC001.PV HI CL-102Cm
Use the mouse to select an The button where the alarm was
alarm you want to shelve. dropped changes its color.
E120302E.ai
Figure Shelving Start Operation
The following explains the operation to start each type of shelving.

• Continuous Shelving
Select an A&E message you want to shelve, and then drag and drop it onto a button of
Continuous attribute.
• One-Shot Shelving
Select an A&E message you want to shelve, and then drag and drop it onto a button of
One-Shot attribute. When A&E messages are displayed in a tree, if you select a desired
message at the top of the tree and then drag and drop it onto the desired button, all A&E
messages under the selected message will be shelved.
• Auto-Shelving
In the Filter pane, select a filter condition meeting the desired shelving purpose, and then
drag and drop the condition onto a button of Auto attribute. All A&E messages matching the
specified filter condition will be specified as the target of shelving. All new A&E messages
matching the filter condition will also be shelved.
Moreover, after selecting the A&E messages for shelving, or select the filter for shelving, choose
[Operation] - [Shelve] from menu bar and then choose a name of shelf from the list of shelves.

n Resetting Shelving
The following explains the operation to reset shelving.
1. Select the shelf icon associated with the shelving you want to reset.
2. Select an A&E message that you want to remove from the shelf, and then click the [Clear
Shelf] button in the toolbar or choose [Operation] - [Reset Shelf] from the menu bar. You
can also choose [Clear Shelf] on the context menu, or drag and drop the message to a filter
area.
However, if an A&E message stays on the shelf for too long and becomes timeout, the message
will be automatically excluded from the shelving. If the same A&E message occurs, the message
will no longer be shelved.
Moreover, if you download the shelf definition files after deleting the automatic shelving
definitions, Auto-Shelving will be disabled when you restart the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS.
n Timeout Notification for Shelved Alarms

If a timeout occurs for any shelved A&E message, the applicable shelf icon will change to the
alarm clock to notify the operator that shelf contains a timeout message. When the applicable
shelf icon is selected to display the content of the shelf in the A&E Messages pane, you will see
an alarm clock icon at the beginning of the timeout A&E message.
E120316E.ai
Figure Alarm Clock Icon of the Timeout A&E Message
n Extent of Shelving
The entire system or an individual user can be selected as the extent of shelving in CAMS for
HIS. However, this setting needs to be uniform within the Equalization Scope.
The following explains different extents of shelving.
• SYSTEM
Shelving applies to the entire system. Shelved A&E messages are also shelved in all
Message Monitor of CAMS for HISs within the same system.
• USER
Shelving applies to the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS associated with the same HIS
logon user. Shelved A&E messages are also shelved in all Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS associated with the same HIS logon user.
SEE
ALSO You can set the Extent of Shelving from the Shelves tab on the configurator of CAMS for HIS. For more
information about how to set the extent of shelving, see the following:

E12.3.2 Filtering
Selects A&E messages that meet the criteria you specify.
n Display of Filtered Alarms

Information of filtered alarms is shown next to the selected filter name (or below the filter name in
the Favorites tab).
A display example of filtered alarms is shown below.
User1
(3/5/7)
Filter name
Filter icon Alarm information

E120303E.ai
Figure Filtered Alarms
The alarm information shown when filtering is enabled includes, from the left, the number of A&E
messages currently present, number of unacknowledged A&E messages, and total number of
A&E messages.
When an active filter icon is selected, the filtered A&E messages will be shown in the A&E
Messages pane.
n Starting Filtering
Select a desired filter icon to start filtering.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Filter Rules settings, see the following:
E12.5.6, “Customizing Filters Pane”
n Activation of Filters
The filters of CAMS for HIS are functioning only on the CAMS for HIS message monitor that
started the filters. The filters will no longer function after switching HIS users.

n Display Formats of the Filters Pane

The Filters pane can be displayed in two formats: one in which all filter conditions are shown in a
tree, and the other in which frequently used filter conditions are selected and shown in a list. You
can switch between these two display formats using the corresponding tabs.
• All Filters tab: Tree format
• Favorites tab: List format
The following illustrates how the Filter pane display is switched.
- USER1 USER1
- SIS
System Filter icon
Process Process
System
Process
PRM
Operator Guide
PRM Shift01
Shift01
Favorites tab
Shift02
- Current Product [01-0007]
- SIS
System
Process
System
Process
Operator Guide
Filter icon
All Filters tab

E120304E.ai
Figure Switching of Filter Pane Display
In both formats, a filter condition is indicated by an icon and a filter name. The icons shown in this
pane are called “filter icons.”
Among all filter icons, the icon shown at the beginning of the tree (root) is called the “user icon.”
When a user icon is selected, all A&E messages that can be viewed by the user of the applicable
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS will be shown in the A&E Messages pane. The Filter pane will
open in the tree format by default, where the user icon is already selected.

E12.3.3 Dynamic Filtering

Dynamic Filtering lets you screen alarms by combining multiple filter conditions, to make
it easier to recognize desired A&E messages.
n Display of the Dynamic Filter Pane

The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS showing the Dynamic Filter Pane is illustrated below.
File Edit View Operation Tools
Shelving Timestamp Message
Shelf (O)
Filter
System FCS0104
E120305E.ai
Figure Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS Showing the Dynamic Filter Pane

n Starting Dynamic Filtering

To start dynamic filtering, select multiple filter icons in the Filter pane, arrange them in the
Dynamic Filter pane, and then define operators to connect the filter icons. However, the filters
that use Batch ID as criterion are not subject to Dynamic Filtering.
The specific operation is explained below.
1. Select a filter icon in the Filter pane, and then drag it to near the status bar.
The Dynamic Filter pane appears at the bottom of the Details pane.
2. Drop the filter icon into the Dynamic Filter pane.
By following the same steps, drag and drop all desired filter conditions.
FCS0102
FCS0102
FCS0102
Drag with the mouse. Once the icon reaches the bottom of the window,
the Dynamic Filter pane appears.
E120306E.ai
Figure Operation to Start Dynamic Filtering - Select a Filter Conditions
3. Drag and drop the icons to define the operators connecting the filter icons.
Filter rules are defined.
FCS0102 FCS0104 FCS0102 FCS0104
Drag with the mouse. Filter rules are defined.

E120307E.ai
Figure Operation to Start Dynamic Filtering - Filter Rules Definition

4. To register the defined Filter rules as a new filter condition, click the [Set Filter Rules] button.
FCS0102 FCS0104 FCS0102 FCS0104
Select the [Set Filter Rules] A new filter condition is registered

button if registered. as a Filter rule.
E120308E.ai
Figure Filter Rules Setting
Closing the Dynamic Filter pane also clears the filter rules.
l Setting Operators in the Dynamic Filter Pane

The following explains the operation that can be set in the Dynamic Filters pane.
E120309E.ai
Drag and drop this icon onto the Dynamic Filter pane to define an OR operator among the filter
conditions.
E120310E.ai
Drag and drop this icon onto the Dynamic Filter pane to define a NOT operator.
E120311E.ai
Drag and drop this icon onto the Dynamic Filter pane to define parentheses. The positions of
parentheses are adjustable.
E120312E.ai
Click this button to register the Filter rules you have defined in the Dynamic Filter pane, to the
Filters pane.
If no operator is dragged and dropped, the filter conditions will be connected by an AND operator.

E12.3.4 Alarm Tree View (Eclipse Function)

The A&E Messages pane can be displayed as a tree of all associated A&E messages,
instead of the normal list. A&E messages of the highest priority are shown at the top
of the tree, and A&E messages in the same alarms are placed underneath as collapsed
branches, to make it easier to recognize more important alarms.
n Show Alarm Tree in A&E Messages Pane

The figure below shows an example of Alarm Tree in A&E Messages Pane.
Timestamp Messages
2008/03/23 10:43:26 NZPID1 High-priority alarm PV = 100.0 HI
2008/03/23 18:48:29 BKVELLIM Velocity Limiter MV = 0.1 old= 0.0 [ ENG
2008/03/23 10:24:44 BKPG 13-zone Program Set MV = 1.0 old= 0.0 [ OFF
2008/03/23 10:19:37 BKRATIO Ratio Set MV = 1.0 old= 0.0 [ OFF
2008/03/23 14:34:59 BKPID-ALARM3 PV=MV(3) for Alarm PV = 80.0 HH
2008/03/23 14:31:04 BKPID-ALARM1 PV=MV(1) for Alarm PV = 100.0 HI
E120313E.ai
Figure A&E Messages Pane in the Tree View
n Displaying the Message Tree

Click [View] in the menu bar and select [Show Alarm Tree], or click the [Switch Alarm View] button
in the toolbar.
To expand the tree, click the “+ (plus)” icon at the beginning of each A&E message.
Timestamp Messages
2008/03/23 10:43:26 NZPID1 High-priority alarm PV = 100.0 HI
2008/03/23 9:23:26 NZPID1 High-priority alarm PV = 100.0 LO Recover
2008/03/23 9:2… NZPID1 High-priority alarm PV = 0.0 LO
2008/03/23 9:2… NZPID1 High-priority alarm PV = 100.0 LO Recover
2008/03/23 18:48:29 BKVELLIM Velocity Limiter MV = 0.1 old= 0.0 [ ENG
2008/03/23 10:24:44 BKPG 13-zone Program Set MV = 1.0 old= 0.0 [ OFF
2008/03/23 10:19:37 BKRATIO Ratio Set MV = 1.0 old= 0.0 [ OFF
2008/03/23 14:34:59 BKPID-ALARM3 PV=MV(3) for Alarm PV = 80.0 HH
2008/03/23 14:31:04 BKPID-ALARM1 PV=MV(1) for Alarm PV = 100.0 HI
E120314E.ai
Figure A&E Messages Pane in the Expanded Tree View

E12.3.5 Suppression
Suppression is a general term for the functions provided by CAMS for HIS to suppress
A&E messages. Suppressing unnecessary A&E messages makes it easier for operators
to recognize the more important A&E messages.
n Suppression in CAMS for HIS

Suppressible processing and A&E messages are listed below.
• Show Alarm Tree (Eclipsing): Displays the related A&E messages in a tree structure.
• Obvious messages:
Suppresses the A&E messages of the specified stations or alarm groups.
• Chattering messages:
Suppresses the repeated A&E messages after displaying the first 10 messages.
l Suppression Processing–Obvious Messages

The A&E messages of specified stations and alarm groups will be suppressed so as not to be
displayed on the CAMS for HIS message monitor. The suppressed A&E messages cannot be
displayed anymore. However, the messages displayed before the suppression of an alarm will
not be removed from the display after the alarm is specified for suppression.
The stations and alarm groups subject to suppression can be found on the Suppression dialog
box. Choose [View] - [Suppression...] from the menu bar on the message monitor of CAMS for
HIS, or click [Suppression...] button on the toolbar. The Suppression dialog box will appear. The
suppressed stations and alarm groups displayed on the Suppression dialog box are marked as
“Suppressed” in the [Status] column.
The Suppression dialog box is shown below.
Suppression
Update Cancel
Group Name State Operation Description

FCS0101 Suppressed Cancel FCS1 in area 1
GRP1 Suppressed Cancel GRP1
E120315E.ai
Figure Suppression Dialog Box

The details of the setting items are as follows:
• [Update]:
Clicking this button will update the display on the Suppression dialog box. Since the
Suppression dialog box is not updated automatically, it is necessary to click this button when
checking the latest information.
• [Cancel]:
Clicking this button will stop updating the display on the Suppression dialog box.
• [Group Name]:
Shows the names of the groups or stations subject to suppression.
• [State]:
The groups undergoing the suppression are marked as Suppresses.
• [Operation]:
Clicking the [Cancel] button in the [Operation] column will release the suppressed group
from suppression.
• [Description]:
Displays the descriptions on the suppressed alarm group. For the field control station, the
comment text defined on the builder for the FCS will be displayed. The description for the
alarm group cannot be modified.
SEE
ALSO For more information about group of the A&E messages, see the following:
“n Alarm Group Settings” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
l Enable Alarm Suppression

Using the touch targets, push buttons or soft keys in the graphic view can enable suppression.
Click an above described object and enter the command script for enabling suppression. The
command script to be assigned to the object for enabling the alarm suppression is shown as
follows. Where the GroupName argument should be specified with the name of an alarm group
or a station that the alarms need to be suppressed.
(CENTUM VPInstalledFolder)\program\ BKHCAMS_SON.exeΔGroupName
Δ: Space character
SEE
ALSO For more information about assigning the soft-key on HIS graphic view, see the following:

l Disable Alarm Suppression
There are tow ways to disable the alarm suppression:
• Disabling the suppression on HIS graphic view.
Using the touch targets, push buttons or soft keys in the graphic view can disable
suppression. Click an above described object and enter the command script for disabling
suppression. The command script to be assigned to the object for disabling the alarm
suppression is shown as follows. Where the GroupName argument should be specified with
the name of an alarm group or a station that the alarms suppression need to be released.
(CENTUM VPInstalledFolder)\program\ BKHCAMS_SOF.exeΔGroupName
Δ: Space character
SEE
ALSO For more information about assigning the soft-key on HIS graphic view, see the following:
• Disabling Alarm Suppression on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

Open the Suppression dialog box; click the Off button in the On/Off field of the
corresponding alarm group.
n Affects of Alarm Suppression

The alarm suppression of CAMS for HIS will affect all the alarms of equalization scope and
the alarms handled by the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS regardless the operator (user)
privilege.

<E12.4 Acknowledgment of Alarms in CAMS for HIS> E12-35
E12.4 Acknowledgment of Alarms in CAMS for

HIS
In CENTUM VP, CAMS for HIS and HIS can be coordinated to unify the alarm status
management between CAMS for HIS and FCS. This function permits alarms to be
acknowledged in either the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS or HIS window.
n Alarm Status Transition

An alarm assumes the following four statuses after it is generated until reset.
• Active - Unacknowledged
• Active - Acknowledged
• Inactive - Unacknowledged
• Inactive - Acknowledged
An A&E message is issued in accordance with the status of each alarm. An alarm status
transition model is shown below.
Alarm occurrence
(*1) Active - Acknowledge Active - (*1)

Unacknowledged Acknowledged
<In Red> <In Red>
Reset Reset Manual reset
(*1) (*1) Inactive - Inactive - (*1)

Unacknowledged Acknowledged
<In Red> <In Green> <In Green>
Auto Clear
Acknowledge the reset message

Acknowledge the alarm
or reset message
E120401E.ai
Figure Alarm Status Transition
*1: This mark will be displayed at the beginning of the A&E messages without the default tag marks.
The system alarm messages, the process alarm messages and the operation guide messages sent from CENTUM are attached
with the specific marks of CENTUM VP system.
SEE
ALSO • For more information about the icons of the system alarm messages sent from CENTUM VP/CS 3000, see
the following:
“n Message Display Area of the System Alarm View” in E4.2.1, “Components of System Alarm View”
• For more information about the icons of the process alarm messages sent from CENTUM VP/CS 3000, see
the following:
“n Message Display Area of the Process Alarm View” in E3.6.1, “Components of the Process Alarm View”
• For more information about the icons of the operation guide messages sent from CENTUM VP/CS 3000,
see the following:
“n Message Display Area of the Operator Guide View” in E3.5.1, “Components of Operator Guide View”

l Active - Unacknowledged
For an alarm of Active - Unacknowledged status, an alarm message is shown in the A&E
Browser pane and also in the A&E Messages pane, and the icons at the beginning of the
messages blink. If the generated alarm message matches any search condition, the associated
filter icon blinks in the Filter pane.
l Active - Acknowledged
For an alarm of Active - Acknowledged status, the icons at the beginning of the alarm messages
shown in the A&E Browser pane and A&E Messages pane stop blinking. If all alarm messages
matching the search condition have been acknowledged, the associated filter icon also stops
blinking.
l Inactive - Unacknowledged
For an alarm of Inactive - Unacknowledged status, an alarm message and a reset message
are shown in the A&E Browser pane and also in the A&E Messages pane, and the icons
at the beginning of both messages blink. If either the alarm message or reset message is
acknowledged, both messages will be cleared from the display panes. If all alarm messages
matching the search condition have been acknowledged, the associated filter icon stops blinking.
l Inactive - Acknowledged
There are two patterns in which A&E messages for an alarm of Inactive - Acknowledged status
are handled, as explained below.
• Auto Clear of A&E messages is enabled
In this case, the reset message is not shown. The alarm message paired with the reset
message is cleared from the A&E Browser pane and A&E Messages pane.
• Reset messages need to be acknowledged manually
In this case, the reset message is not cleared until they are acknowledged. If a generated
alarm matches any search condition, the associated filter icon blinks in the Filter pane.
When the reset message is acknowledged, both messages will be cleared from the display
panes.
TIP
An A&E message that has been acknowledged in other Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Equalization
Scope and whose alarm status has subsequently become inactive will be cleared from the message display pane
automatically.

n Acknowledging Alarms
Alarms can be acknowledged in both the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS and HIS window.
l Acknowledging Alarms in CAMS for HIS

In CAMS for HIS, specified alarms can be acknowledged individually or all alarm can be
acknowledged simultaneously. However, some operators are prohibited to perform the
acknowledgement due to restriction of their user privileges.
• Acknowledge
To acknowledge an individual alarm, select the desired message in the A&E Messages
pane, and then click the [Acknowledge] button in the toolbar. Or, click [Operation] in the
menu bar, and then select [Acknowledge].
• Acknowledge All
To acknowledge all alarms simultaneously, click the [Acknowledge All] button in the toolbar.
Alternatively, display the contexM$Eenu in the Filters pane, and then select [Marks All
Read]. Or, click [Operation] in the menu bar, and then select [Acknowledge All].
Note that, selecting [Acknowledge All] acknowledges all A&E message displayed in the A&E
Messages pane, however, hidden A&E message that are scrolled out and not shown in the
A&E Messages pane are not acknowledged.
l Acknowledging Alarms on the HIS

On the HIS, alarms can be acknowledged in the Tuning or Graphic view.
n Manually Resetting Alarms

In manual reset operation, specified alarms can be reset individually or all alarm can be reset
simultaneously. However, some operators are prohibited to perform the reset operation due to
restriction of their user privileges. Alarms whose manual reset are inhibited, or alarms not yet
acknowledged, cannot be reset manually.
• Manual Reset
To reset an individual alarm, select the desired message in the A&E Messages pane, and
then click the [Manual Reset] button in the toolbar. Or, click [Operation] in the menu bar, and
then select [Manual Reset].
• Manual Reset All
To reset all alarm simultaneously, click the [Manual Reset All] button in the toolbar. Or, click
[Operation] in the menu bar, and then select [Manual Reset All].
Note, selecting [Manual Reset All] can only reset the A&E messages displayed in the A&E
Messages pane, however, the hidden A&E messages that are scrolled out and not shown in
the A&E messages pane will not be reset.
When resetting the following A&E messages, the manual resets operation is provided.
• The alarms that do not have the recovery messages
Some of the CENTUM VP system alarm messages, the operation guide messages and the
A&E messages through the OPC A&E server do not have recovery messages.
• The A&E messages those recovery messages are suppressed

<E12.5 Customizing the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> E12-38
E12.5 Customizing the Message Monitor of CAMS

for HIS
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is customizable to the extent allowed by the
Configurator of CAMS for HIS for each user. This section describes the customization of
the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Window for Customizing the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

To customize (i.e., change the settings of) the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, open Option
window from the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS:
From the menu bar for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, select [Tools] and [Options].
Option window appears.
The Option window contains the following tabs:
• General tab
• Toolbar tab
• Status Bar tab
• Shelves Pane tab
• Filter Pane tab
• A&E Browser Pane tab
• A&E Messages Pane tab
• Dynamic Filters Pane tab
• Print tab
l Buttons Common on All Tabs

The following buttons are common on all the tabs.
• [Reset to System Default] Button
Clicking this button will revert the settings on the Option window to the default settings.
After clicking this button, the default settings will not be kept unless the [Apply] or [OK]
button is clicked.
SEE
ALSO For more information about modification of the default settings on Option window, see the following:
HIS”
• [Apply] Button
Clicking this button will save the modified contents of all the tabs. After clicking this button,
the contents prior to the modification can no longer be reverted. However, if the contents on
the tabs are unchanged, the [Apply] button will be displayed as shaded (grayed).
• [OK] Button
Saves the modified contents and exits.
• [Cancel] Button
Exits without saving the modified contents.

E12.5.1 Customizing General items on Message Monitor of

CAMS for HIS
To customize General items on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, click the General
tab in the Option window and do the settings.
n General Tab in the Option Window

The figure below shows the General tab in Option window.
Option
A&E Browser Pane A&E Messages Pane Dynamic Filters Pane Print
General Toolbar Status Bar Shelves Pane Filter Pane
Layout of A&E Browser Pane Standard Wide Reset to System Default
Foreground Color
Background Color
Text Color of Pane Title
Background Color of Pane Title
Text Color of Pane Title (Selected)
Background Color of Pane Title

(Selected)
Apply OK Cancel
E120501E.ai
Figure General Tab in Option Window

n General Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The general setting items relating to the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS are shown below.
Table General Setting Items for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
Setting Item Description
Layout of A&E Set whether to show the A&E Browser pane beside or above the Shelves pane in the
Browser Pane Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
If the layout change of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is not allowed, the layout
cannot be changed by the operator. [Change Window Layout] button in the toolbar is grayed
out and cannot be selected.
Standard The A&E Browser pane is shown beside the Shelves pane.
Wide The A&E Browser pane is shown above the Shelves pane.
Foreground Color Set the color of texts in All Filters tab in the Filter Pane. The setting made here is followed
unless otherwise specified for this pane.
Background Color Set the color of background in All Filters tab in the Filter Pane. The setting made here is
followed unless otherwise specified for this pane.
Text Color of Pane Set the text color to be applied to the title name of each pane in the Message Monitor of
Title CAMS for HIS.
Background Color of Set the background color to be applied to the title name of each pane in the Message Monitor
Pane Title of CAMS for HIS.
Text Color of Pane Set the color of title name texts in each pane when one of the items in the pane is selected.
Title (Selected)
Background Color of Set the color of title name background in each pane when one of the items in the pane is
Pane Title (Selected) selected.
E120502E.ai

E12.5.2 Customizing Menu Bar

Customizing Menu Bar is allowed only from the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
You cannot customize the drop-down list of options for each menu on the Menu Bar. And
only the items you are allowed to execute on Menu Bar are selectable in the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS.

E12.5.3 Customizing Toolbar

To customize Toolbar, click the Toolbar tab in the Option window and do the settings.
n Toolbar Tab in the Option Window

The figure below shows the Toolbar tab in the Option window.
Option
Button Size Standard Large Reset to System Default
Button Settings Available Button for Toolbar Present Button for Toolbar
Manual Reset All Print Properties
Change Window Layout Separetor
Show/Hide A&E Browser Pan Acknowledge
Show/Hide A&E Messages Pa Acknowledge All
Run... Manual Reset
Call HIS Window Separator

HIS
Commit Charges Switch Alarm View
Reset to System Default Clear Details Pane
Apply OK Cancel
E120503E.ai
Figure Toolbar Tab in the Option Window

n Toolbar Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The setting items relating to the toolbar of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS are shown
below.
Table Toolbar Setting Items of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
Button Size Set the design of the toolbar to be shown as either the design corresponding to the document
creation application or a group of arranged buttons.
Standard The toolbar design corresponding to the document creation application is adopted.
Large The toolbar is shown as a group of arranged buttons.
Button Settings Select the items to show on the toolbar and set the order in which the items show.
From the [Available Button for Toolbar] pane, select the items to show on the toolbar. Click the
right-arrow button. The selected items appear in the [Present Button for Toolbar] pane. If items
you do not intend to show on the toolbar are in the [Present Button for Toolbar] pane, select
them from the [Present Button for Toolbar] pane and click the left-arrow button.
To change the order in which the items show on the toolbar, select an item from the [Present
Button for Toolbar] pane and click the up-arrow or down-arrow button.
E120504E.ai
l Tools on the Toolbar
SEE
ALSO For more information about the tools on the toolbar, see the following:
“n Toolbar” in E12.2.3, “Layout of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS”
n Context Menu of Toolbar

When right clicking the toolbar, a context menu will appear. The tasks can be started from the
context menu are as follows:
• [Style..]: Opens the Toolbar tab in Option window.

E12.5.4 Customizing Status bar

To customize Status Bar, click the Status Bar tab in the Option window and do the
settings.
n Status Bar Tab in the Option Window

The figure below shows the Status Bar tab in the Option window.
Option
Height 22 Reset to System Default
Font Modify MS UI Gothic
Renewal Period (Sec) 60
Apply OK Cancel
E120505E.ai
Figure Status Bar Tab in the Option Window
n Status Bar Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The setting items relating to the status bar of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS are shown
below.
Table Status Bar Setting Items of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

Height Set the height of the status bar.
Font Set the font of text to be displayed in the status bar.
Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and
font size.
Renewal Period (Sec) Set the update interval for data shown in Status bar.
E120506E.ai

E12.5.5 Customizing Shelves Pane

To customize Shelves Pane, click the Shelves Pane tab in the Option window and do the
settings.
n Shelves Pane Tab in the Option Window

The figure below shows the Shelves Pane tab in the Option window.
Option
Icon Blinking ON OFF Reset to System Default

Number of Active Alarms Show Hide
Number of Unacknowledged Alarms Show Hide
Total Number of Alarms Show Hide
Number of Ignored Alarms Show Hide
Emphases on Unread Alarms ON OFF
Height 36
Text Color
Background Color
Text Color (Selected)
Background Color (Selected)
Apply OK Cancel
E120507E.ai
Figure Shelves Pane Tab in the Option Window

n Shelves Pane Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The setting items relating to the Shelves Pane are shown below.
Table Setting Items Relating to the Shelves Pane

Icon Blinking Set whether to blink the icons of the unacknowledged messages.
ON The icon blinks.
OFF The icon does not blink.
Number of Active Set to show or hide the number of active A&E messages.
Alarms Show Shows the number of active A&E messages.
Hide Hides the number of active A&E messages.
Number of Set to show or hide the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Unacknowledged Show Shows the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Alarms
Hide Hides the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Total Number of Set to show or hide the total number of A&E messages.
Alarms
Show Shows the total number of A&E messages.
Hide Hides the total number of A&E messages.
Number of Ignored Set whether to show or hide the number of timeout A&E messages in the shelf.
Alarms Show Shows the timeout A&E messages.
Hide Hides the timeout A&E messages.
Emphases on Set whether or not to show the shelf name, shelf description and number of A&E messages in
Unread Alarms bold if an unread A&E message is present.
ON The button text is shown in bold if any unread A&E message is present in the selected
shelf.
OFF The button text is not shown in bold even if any unread A&E message is present in the
selected shelf.
Font Set the font and font size of the shelf name, shelf description and number of alarms.
Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and font size.
Height Set the height of a Shelf.
Text Color Text Color of button on the Shelves
Background Color Background Color of button on the Shelves
Text Color Text Color of button on the Shelves (Selected)
(Selected)
Background Color Background Color of button on the Shelves (Selected)
(Selected)
E120508E.ai
n Context Menu of Shelves

When right clicking the shelving area, a context menu will appear. The tasks can be started from
the context menu are as follows:
• [Style..]: Opens the Shelves Pane tab in Option window.
l Context Menu of a Shelf

When right clicking on a shelf, a context menu will appear. The tasks can be started from the
• [Clear Shelf]: Reset shelving.
• [Properties]: Opens the properties sheet of the shelf.

E12.5.6 Customizing Filters Pane

To customize Filters Pane, click the Filter Pane tab in the Option window and do the
settings.
n Filter Pane Tab in the Option Window

The figure below shows the Filter Pane tab in the Option window.
Option
Icon Blinking ON OFF Reset to System Default

Number of Active Alarms Show Hide Load Shedding Rules
Number of Unacknowledged Alarms Show Hide Filter Name
Total Number of Alarms Show Hide Reference Time (Sec) 60

Emphases on Unread Alarms ON OFF Number of Alarms 100
Image of Dynamic Filter

Favorites Tab
All Filters Tab Height of Filter 36
Text Color
Background Color
Apply OK Cancel
E120509E.ai
Figure Filter Pane Tab in the Option Window

n Filters Pane Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The setting items relating to the Filters Pane are shown below.
Table Setting Items Relating to the Filters Pane (1/2)
Icon Blinking Set whether to blink the icons of the unacknowledged messages.
ON The icon blinks.
OFF The icon does not blink.
Number of Active Set to show or hide the number of active A&E messages.
Alarms Show Shows the number of active A&E messages.
Hide Hides the number of active A&E messages.
Number of Set to show or hide the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Unacknowledged Show Shows the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Alarms
Hide Hides the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Total Number of Set to show or hide the total number of A&E messages.
Alarms Show Shows the total number of A&E messages.
Hide Hides the total number of A&E messages.
Emphases on Set whether or not to show the filter name, filter description and number of A&E messages in
Unread Alarms bold if an unread A&E message is present.
ON The text is shown in bold if any unread A&E message is present in the selected filter.
OFF The text is not shown in bold even if any unread A&E message is present in the
selected filter.
Image of Dynamic Set the icon(s) shown in the Filter pane when new Filter criteria are built in the Dynamic Filter
Filter pane and registered in the Filter pane.
All Filters Tab
Font Set the font and the font size of the filter name, filter description and number of A&E
messages. Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and the
font size.
Text Color Text Color of button on the Filters (Selected)
(Selected)
Background Background Color of button on the Filters (Selected)
Color (Selected)
Favorites Tab
Height of Filter Set the height of Filter.
Font Set the font and the font size of the filter name, filter description and number of A&E
messages. Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and the
font size.
Text Color Text Color of button on the Filters
Background Background Color of button on the Filters
Color
Text Color Text Color of button on the Filters (Selected)
(Selected)
Background Background Color of button on the Filters (Selected)
Color (Selected)
E120510.ai

Table Setting Items Relating to the Filters Pane (2/2)
Load Shedding Rules
Filter Name Set the Filter name used for Load Shedding.
The filters that use Batch ID as criterion are not subject to Load Shedding.
Reference Time (Sec) Set the interval for counting the number of occurring A&E messages to determine the start
of Load Shedding.
Number of Alarms Set the threshold number of the occurring A&E messages to determine the start of Load
Shedding.
E120511E.ai
n Context Menu of Filters

When right clicking the filtering area, a context menu will appear. The tasks can be started from
the context menu are as follows:
• [Style..]: Opens the Filter Pane tab in Option window.
l Context Menu of a Filter

When right clicking on a filter, a context menu will appear. The tasks can be started from the
Table Context Menu of a Filter on All Filters tab
Menu Items Description
Add Filter Opens the dialog box for creating filters.
Delete Filter Deletes the selected filter.
Cut Cuts the selected filter.
Copy Copies the selected filter.
Paste Pastes the cut or copied filter.
Add Favorites Adds the selected filter to Favorites.
Marks All Read Marks all the filtered alarms of the selected filter as read.
Properties Opens the properties sheet of the selected filter.
E120526E.ai
Table Context Menu of a Filter on Favorites tab

Delete Filter Deletes the selected filter from Favorites tab.
Marks All Read Marks all the filtered alarms of the selected filter as read.
Properties Opens the properties sheet of the selected filter.
E120527E.ai

n Shortcut Keys in Filter Pane

In Filter pane, the shortcut keys can be used for copying or moving the filters. The following
commands and the corresponding shortcut keys are as follows:
• Press Ctrl and X together: Cut the filter (dimly displayed.)
• Press Ctrl and C together: Copy the filter.
• Press Ctrl and V together: Paste the filter.
• Press ESC: Cancels cut command.
n Create/Delete Filter
The filters can be created or deleted. Moreover, the hierarchy of a filter can be changed. The
details will be explained below.
The setting items relating to filter attributes are shown below.
Table Filter Attribute Setting Items

Filter Name Specify a filter name.
Filter Icon Specify the file name of the icon to be displayed on the filter button.
Description Enter a description of the filter.
Conditional expression Set formulas to be used as filter rules.
E120512E.ai
l Creating a Filter
The filter creation procedure is specified below.
1. In the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, open the [All Filters] tab in the Filters pane.
2. Bring the cursor to the hierarchy immediately above the one where you will add a filter, right-
clicking the mouse pops up the context menu.
3. In the context menu, select [Add Filter].
The dialog box shown below appears.
Create Filter
Filter Name
Description
Attribute
OK Cancel
E120513E.ai
Figure The Dialog Box to Create Filter

4. In this dialog box, enter the applicable information in the [Filter Name] and [Description]
fields, and then select a desired alarm attribute under [Attribute]. For setting alarm attribute,
right click the arrow button and select an attribute from the pull-down menu. The items in the
[Attribute] pull-down menu are the same as the attributes in the Select Columns dialog box.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the attributes in the Select Columns dialog box, see the following:
“l Select Columns Dialog Box” in “n A&E Browser Pane Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS” in E12.5.7, “Customizing A&E Browser Pane”
The field to enter filter rules appears in accordance with the type of the alarm attribute
selected. The attribute types are shown below.
• Time
• Value
• String
In the conditional expression, the wildcard characters (*) and (?) can be used for substituting
the string text.
For an example, a string of “FCS0101*” represents all strings started with FCS0101 such as
“FCS0101 %DR0021S010101.”
Moreover, if “3??” is used in the expression, it indicates all the messages with a number
between 300 and 399.
5. Enter filter rules, and then click [OK].

l Adding a Filter to Favorites Tab
Follow the steps below to add a Filter to the Favorites tab.
1. In the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, open the [All Filters] tab in the Filters pane.
2. From the list of Filters, select a filter you want to add to the Favorites tab, right-clicking it and
a context menu will pop up.
3. From the context menu, select [Add Favorites].
The Filter will be added to the Favorites tab.
l Deleting a Filter
Even in the operation mode, you can still delete the filters you have created within the scope
permitted by Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
The filter deletion procedure is specified below.
1. In the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, open the [All Filters] tab or [Favorites] tab in the
Filters pane.
2. Bring the cursor to the filter you want to delete, right-clicking the mouse pops up the context
menu.
3. In the context menu, select [Delete Filter].
The filter is deleted.
l Cut Filter
A created filter can be cut. However, the operator who performs cutting a filter needs the same
user privilege of creating filters. Without the proper privilege, cutting filter cannot be performed.
Moreover, the following filters cannot be cut.
• The first filter (root filter) of a tree
• The dynamic filter
• The filters created under a different running mode
• Filters and the sub filters for load shedding
• Filters for Auto-Shelving
• The default filters
When cutting a filter, the sub-filter under the cut filter will be cut too.
The procedure of cutting a filter is as follows:
1. On CAMS for HIS Message Monitor, open All Filters tab in the Filter pane.
2. Choose the filter to be cut.
3. Choose [Edit] - [Cut] from the menu bar or right click the mouse and choose [Cut] from the
context menu.
The cut filter and its hierarchy will be dimly displayed until the cut filter is removed from the
clipboard.
The following operations will remove the cut filter from the clipboard.
• Paste the cut filter
• Cut or copy another filter before pasting the previous filter
• Press ESC key on keyboard before pasting the cut filter
• Delete the cut filter
• Close CAMS for HIS Message Monitor

l Copy Filter
A created filter can be copied. However, the operator who performs copying a filter needs the
same user privilege of creating filters. Without the proper privilege, copying filter cannot be
performed. Moreover, the following filters cannot be copied.
• The first filter (root filter) of a tree
• The dynamic filter
When copying a filter, the sub-filter under the copied filter will be copied too.
The procedure of copying a filter is as follows:
2. Choose the filter to be copied.
3. Choose [Edit] - [Copy] from the menu bar or right click the mouse and choose [Copy] from
the context menu.
The following operations will remove the copied filter from the clipboard.
• Cut or copy another filter before pasting the previous filter
• Delete the copied filter
• Close CAMS for HIS Message Monitor
l Paste Filter
A cut or copied filter can be pasted to a location different from its original filter or hierarchy but
cannot be pasted to a location under its original filter. Moreover, the operator who performs
pasting needs the same user privilege of creating filters. Without the proper privilege, pasting
cannot be performed.
When pasting a filter, the sub-filter under that filter will be pasted too.
The procedure of pasting a filter is as follows:
2. Choose the upper level filter of the location for pasting.
3. Choose [Edit] - [Paste] from the menu bar or right click the mouse and choose [Paste] from
the context menu.
The cut or copied filter will be pasted under the selected filter and the dimly displayed cut
filter will disappear.
If an identical filter exists in the designated location, the identical filter will not be overwritten,
instead, a new filter suffixed with -1 or -2 and the continuing numbers will be pasted.
When a filter is copied, if its properties are changed before pasting, the pasted filter will change
properties accordingly.

n Change Filter Properties

The properties of a newly created filter can be changed. However, if the filter contains sub-filters,
the sub-filters will be affected by the [Conditional expression] change.
Moreover, the following restrictions are applied for changing the filter properties.
• Changing [Filter Name], Filter Icon, [Description]
Only the authenticated operator (User) of the CAMS for HIS Configuration is allowed to
change the properties within the authorized scope.
• Changing [Conditional expression]
The filters created by an engineer with the system administrator privilege can only be
changed by an engineer with same administrator privilege.
The filters created by an operator can be changed by either an engineer or an operator with
the same user privilege.
• Change Filter of CurrentProduct[Batch ID]
The filters that use Batch ID as criterion cannot be modified.
The procedure of changing filter properties is as follows:

1. On CAMS for HIS Message Monitor, open [All Filters] tab in the Filter pane.
2. Right click the filter for changing properties to display the context menu.
3. Choose [Properties] from the context menu.
Then the Properties sheet of the filter will be displayed.
'MyStringFilter' properties
Filter Name MyStringFilter
Description My String Filter
Path /Process/MyStringFilter
Filter Type User Filter (created in operating mode)
Conditional expression True
and Timestamp = 8:00-20:00
Move filter OK Cancel
E120528E.ai
Figure Filter Properties Sheet
The permissions for changing the Filter Name, Filter Icon, Description and Conditional
expression vary with the operator’s privilege (user rights), only the permitted items can be
changed.
TIP
When choosing the first hierarchy (root filter) of a filter, the filter’s Properties sheet can be opened from the
context menu after a right clicking. In [Conditional expression] column, only one expression will be displayed and
this expression cannot be changed.

4. Enter the change for the attribute.
5. Click OK to commit the change.
If the change is correct, the dialog box will be closed and the filter will be applied with the
new attribute.
If the change is not correct, an error will be indicated in the Properties sheet by reversing the
erroneous script in the [Conditional expression] column. You need to modify the incorrect
script in this blank.
l [Conditional expression] Entries

The property of [Conditional expression] can be defined with the following 6 elements:
• Condition: True,False
Not case sensitive
• Attribute
Case sensitive
• Pattern or Rule
Case sensitive
• Comparator: =, <=, <, >=, >
• Logic Gate: NOT, AND, OR
The precedence of logic gates is in the order of NOT, AND, OR. AND is omissible.
• Parentheses: ( )
l [Conditional Expression] Syntax

The syntax of [Conditional Expression] includes the following 3 types:
• Text Conditional Expression: [Attribute=”Pattern or Rule”]
The Pattern or Rule should be a text string. If a comparator, a logic gate, a space or
parentheses character is used between the attribute and the Pattern or Rule, the Pattern or
Rule should be enclosed with a pair of double quotation marks (“”).
Another pair of double quotation marks can be used inside an expression with a pair of
double quotation marks. In this case, the expression like “”text”” can be scripted.
The expression can use some non alphanumeric characters like [*], [?]. Moreover, the
characters like [*] or [?] should be expressed as [\*] or [\?].
Example 1) TagName=TAG0001
Example 2) MessageNo=10**
Example 3) MessageNo=”10**”
• Time Conditional Expression: [Attribute=Hour:Minute to Hour:Minute]
The Pattern or Rule should be a pair of times. If the expression contains semicolon or
hyphen characters, the expression should be enclosed by a pair of double quotation marks.
Example 1) Timestamp=4:00-6:30
Example 2) Timestamp=”4:00 - 6:30”
• Numeric Conditional Expression: [Attribute Comparator “Pattern or Rule”]
“Pattern or Rule” must be a numeric value. It makes no difference whether the numeric
value is enclosed by double quotation marks or not.
Example 1) Message.Buzzer > 3
Example 2) Message.Buzzer > “3”

n Dynamic Filter and Filter Expressions

The filters in the Filter pane con be dragged and then dropped into the Dynamic Filter pane so as
to form a customized filter. Once a customized filter is created, the filter rule of this customized
filter will not be affected by the change of the filter expressions in the original filters.
n Default Filters
CAMS for HIS package provides the following default filters for linking with HIS. Do not modify or
delete the default filters.
• SIS: Displays all A&E messages sent from ProSafe-RS SCS (Safety Control Station)
• SIS\System: Displays system alarm messages sent from ProSafe-RS SCS
• SIS\Process: Displays process alarm messages sent from ProSafe-RS SCS
• System: Displays system alarm messages
• Process: Displays process alarm messages
• Operator Guide: Displays operation guide messages and dialog messages
TIP
Almost all the A&E messages sent from STARDOM through OPC will be displayed under the user names (Root
Hierarchies). There are only a few exceptions.
n Filters That Use Batch ID as Criterion

When calling the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS from the Product Control view, a filter will
be automatically created using Bacth ID as criterion. The filter name is fixed to CurrentProduct
[Batch ID]. This filter contains the following sub-filters:
• System
• Process
• Operator Guide
These sub-filters cannot be deleted or moved alone. Moreover, the CurrentProduct [Batch ID]
filter cannot be added toFavorites tab.
Once a CurrentProduct [Batch ID] filter is created, when using the Batch ID as a key to call
the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS from the Product Control view, a new filer same as the
existing CurrentProduct [Batch ID] filter may be created. Since the identical CurrentProduct
[Batch ID] filters cannot exist together, the newly created filter can be placed to a different location
to avoid overwriting the existing CurrentProduct [Batch ID] filter.
SEE
ALSO For more information about placing a filter to a different location, see the following descriptions in the section of “n
Create/Delete Filter”:
• “l Copy Filter”
• “l Paste Filter”

E12.5.7 Customizing A&E Browser Pane

To customize A&E Browser Pane, click the A&E Browser Pane tab in the Option window
and do the settings.
n A&E Browser Pane Tab in the Option Window

The figure below shows the A&E Browser Pane tab in the Option window.
Option
Background Pattern Standard Zebra Pattern Reset to System Default

Icon Blinking ON OFF
Space between the Lines 10
Filter Rules True Modify Reset
Displayed Columns Modify
Text Color 1 Text Color 2
Background Color 1 Background Color 2
Text Color 1 (Selected) Text Color 2 (Selected)
Background Color 1 (Selected) Background Color 2 (Selected)
Apply OK Cancel
E120514E.ai
Figure A&E Browser Pane Tab in the Option Window

n A&E Browser Pane Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
The setting items relating to the A&E Browser Pane are shown below.
Table Setting Items Relating to the A&E Browser Pane
Background Pattern Set the background pattern in the A&E Browser Pane.
Standard The A&E Browser pane is shown with a monotone background.
Zebra Pattern The A&E Browser pane is shown with a zebra-stripe background.
Icon Blinking Set whether or not to cause the icons at the beginning of A&E messages in the A&E Browser
Pane to blink.
ON The icons at the beginning of the A&E messages blink.
OFF The icons at the beginning of the A&E messages do not blink.
Font Set the font to be used in the A&E Browser pane. Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font
dialog box and set the font and font size you like.
Space between the Set the height of one line in the A&E Browser pane.
Lines
Filter Rules Specify the filter conditions to be applied to the messages shown in the A&E Browser pane.
Displayed Columns Set the alarm attributes you want to show in the A&E Browser pane and the order of attributes.
Set from the Select Columns dialog box.
Text Color 1 Set the text color of unselected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background pattern set
to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pattern], the text color of the two
zebra colors of unselected rows.
Background Color 1 Set the background color of unselected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background
pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pattern], the background
color of the two zebra colors of unselected rows.
Text Color 1 Set the text color of the selected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background pattern
(Selected) set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pattern], the text color of the two
zebra colors of selected rows.
Background Color 1 Set the background color of the selected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background
(Selected) pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pattern], the background
color of the two zebra colors of selected rows.
Text Color 2 Set the text color in the other background color than the ‘Background color 1’ of unselected
rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
Background Color 2 Set the other background color of the zebra ‘Background color 1’ of unselected rows in the
A&E Browser pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
Text Color 2 Set the text color in the other background color than the ‘Background color 1’ of the selected
(Selected) rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
Background Color 2 Set the other background color of the zebra ‘Background color 1’ of the selected rows in the
(Selected) A&E Browser pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
E120515E.ai

l Select Columns Dialog Box
From this dialog box, you can select attributes you want to show in the A&E Browser Pane, set
[Name] in the Pane, and set the order in which the attributes show.
The figure below shows the Select Columns dialog box.
Select Columns
Hide Show
Attribute Name Attribute
Timestamp.Server Date Timestamp
Message.Buzzer Message Message
MessageNo
TypeOfAlarm
Source
Source.Plant
YHIS.PjtID
TagName
DeviceID
AlarmPriority
User
Purpose
Consequence
Time-to-respond
Guidance
Alarm Group
OK Cancel
E120516E.ai
Figure Select Columns Dialog Box
From the [Hide] pane, select attributes you want to show in the A&E Browser Pane. Click the
right-arrow button. The selected attributes appear in the [Show] pane.
If attributes you do not want to show in the A&E Browser Pane are in the [Show] pane, select
them and Click the left-arrow button.
To change the order in which the attributes show, select an item in the [Show] pane and click the
up-arrow or down-arrow button. The title of the item is customizable so that it can be changed
after clicking the title of an item.

The default Alarm Attributes displayed on the Select Columns dialog box are as follows:
Table Alarm Attributes on Select Columns Dialog Box (1/2)
Data
Attribute Description Description Remarks
Type
Timestamp Message timestamp Time Example: 2008/03/23 10:00:05 (*1) Automatically
(Unit: Millisecond) attached to the A&E
message.
CAMS for HIS Message Time Example: 2008/03/23 10:00:09 (*1)
Timestamp.
Received timestamp
Server
(Unit: Millisecond)
Message Message Text String Example: FCS0101 LEFT Fail
(SW STOP Code= 0000 0000 0000 0000)
Message. Buzzer Number Value 0 (Representation: No buzzer)
Buzzer (1Byte) 1 (Representation: Reconfirmation)
2 (Representation: Operation error)
3 (Representation: Operator guide)
4 (Representation: Process alarm
(High-priority alarm))
(Medium-priority alarm))
(low-priority alarm))
7 (Representation: System alarm)
8 (Representation: Recover)
MessageNo CENTUM VP Message String Example: 11
Number
TypeOfAlarm Alarm Type String System (Representation: CENTUM VP
system alarm message)
Process (Representation: CENTUM VP
process alarm message)
Guidance (Representation: CENTUM VP
operation guide messages)
Asset (Device alarm sent from PRM)
Source Event Source String See the table of “Alarm Attributes –
[Source] on Select Columns Dialog Box.
Source.Plant Plant hierarchy of the source String Example: FCS0101n%DR0003S010101
where the event was initiated n: Space Character
(The hierarchies in the The OPC server computer name will be
CENTUM VP project only) displayed for the messages from the
OPC A&E server.
YHIS.PjtID Project ID String Example: P1
YHIS. Batch ID String Example: 01-0007
BatchBatchID
TagName CENTUM VP Tag Name String Tag Name:
(Process alarm message only) Tag Name column will be empty for the
When connected with A&E message that does not have tag
STARDOM, this is also the name.
converted SIOS device tag
name for accessing OPC
server.
DeviceID Device ID String According to PRM specifications. This will be affixed to
device alarm sent
from the PRM.
AlarmPriority Alarm Priority String Critical Defined on the
High Configurator of CAMS
Medium for HIS. If undefined,
Low it may revert to the
Logging (*2) original value of the
A&E message before
normalization.
E120522.ai
*1: The value in milliseconds can be found in Details pane.

*2: If the attribute of an alarm message is Logging, this message will not be displayed on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.

Table Alarm Attributes on Select Columns Dialog Box (2/2)
Data
Attribute Description Type Description Remarks
User HIS User Security String User name or user group name Defined on Configurator of
CAMS for HIS. If undefined,
Purpose Purpose of the A&E message String Safety
will be blank.
Environment
Financial
Consequence Predicted consequence in String Very Large
case the A&E message is Large
ignored Medium
Small
Time-to-respond Reaction for the alarm String Urgent
Quick
Routine
Guidance Cause and solution regarding String String Text
the A&E message File name(*1)
Check Device/Check Tag(*2)
Alarm Group Alarm group that the A&E String Alarm group name defined on Defined on the Configurator
message belongs to Configurator of CAMS for HIS of CAMS for HIS. If undefined,
it will not belong to any alarm
group.
E120523.ai
*1: In the case that Text File is specified for [Guidance] on the dialog box for defining styles
*2: The operation guide messages from PRM
For adding, changing or deleting the alarm attributes displayed on Select Columns dialog box,
you can do it on the Alarm List tab in the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Alarm List tab in the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, see the following:
“n Alarm List Settings” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”

Table Alarm Attributes - [Source] on Select Columns Dialog Box
Connected
System Alarm Type Display Display Sample
CENTUM VP Process alarm message Tag name affixed with alarm status after a dot FIC100.HI
System alarm message CENTUM VP message number 303
Operation guide Station name affixed with the operation guidance FCS0101Δ%OG0003
messages element number after a space character Δ : Space character
Device alarm message None –
PRM Process alarm message None –
System alarm message None –
Operation guide None –
messages
Device alarm message In case of device event message: Device tag name EJAS-02
In case of diagnostic message: Device tag name EJAS-02
In case of PAS event message: Event source such as FIC100A Process
FCS number or device tag, otherwise, PRM (PRM Tag PV=12.34 KNM3/H
server computer name). LO Still
STARDOM Process alarm message SIOS device tag affixed with alarm status after a dot FIC001.OOP
POU instance name affixed with alarm status after a Main.NPAS_PID_1.OOP
dot
Application alarm SIOS device tag affixed with alarm name after a dot FIC001.OOP
message,
POU instance name affixed with alarm status after a Main.NPAS_PID_1.OOP
event message
dot
System alarm message, FCN/FCJ IP address
event message
OPC A&E server error OPC A&E server computer name or FCN/FCJ IP
address
E120524.ai
n Context Menu of A&E Browser Pane

When right clicking on A&E Browser Pane, a context menu will appear. On the context menu, the
following task is available.
• [Style..]: Displays A&E Browser Pane tab of the Option window.

E12.5.8 Customizing A&E Messages Pane

To customize A&E Messages Pane in the Option window, click the A&E Messages Pane
tab in the Option window and do the settings.
n A&E Messages Pane Tab in the Option Window

The figure below shows the A&E Messages Pane tab in the Option window.
Option
Background Pattern Standard Zebra Pattern Reset to System Default

Icon Blinking ON OFF
Emphases on Unread Alarms ON OFF
Space between the Lines 10
Displayed Columns(Filter) Modify
Displayed Columns(Shelf) Modify
Text Color 1 Text Color 2
Background Color 1 Background Color 2
Text Color 1 (Selected) Text Color 2 (Selected)
Background Color 1 (Selected) Background Color 2 (Selected)
Apply OK Cancel
E120517E.ai
Figure A&E Messages Pane Tab in the Option Window

n A&E Messages Pane Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
The setting items relating to the A&E Messages Pane are shown below.
Table Setting Items Relating to the A&E Messages Pane

Background Pattern Set the background pattern in the A&E Messages Pane.
Standard The A&E Messages pane is shown with a monotone background.
Zebra Pattern The A&E Messages Pane is shown with a zebra-stripe background.
Icon Blinking Set whether or not to cause the icons at the beginning of A&E messages in the A&E Messages
Pane to blink.
ON The icons at the beginning of the A&E messages blink.
OFF The icons at the beginning of the A&E messages do not blink.
Emphases on Set whether or not to apply bold display when any unread A&E message is present.
Unread Alarms
ON The text is shown in bold if any unread A&E message is present.
OFF The text is not shown in bold even if any unread A&E message is present.
Font Set the font to be used in the A&E Messages pane. Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set
Font dialog box and set the font and the font size you like.
Space between the Set the height of one line in the A&E Messages pane.
Lines
Displayed Columns Set the alarm attributes to show and their order in the A&E Messages pane when you select a
(Filter) Filter. Set from the Select Columns dialog box.
Displayed Columns Set the alarm attributes to show and their order in the A&E Messages pane when you select a
(Shelf) Shelf. Set from the Select Columns dialog box.
Text Color 1 Set the text color of unselected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the background pattern
set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pattern], the text color of the two
zebra colors of unselected rows.
Background Color 1 Set the background color of unselected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the background
pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pattern], the background
color of the two zebra colors of unselected rows.
Text Color 1 Set the text color of the selected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the background pattern
(Selected) set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pattern], the text color of the two
zebra colors of selected rows.
Background Color 1 Set the background color of the selected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the background
(Selected) pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pattern], the background
color of the two zebra colors of selected rows.
Text Color 2 Set the text color in the other background color than the ‘Background color 1’ of unselected
rows in the A&E Messages pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
Background Color 2 Set the other background color of the zebra ‘Background color 1’ of unselected rows in the
A&E Messages pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
Text Color 2 Set the text color in the other background color than the ‘Background color 1’ of the selected
(Selected) rows in the A&E Messages pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
Background Color 2 Set the other background color of the zebra ‘Background color 1’ of the selected rows in the
(Selected) A&E Messages pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
E120518E.ai
l Select Columns Dialog Box

From this dialog box, you can select attributes you want to show in the A&E Messages Pane.
How to use the dialog box is the same as that of the A&E Browser Pane.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Select Columns dialog box, see the following:

n Context Menu of A&E Message pane

When right clicking on A&E Message pane, a context menu will appear. On the context menu, the
following task is available.
• [Style..]: Displays A&E Message pane tab of the Option window.
When right clicking a process alarm or event message in A&E Message pane, a context
menu will appear. There are three types of context menus vary with the type of selected A&E
messages.
l Context Menu Opened when a A&E Message of a Tagged Function Block or

Sequence Element is Selected
The A&E message of a tagged function block or sequence element means the message is a
CENTUM VP process alarm or annunciator message or a message from STARDOM system
initiated from a tagged function block or a sequence element. The context menu of this type is
shown as follows:
Style..
Faceplate
Tuning
Trend
Control
Graphic
E120529E.ai
Figure Context Menu Opened when an A&E Message of a Tagged Function Block or Sequence Element
is Selected
The tasks on the context menu that opened when an A&E message of a tagged function block or
sequence element is selected are shown as follows:
Table Tasks on Context Menu Opened when an A&E Message of a Tagged Function Block or Sequence
Element is Selected
Style.. Displays A&E Message Pane tab of the Option window.
Faceplate Opens the faceplate view of the selected alarm or message.
Tuning Opens the tuning view of the selected alarm or message.
Trend Opens the trend view of the selected alarm or message.
Control Opens the control window of the selected alarm or message.
Graphic Opens the graphic view of the selected alarm or message.
E120530E.ai

l Context Menu Opened when a A&E Message with a Device ID Attribute is
Selected
The A&E message with a Device ID attribute means the message is an alarm message from
PRM.
The tasks on the context menu that opened when an A&E message with a Device ID attribute is
selected are shown as follows:
• [DeviceViewer]: Starts Device Viewer of PRM.
l Context Menu Opened when Other Type of Message is Selected

The other type of message means a message not belong to the above two categories. Form an
example, a CENTUM VP system alarm message belong to Other Type of Messages.
The tasks on the context menu that opened when an Other Type of Message is selected are
shown as follows:
• [Help]: Displays Help dialog box.
SEE
ALSO For more information about context menu in graphic views, see the following:
E3.1.4, “Context Menus in Graphic View”

E12.5.9 Customizing Dynamic Filters Pane

To customize Dynamic Filters Pane, click the Dynamic Filters Pane tab in the Option
window and do the settings.
n Dynamic Filters Pane Tab in the Option Window

The figure below shows the Dynamic Filters Pane tab in the Option window.
Option
Reset to System Default

Set Filter Rules Button Image
OR Operator Button Image
NOT Operator Button Image
Color of Error
Animation Speed
Apply OK Cancel
E120519E.ai
Figure Dynamic Filters Pane Tab in the Option Window
n Dynamic Filters Pane Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for

HIS
The setting items relating to the Dynamic Filters Pane are shown below.
Table Setting Items Relating to the Dynamic Filters Pane
Set Filter Rules Button Image Specify the icon to be used for each filter operation.
OR Operator Button Image Clicking an Operator button opens the File dialog box where you can specify a
NOT Operator Button Image desired icon.
Color of Error Set the color shown if a calculation definition error occurs.
Animation Speed Set the speed at which the contents of Dynamic Filter pane are displayed.
E120520E.ai

E12.5.10 Print Tab in the Option Window

For print settings, do so from the Print tab in the Option window.
The figure below shows the Print tab in the Option window.
Option
Font Modify MS UI Gothic Reset to System Default
Line Margin (mm) 5
Row Margin (mm) 5
Page Settings Modify
Apply OK Cancel
E120521E.ai
Figure Print Tab in the Option Window
n Print Settings of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The setting items of Print are as follows:
Table Setting Items of Print
Font Selects font type and font size for printing the displayed screen image.
Choose [Modify] to open the font setting dialog box of Windows.
The font type and font size can be defined on this dialog box.
Line Margin Sets the line margin of displayed screen image for printing.
Row Margin Sets the row margin of displayed screen image for printing.
Page Settings Sets the print type for printing the displayed screen image.
Choose [Modify] to open the print setting dialog box of Windows.
The print settings need to defined accordingly on this dialog box.
E120525E.ai

<E12.6 Configurator of CAMS for HIS> E12-69
E12.6 Configurator of CAMS for HIS

Configurator of CAMS for HIS is used to design the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS or
A&E messages.
The design can be performed for the following systems:
• CENTUM VP
• CENTUM CS 1000 (*1)
• CENTUM CS 3000 (*1)
• CENTUM CS (*1)
• ProSafe-RS
• STARDOM
• PRM
*1: Applicable only when the project is connected as a lower level project with a CENTUM VP project.

n Settings Items in Configurator of CAMS for HIS

Configurator of CAMS for HIS generates settings data needed by CAMS for HIS to process A&E
messages.
Configurator of CAMS for HIS can be started simultaneously from all HISs within the Equalization
Scope. For a CENTUM VP control system configured with HIS-TSE, only one out of multiple HIS-
TSE clients can start the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
The window of the Configurator of CAMS for HIS is shown below.
CAMS for HIS : Configurator
File Edit Insert Tools
Alarm Detail Alarm List Alarm Group Message Monitor Shelves
- CENTUM Tag Name FIC100 Find Model PID Unit M3/H

- FCS0101
%DR0001S01010
%DR0002S01010 Tag Comment Tag Comment
OpeguideFCS010
+ FCS0102
+ FCS0103 Alarm Status HH Detection Alarm Priority User ONUSER
SystemAlarm
- OPC Purpose Safety Consequence Large Time-to-respond Urgent
Yokogawa. ExaopcAES
Yokogawa. ExaopcAEP
Guidance
Alarm Rule Assistant
Detection Enable Alarm Priority High Apply
Alarm Status Detection Alarm Priority User Purpose Consequence Time-to-respond

OOP Enable Critical ONUSER Safety Very Large Urgent
IOP Enable Critical ONUSER Safety Very Large Urgent
IOP- Enable Critical ONUSER Safety Very Large Urgent
HH Enable Critical ONUSER Safety Very Large Urgent
LL Enable High ONUSER Safety Large Urgent
HI Enable High ONUSER Safety Large Urgent
LO Enable High ONUSER Safety Large Urgent
DV+ Enable Medium ONUSER Safety Medium Quick
DV- Enable Medium ONUSER Safety Medium Quick
VEL+ Enable Medium ONUSER Safety Medium Quick
VEL- Enable Medium ONUSER Safety Medium Quick
MHI Enable Low ONUSER Safety Small Quick
MLO Enable Low ONUSER Safety Small Quick
CNF Enable Low ONUSER Safety Small Quick
Reset Reset All
E120601E.ai
Figure The Window of the Configurator of CAMS for HIS

E12.6.1 Starting and Exiting Configurator of CAMS for HIS

This section explains how to start and exit Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
n How to Start Configurator of CAMS for HIS

Select [Program]-[YOKOGAWA CENTUM]-[Configurator of CAMS for HIS] from [Start] menu to
start Configurator of CAMS for HIS. Only one Configurator of CAMS for HIS can be started on
each HIS.
l Configurator of CAMS for HIS Starting Actions

The data displayed right after the Configurator of CAMS for HIS starts are data in the latest saved
definition file. If the file is modified but not downloaded before ending the Configurator of CAMS
for HIS, the un-downloaded data will be displayed when the Configurator of CAMS for HIS starts
again. In order to display the downloaded, it is necessary to create a backup file when perform
downloading. Thus, restoring the backup of the downloaded file after restarting the Configurator
of CAMS for HIS, the above problem can be solved.
SEE
ALSO For more information about backup and restore the definition file, see the following:
“n Backup” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
n How to Exit Configurator of CAMS for HIS

The following two methods are available to exit Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
• Click [File] in the menu bar of Configurator of CAMS for HIS, and then select [Exit].
• Click the window close button [X] in the top right-hand corner of the Configurator of CAMS
for HIS.

E12.6.2 Engineering in Configurator of CAMS for HIS

Once CAMS for HIS has been enabled, all engineering tasks necessary to make the
program operable are performed in Configurator of CAMS for HIS. This section gives an
overview of the engineering procedure in Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
n Engineering Procedure
1. Logon Windows as the CENTUM VP user with the Administrative privilege (*1), open HIS
Utility and then enable CAMS for HIS on HIS Utility.
*1: A CENTUM VP user with the Administrative privilege means a user of the following groups.
. • CTM_MAINTENANCE
. • CTM_MAINTENANCE_LCL
SEE
ALSO For more information about settings in the HIS Utility, see the following:
TIP
Even if CAMS for HIS is not enabled in the HIS Utility, operations in CAMS for HIS can still be performed, except
for downloading of settings files.
2. Import CENTUM VP engineering data using Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For details on import, see the following:
“n Import” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
3. Create a settings file in Configurator of CAMS for HIS based on the imported engineering
data, and download the file.
A&E messages are now shown in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For details on download, see the following:
“n Download” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
4. Open the Alarm Detail tab or Alarm List tab in Configurator of CAMS for HIS, and define
information to be added to A&E messages. Once all necessary information has been
defined, download the settings file.
5. If necessary, set for each user whether to permit or inhibit customization of the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS. For users permitted to customize the window, also set the scope
of permitted customization operations. After all settings have been completed, download the
settings file.
TIP
Even if you have logged on to the HIS as the user not having customization permissions, you can still customize
the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS by starting the window in the configuration mode.
SEE
ALSO For more information about starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the configuration mode, see the
following:
HIS”

l Circumstances That Require Importing or Downloading Engineering Data
If the CENTUM VP engineering data are added or modified, the data need to be imported again.
If the CENTUM VP tags are added, modified or deleted, the alarm settings in related to these
tags need to be modified and then downloaded accordingly.
The circumstances that required importing, modifying and downloading the engineering data are
shown as follows:
• Under the circumstance that the following settings are added, modified or deleted on
CENTUM VP Security builder:
User Information (User name, User group, Privilege level), User Group Information (User
group name, Acknowledgment, Process Message Receiving, System Alarm Receiving,
Exclude Acknowledgment, Exclude Process Message, Exclude System Alarm)
• Under the circumstance that the plant hierarchy settings are added, modified or deleted on
the CENTUM VP Plant Hierarchy builder.
• Under the circumstance that the tag information such as the tag name, block model or tag
comment is added, modified or deleted on the CENTUM VP function block builder or control
drawing builder.
• Under the circumstance that annunciator information such as annunciator message or
annunciator tag name is added, modified or deleted on the CENTUM VP annunciator
builder.
• Under the circumstance that the taglists of ProSafe-RS SCSs (Safety Control Stations) are
generated on the CENTUM VP System View
SEE
ALSO For more information on modifying the alarm settings, see the following sections under the E12.6.4, “Setting
Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS.”
“n Alarm Details Settings”
“n Alarm List Settings”
TIP
When adding, modifying and deleting the information of the A&E messages obtained though OPC A&E server,
you may handle the messages differently depends on the connected devices.
When connected with STARDOM SIOS, if the engineering data are modified in STARDOM, the engineering need
to be imported or downloaded.
When connected with the PRM or something other than STARDOM SIOS, the alarm source needs to be modified
and downloaded on the Alarm List tab of Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Alarm List tab of Configurator of CAMS for HIS, see the following:
“n Alarm List Settings” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”

l Notices on Adding, Changing or Deleting User or User Group on Security
Builder
On security builder, when changing or deleting a user or a user group, the related alarm
definitions in Configurator of CAMS for HIS will not be automatically modified when
downloaded,the previously defined information will be remained so that the modification of these
alarm definitions needs to be manually performed. After modification, the modified contents need
to be downloaded.
The alarm definitions on the following tabs need to be modified.
• Alarm List Tab
• Alarm Group Tab
The detailed procedure for manually modifying each tab will be explained below:
• Procedure to Modify on Alarm List Tab

1. Choose [Find] from [Edit] menu so as to display the Find dialog box.
2. In the entry field, enter [*<User Name or User Group Name>Δ*] (Δ stands for a space). The
wildcards before and after the user name or the user group name and a space character
can find the match of the user
Find
The following strings OR including
*USER1 * Search next

Find a Line
Close
Case sensitivity
E120628E.ai
Figure Find Dialog Box (An Example to Delete User1)
3. Point the text string in the entry field on Find dialog box, and then right click the mouse,
choose [Copy] from the context menu to copy the text string.
4. Choose [Replace] from [Edit] menu so as to display the Replace dialog box.
5. Put the mouse point in the entry field of [Search string] and then right click the mouse.
Choose [Paste] from the context menu to paste the copied text string.
6. Enter a new text string to be used to replace the old text string in which the obsolete user
name or user group name is eliminated in the field of [String after replacement] field.
Replace
Serch string: OFFUSER ONUSER ENGUSER USER1 USER2
String after replacement OFFUSER ONUSER ENGUSER USER2
Case sensitivity
Search next Replace Replace all Close
E120629E.ai
Figure Replace Dialog Box (An Example to Delete User1)

7. Click [Replace] or [Replace All] button on the Replace dialog box.
8. The obsolete user name or user group name can be completely removed after repeating the
above procedure.
• Procedure to Modify on Alarm Group Tab
The obsolete user or user group also needs to be deleted from the Alarm Group tab. Since
Alarm Group tab does not support Find and Replace commands, deleting the obsolete
user or user group needs to be performed directly. Nevertheless, choosing [Export] from
[File] menu can export the contents into a file, and then use a text editor to eliminate the
unneeded user or user group and then choose [Import] - [Database of CENTUM VP] from
[File] menu to put back the edited contents.
If the definitions are not modified, the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS may be affected as
follows:
• The user rights defined in accordance with the obsolete user name will become invalid,
• The operating permission cannot be granted to the user defined with obsolete security
settings.
Moreover, when adding the security settings for a user that has an identical name with a deleted
user again, the remained related alarm definitions in Configurator of CAMS for HIS of the deleted
user will be survived.

E12.6.3 Security Settings of CAMS for HIS

The security settings of CAMS for HIS will be explained below.
n CENTUM VP Security Builder and HIS Constants Builder

On CENTUM VP Security Builder, the user privileges can be defined. On CENTUM VP HIS
Constants Builder, the operation and monitoring range for the HIS can be defined. And, the
security settings on both builders can be utilized by CAMS for HIS. After running CENTUM VP
Import on CAMS for HIS, the operation and monitoring privilege on the Message Monitor of
CAMS for the HIS is restricted by both the security settings on Security Builder and HIS Constant
Builder.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the security settings, see the followings in the section of “n Setting Operation and
Monitoring Range” in F3.2, “User Group”
“l Inclusive Definition”
“l Exclusive Definition”
n Changing Privilege Defined on CENTUM VP Security Builder and HIS

Constants Builder
On Configurator of CAMS for HIS, the operation and monitoring privilege defined CENTUM VP
Security Builder and HIS Constants Builder can be changed, however, the privilege can only
be changed in the direction to tighten the operation and monitoring security. The operations
restricted by the security settings of Security Builder and HIS Constant Builder cannot be
released on Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about restrictions on operation and monitoring, see the following sections in E12.6.4,
“Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
“n Alarm Group Settings”

n Items Unavailable on CENTUM VP Security Builder and HIS Constant

Builder
The security settings for the items unavailable on CENTUM VP Security Builder and HIS
Constant Builder are handled by CAMS for HIS as follows.
l Permission for Manually Resetting

By default, all the users are denied for manually resetting the process alarm signals. For
manually resetting the signals other than process alarms, by default, all the users except the user
with S1 privilege set on Security Builder are permitted for manually resetting.
On Configurator of CAMS for HIS, the privileges for manually resetting the alarm signals can be
defined by specifying what user or user group is permitted or denied for what kind of alarms.
SEE
ALSO For more information about manual reset privileges, see the following sections in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in
Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
“n Alarm Group Settings”
l Permission for Suppressing Alarm Group

This setting will permit or deny a user or user group for suppressing alarms. The permitted user
or a user in the permitted user group can start alarm suppression.
By default, all the users are denied for suppressing alarms, while, all the users are permitted to
release the suppression regardless of denied permission being applied.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the privilege for setting the alarm group sub-conditions, see the following:
“n Alarm Group Settings” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
n Preferences of Operation and Monitoring Permissions and Denials

On CAMS for HIS, if both the permission and denial of operating and monitoring are valid
simultaneously, the denial has high precedence.Therefore, it is necessary to be cautionary when
setting the operation and monitoring restrictions respectively for the Alarm List tab or Alarm
Group tab of CAMS for HIS Configurator, or on the CENTUM VP Security builder.
Generally, all users are granted with the operation and monitoring permissions. However, some
users may be denied for operating or monitoring on a certain items.

E12.6.4 Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS

This section explains the details of items that can be set in Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
n Alarm Details Settings

You can add attributes to A&E messages in two tabs of Configurator of CAMS for HIS: the Alarm
Detail tab and Alarm List tab. In the Alarm Detail tab, you can specify attributes to a specific A&E
message by selecting the message using the associated tag. In the Alarm List tab, you can add
attributes to a list of A&E messages. In either tab, a support function is provided to show the
recommended settings information, so that appropriate information can be set for A&E messages
in accordance with their importance. The following explains how attributes are added in the Alarm
Detail tab.
The attributes that can be added to A&E messages are listed below.
• Detection
• Alarm Priority
• User
• Purpose
• Consequence
• Time-to-respond
• Guidance

The Alarm Detail tab is shown below.
- CENTUM Tag Name FIC100 Find Model PID Unit M3/H

- FCS0101
%DR0001S01010
%DR0002S01010 Tag Comment Tag Comment
OpeguideFCS010
+ FCS0102
+ FCS0103 Alarm Status HH Detection Alarm Priority User ONUSER
SystemAlarm
- OPC Purpose Safety Consequence Large Time-to-respond Urgent
Yokogawa. ExaopcAES
Yokogawa. ExaopcAEP
Guidance
Detection Enable Alarm Priority High Apply
Alarm Status Detection Alarm Priority User Purpose Consequence Time-to-respond

OOP Enable Critical ONUSER Safety Very Large Urgent
IOP Enable Critical ONUSER Safety Very Large Urgent
IOP- Enable Critical ONUSER Safety Very Large Urgent
HH Enable Critical ONUSER Safety Very Large Urgent
LL Enable High ONUSER Safety Large Urgent
HI Enable High ONUSER Safety Large Urgent
LO Enable High ONUSER Safety Large Urgent
DV+ Enable Medium ONUSER Safety Medium Quick
DV- Enable Medium ONUSER Safety Medium Quick
VEL+ Enable Medium ONUSER Safety Medium Quick
VEL- Enable Medium ONUSER Safety Medium Quick
MHI Enable Low ONUSER Safety Small Quick
MLO Enable Low ONUSER Safety Small Quick
CNF Enable Low ONUSER Safety Small Quick
Reset Reset All
E120627E.ai
Figure Alarm Detail Tab in Configurator of CAMS for HIS
This table shows the settings for each alarm status of the selected tag. Not all items shown in
the Alarm List tab are shown, but only the items that can be set in this tab are shown instead.
This table cannot be edited directly. When an alarm status in the table is selected, each value
corresponding to the alarm status will be shown in the applicable field described above.
If you click [Apply], the recommended values shown in the [Detection] field or the [Alarm Priority]
field in the Alarm Rule Assistant area will be applied.
l Calling the Detail Builder

Click [Tools] in the menu bar and then select [Start Function Block Detail Builder] to call the
Function Block Detail Builder for the applicable tag.
l Printing
Click [File] in the menu bar and then select [Print] to print the displayed content.

The items that can be set in the Alarm Detail tab are shown below. This tab is blank when it is first
opened (default).
Table Items Settable in the Alarm Detail Tab
Tree View Pane The plant hierarchy settings are displayed as a tree that can be expanded to show desired tags.
Tag Name Any tag name in the plant hierarchy selected in Tree View pane can be selected.
Find The Find dialog box appears where you can find a desired tag name. It will look for the tag name
under the plant hierarchy selected on the Tree View pane.
Model The instrument model corresponding to the selected tag is shown. (This field cannot be edited.)
Unit The engineering unit corresponding to the selected tag is shown. (This field cannot be edited.)
Tag Comment The tag comment assigned to the selected tag is shown. (This field cannot be edited.)
Alarm Status Any alarm status pertaining to the tag is shown. (This field cannot be edited.)
Detection Select whether to disable or enable detection for each alarm status. If “Disable” is selected for
the alarm, that alarm will be suppressed.
If the Alarm Rule Assistant function is used, you need not manually set this item.
Alarm Priority Select [Critical], [High], [Medium] , [Low] or [Logging] as the priority of each alarm status.
The priority assigned to each message before the normalization will be overwritten by this
specified priority. Generally, the priorities of the recovery messages are set to Low.
The messages that have Logging priority status will not be displayed on the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS.
User Select the target users or user groups from the table for each alarm status.
Purpose Select the purpose of alarm for each alarm status, from the following options:
• Safety: Alarm to alert the operator to potential safety hazards
• Environment: Alarm to alert the operator to potential negative impact on the environment
• Financial: Alarm to alert the operator to potential economic losses
Consequence Choose the severity of negative impact that may result if an alarm in that group is ignored for the
purpose of alarm was selected under [Purpose].
• Very Large: High risk of hazard or loss
• Large: Risk of hazard or loss
• Medium: No negative impact may result even if the alarm is ignored, depending on the situation.
• Small: Little negative impact will result even if the alarm is ignored
Time-to-respond Select the allowable timeframe during which an action must be taken, from the following options:
• Urgent
• Quick
• Routine
Guidance Describe the causes and actions for each alarm. You can also provide a separate file
describing the causes and actions and specify that file.
Alarm Rule The recommended settings are shown under [Detection] and [Alarm Priority] below.
Assistant The recommended values will be updated if any associated item ([Purpose],
[Consequence], etc.) is changed.
Detection The recommended alarm disable/enable setting is shown.
If a priority has been assigned, “Disable” is automatically selected.
Alarm Priority The recommended priority based on [Purpose] and [Consequence] is shown.
The recommended values are defined in the Alarm Rule Assistant table. To call the Alarm Rule
Assistant table, click [Tools] in the menu bar, point to [Alarm Rule Assistant], and then select [View].
E120602E.ai
SEE
ALSO For more information about assigning file for guidance, see the following:
“n Style Settings”

n Alarm List Settings

This is one of the two tabs provided to add attributes to A&E messages. Attributes can be added
by displaying a list of alarms and modifying or entering attributes in the respective fields. The
attributes defined here will be displayed on the dialog box for creating filters and on the Select
Columns dialog box. The following explains the settings in the Alarm List tab.
SEE
ALSO • For more information about the dialog box for creating filters, see the following:
“l Creating a Filter” in “n Create/Delete Filter” in E12.5.6, “Customizing Filters Pane”
• For more information about the Select Columns dialog box, see the following:
The Alarm List tab is shown below.

- CENTUM Source Model Unit Tag Comment Detection Alarm Priority

- FCS0101 FIC100.OOP PID M3/H
%DR0001S01010 FIC100.IOP PID M3/H
%DR0002S01010 FIC100.IOP- PID M3/H
OpeguideFCS010 FIC100.HH PID M3/H
+ FCS0102 FIC100.LL PID M3/H
+ FCS0103 FIC100.HI PID M3/H
SystemAlarm FIC100.LO PID M3/H
- OPC FIC100.DV+ PID M3/H
Yokogawa. ExaopcAES FIC100.DV- PID M3/H
Yokogawa. ExaopcAEP FIC100.VEL+ PID M3/H
FIC100.VEL- PID M3/H
FIC100.MHI PID M3/H
FIC100.MLO PID M3/H
FIC100.CNF PID M3/H
FIC200.OOP PID M3/H
FIC200.IOP PID M3/H
FIC200.IOP- PID M3/H
FIC200.HH PID M3/H
FIC200.LL PID M3/H
FIC200.HI PID M3/H
FIC200.LO PID M3/H
FIC200.DV+ PID M3/H
FIC200.DV- PID M3/H
FIC200.VEL+ PID M3/H
FIC200.VEL- PID M3/H
FIC200.MHI PID M3/H
FIC200.MLO PID M3/H
FIC200.CNF PID M3/H
FIC300.OOP PID M3/H
FIC300.IOP PID M3/H
FIC300.IOP- PID M3/H
FIC300.HH PID M3/H
E120603E.ai
Figure Alarm List Tab in Configurator of CAMS for HIS
Operation guide messages do not belong to the plant hierarchy, but they can be shown by
selecting FCS equipment names. System alarms can be displayed by selecting [System Alarm].
A&E messages received via an OPC server can be expanded into target source names based
on the program ID of the OPC server.

l Editing the Alarm List Tab
The items that can be edited in the Alarm List tab are listed below.
• Move, show/hide, add, delete, copy and paste columns
• Add, delete, copy and paste rows
• Find, replace
• Undo, redo
To move, show or hide columns, click [Tools] in the menu bar and then select [Edit Columns]
to display the Edit Columns dialog box. In Delete operation, user is allowed to delete only the
columns of attributes added by user.
Up to three search conditions can be specified at a time.
l Adding Attributes
The characters that can be used in the names of attributes to be added include uppercase and
lowercase alphabets, period (.) and numbers. The first character must be an alphabet.
PairKey attribute(*1) cannot be added, changed or modified.
*1: PairKey attribute is for displaying a combined text in accordance with alarm occurrence and recovery. By default, this text is not
displayed.
l Adding OPC Alarm Settings

Click [File] in the menu bar, point to [New] to open the dialog box. Enter the applicable information
in the [Program ID] fields to specify the OPC server, and click [OK].
Clicking [Cancel] closes the dialog box without adding the information of OPC server.
l Showing Differences
Click [Tools] in the menu bar and then select [Show Differences] to display the difference
information from the CENTUM VP engineering data in the Alarm List tab. Specifically, lines
containing tag names that exist only in the database of CAMS for HIS are shown. Delete or
modify the displayed lines.
l Calling the Detail Builder

How to use this Builder is the same as that of the Alarm Detail tab.
SEE
ALSO For details, see the following:
“l Calling the Detail Builder” in the “n Alarm Details Settings”
l Printing
How to use this Builder is the same as that of the Alarm Detail tab.
SEE
ALSO For details, see the following:
“l Printing” in the “n Alarm Details Settings”

The items that can be set in the Alarm List tab are shown below.
Table Items Settable in the Alarm List Tab (1/2)
Tree View Pane The plant hierarchy settings are displayed as a tree that can be expanded to show desired tags.
Source The following items are shown in accordance with the alarm type;
• CENTUM process alarm and annunciator: Tag name affixed with alarm status after a dot
• CENTUM operator guide: Station name affixed with the operation guidance element number
after a space character
• CENTUM system alarm: CENTUM VP message number
• OPC alarm: Source of OPC alarm attribute
Model The instrument model corresponding to the selected tag is shown. (This field cannot be edited.)
Unit The engineering unit corresponding to the selected tag is shown. (This field cannot be edited.)
Tag Comment The tag comment assigned to the selected tag is shown. (This field cannot be edited.)
Detection Select whether to disable or enable detection for each alarm status. If “Disable” is selected
for the alarm, that alarm will be suppressed.
If the Alarm Rule Assistant function is used, select a desired alarm, click [Tools] in the
menu bar, point to [Alarm Rule Assistant], and then select [Apply].
Alarm Priority Select [Critical], [High], [Medium] , [Low] or [Logging] as the priority of each alarm status.
The priority assigned to each message before the normalization will be overwritten by this
specified priority. Generally, the priorities of the recovery messages are set to Low.
The messages that have Logging priority status will not be displayed on the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS.
If the Alarm Rule Assistant function is used, select a desired alarm, click [Tools] in the
menu bar, point to [Alarm Rule Assistant], and then select [Apply].
User Select the target users or user groups from the table for each alarm status.
Purpose Select the purpose of alarm for each alarm status, from the following options:
• Safety: Alarm to alert the operator to potential safety hazards
• Environment: Alarm to alert the operator to potential negative impact on the environment
• Financial: Alarm to alert the operator to potential economic losses
Consequence Choose the severity of negative impact that may result if an alarm in that group is ignored
for the purpose of alarm was selected under [Purpose].
• Very Large: High risk of hazard or loss
• Large: Risk of hazard or loss
• Medium: No negative impact may result even if the alarm is ignored, depending on the situation.
• Small: Little negative impact will result even if the alarm is ignored
Time-to-respond Select the allowable timeframe during which an action must be taken, from the following options:
• Urgent
• Quick
• Routine
Guidance Describe the causes and actions for each alarm. You can also provide a separate file
describing the causes and actions and specify that file.
E120604.ai
SEE
ALSO • For more information about displaying the attributes of [Source], see the following:
• For more information about assigning file for guidance, see the following:
“n Style Settings”

Table Items Settable in the Alarm List Tab (2/2)
Auto Clear Select [Enable] or [Disable] to specify whether or not to automatically clear
acknowledged alarms if an alarm reset message is received for those messages.
Monitoring Permitted User (*1) Specify for each alarm the user or user group given a permission or denied to
perform each operation. Any of the users or user groups defined
Monitoring Permitted User
in the CENTUM VP Security Builder can be specified. When specifying
Group (*1)
multiple users or user groups, separate them using a space character.
Monitoring Denied User You can also call a dialog box to select a desired user(s) or user group(s).
Monitoring Denied User Group
Acknowledgement Permitted
User (*1)
User Group (*1)
Acknowledgement Denied User

Group
Manual Reset Permitted User
Group
Manual Reset Denied User
Manual Reset Denied User Group
Alarm Sub-State Change
Permitted User (*1)
Permitted User Group (*1)
Alarm Sub-State Change Denied
User (*1)
User Group (*1)
Alarm Group Select an alarm group name from those defined in the Alarm Group tab of CAMS
for HIS configurator.
E120605E.ai
*1 This column is not displayed by default. However, any change performed on this column will not take effect.
IMPORTANT
The default settings for the following eight items should be used. The default settings should not
be changed.
• Monitoring Permitted User
• Monitoring Permitted User Group
• Acknowledgement Permitted User
• Acknowledgement Permitted User Group
• Alarm Sub-State Change Permitted User
• Alarm Sub-State Change Permitted User Group
• Alarm Sub-State Change Denied User
• Alarm Sub-State Change Denied User Group

n Alarm Group Settings

You can define alarm groups. By setting the alarm group names defined here for respective A&E
messages in the Alarm List tab, the A&E messages for which the same group name is set will be
grouped together. The alarm group name can be used for setting search conditions and can also
be used for setting A&E message suppressions.
The Alarm Group tab is shown below.
Alarm Group Apply to All Monitoring Denied Monitoring Denied Acknowledgement Acknowledgement
Name User User Group Denied User Denied User Group
group_1 Enable ENGUSER ONUSER
group_2 Disable OFFUSER ONUSER
group_3 Enable TESTUSER ONUSER
group_5 Disable ENGUSER ONUSER
group_6 Enable ONUSER ONUSER
group_7 Enable TESTUSER ONUSER
group_8 Disable ENGUSER ONUSER
group_9 Enable ENGUSER ... ONUSER
E120606E.ai
Figure Alarm Group Tab in Configurator of CAMS for HIS

The items that can be set in the Alarm Group tab are shown below.
Table Items Settable in the Alarm Group Tab
Alarm Group Name Specify an alarm group name.
Apply to All Select [Enable] or [Disable] to specify whether to apply each operation to all alarms.
• Enable: If an alarm is acknowledged or manually reset, all alarms in the same
alarm group will be acknowledged or manually reset.
• Disable: The above processing is not performed.
Represented by First Alarm (*1) In an alarm group, if the alarms within a user's operation and monitoring scope
should be represented by the first occurred alarm can be defined by selecting
[Enable] or [Disable].
Monitoring Permitted User (*1) Specify for each alarm the user or user group given a permission to perform each
operation. Any of the users or user groups defined in the CENTUM VP Security
Monitoring Permitted User
Builder can be specified. When specifying multiple users or user groups,
Group (*1)
separate them using a space character.
Monitoring Denied User
Monitoring Denied User Group
User (*1)
User Group (*1)
Group
Group
Manual Reset Denied User
Manual Reset Denied User Group
Permitted User (*1)
Permitted User Group (*1)
User (*1)
User Group (*1)
Alarm Group Sub-State
Change Permitted User
Alarm Group Sub-State
Change Permitted User Group
Alarm Group Sub-State Change
Denied User
Alarm Group Sub-State Change
Denied User Group
E120607E.ai
*1: This column is not displayed by default. However, any change performed on this column will not take effect.

IMPORTANT
The default settings for the following nine items should be used. The default settings should not
be changed.
• Represented by First Alarm
• Monitoring Permitted User
• Monitoring Permitted User Group
• Acknowledgement Permitted User
• Acknowledgement Permitted User Group
• Alarm Sub-State Change Permitted User
• Alarm Sub-State Change Permitted User Group
• Alarm Sub-State Change Denied User
• Alarm Sub-State Change Denied User Group
SEE
ALSO For more information about the alarm group sub-conditions, see the following:
“l Permission for Suppressing Alarm Group” in “n Items Unavailable on CENTUM VP Security Builder
and HIS Constant Builder” in E12.6.3, “Security Settings of CAMS for HIS”
l Notice on Adding, Changing and Deleting Alarm Group

When changing or deleting an alarm group name, the alarm group name used in the arguments
of Attribute or Suppression commands for filtering as well as in other related references will not be
automatically changed or deleted. The alarm group names before changing and deleting remain in
those settings. They need to be manually edited, and then the edited items need to be downloaded.
The deleted or changed alarm group names may remain in the following items.
• [Alarm Group] item on Alarm List tab
• Filtering expressions
• Suppress or unsuppress commands
The detailed procedure for manually editing each item will be explained below:
• Modify Alarm Group on Alarm List Tab
On Alarm List tab, the text of [Alarm Group] item can be changed together by Replace
command. Replace command will find the corresponding text and replace it with a new one
after confirmation.

1. On menu bar, choose [Edit] - [Replace].
Replace dialog box will be displayed.
Replace
Serch string:
String after replacement
Case sensitivity
Search next Replace Replace all Close
E120630E.ai
Figure Replace Dialog Box
2. Enter as follows:
Find what: Enter the existing group name to be changed
Replace with: Enter the new group name to replace the existing one. Leaving this item
empty can delete the existing group name by running Replace.
3. Click [Replace] or [Replace All] button on the Replace dialog box.
• Modify filtering expressions

If change setting items relating to filter attributes modifies the filtering expressions.
SEE
ALSO For more information about modifying filter attributes, see the following:
“n Change Filter Properties” in E12.5.6, “Customizing Filters Pane”
• Modify Suppress Command and Unsuppress Command

The related command arguments defined for HIS graphic window touch targets,
pushbuttons,softkeys and other objects need to be modified.
SEE
ALSO For more information about suppress and unsupress commands assigned to the graphic objects, see the
following sections in “n Suppression in CAMS for HIS” in E12.3.5, “Suppression.”
• “l Enable Alarm Suppression”
• “l Disable Alarm Suppression”
If the commands regarding to this group name is not modified, the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS may be affected as follows:
• Filtering, Grouping
When Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is closed and redisplayed, the processing for the
alarm group with the obsolete group name will continue.
• Suppression
After successfully downloading the definition files, the alarm group information will disable
the suppressions. If the suppressed A&E messages exist, these messages will be displayed
on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
Moreover, the objects assigned with the obsolete alarm group information may not be
properly functioning.
When adding an alarm group, if the new alarm group name is identical with a previously delete alarm
group, and if the previous group name is not yet deleted from the filter condition attributes or suppress
command arguments, these commands regarding to this obsolete group name will be survived.

n Message Monitor Settings

You can set a different structure of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS for each HIS user.
The Message Monitor tab is shown below.
User Name User Group Window Menu Bar Toolbar Shelves Pane
Change Layout Change Color Show Change
ENGUSER DEFGRP Allow Allow Allow
OFFUSER DEFGRP Hide Always Hide Always Hide Always
TESTUSER DEFGRP Allow Allow Allow
ONUSER DEFGRP Allow Allow Hide Always Hide Always Hide Always Allow
status 2008/03/23 1653
E120608E.ai
Figure Message Monitor Tab in Configurator of CAMS for HIS

The details of items set in this window are the same as the setting items in the Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS. The default setting for each item is shown below.
Table Default Settings for Items Set in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (1/4)
Default
Setting Item Description Settings
User Name The user name defined in the CENTUM VP Security Builder is
shown. (This field cannot be edited.)
User Group The user group defined in the CENTUM VP Security Builder is
shown. (This field cannot be edited.)
Window
Change Layout Set whether to permit changing the layout of the Message Deny
Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Color Set whether to permit changing the text color or background Deny
color of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Select [Allow]
or [Deny].
Menu Bar
Show Menu items are not customizable. Show

Always
Toolbar
Show Set whether to show the toolbar in the Message Monitor of Show
CAMS for HIS. Select [Show Always] or [Hide Always]. Although Always
the toolbar is shown, the user cannot select the menu items for
which he/she has no operation permissions.
Shelves Pane
Show Set whether to show the Shelves pane. Select [Show Always], Show
[Switch Show/Hide] or [Hide Always]. Always
Change Blinking Set whether to permit changing the ON/OFF setting for icon Deny
blinking. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Displayed Set whether to permit changing the number of alarms display. Deny
Number of Alarms Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Unread Set whether to permit changing the bold display to be applied Deny
Alarm Style when an unread message is present. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Font Set whether to permit changing the font. Select [Allow] or [Deny]. Deny
Change Color Set whether to permit changing the button color or button text Deny
color. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
E120609E.ai

Default
Settings
Filter Pane
Show Set whether to show the Filters pane. Select [Show Always], Show
[Switch Show/Hide] or [Hide Always]. Always
Create Filter Set whether to permit adding the filters. Select [Allow] or [Deny]. Deny
blinking. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Displayed Set whether to permit changing the number of alarms display. Deny
Number of Alarms Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Message Style when an unread message is present. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Font on All Set whether to permit changing the font in the All Filters tab. Deny
Filters Tab Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Font on Set whether to permit changing the font in the Favorites tab. Deny
Favorites Tab Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Height of Set whether to permit changing the height of button on Favorites Deny
Button on Favorites tab. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Tab
Change Color on Set whether to permit changing the text color or background Deny
Favorites Tab color on Favorites tab. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Filter Name Set whether to permit changing the Filter name. Select [Allow] Deny
or [Deny].
Change Filter Icon Set whether to permit changing the Filter icon. Select [Allow] Deny
or [Deny].
Change Description Set whether to permit changing the description of Filters. Deny
Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Use Load Shedding Set whether to use the Load Shedding function. Select [Allow] Deny
or [Deny].
E120610E.ai

Default
Settings
A&E Browser Pane
Show Set whether to show the A&E Browser pane. Select [Show Show
Always], [Switch Show/Hide] or [Hide Always]. Always
Change Background Set whether to permit changing the Background Pattern in the Deny
Pattern A&E Browser pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
color in the A&E Browser pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
blinking at the beginning of A&E messages. Select [Allow] or
[Deny].
Change Font Set whether to permit changing the font in the A&E Browser pane. Deny
Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Line Spacing Set whether to permit changing the height of one line in the A&E Deny
Browser pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Column Set whether to permit changing the details or order of columns in Deny
the A&E Browser pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Column Set whether to permit changing the width of columns in the A&E Deny
Width Browser pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Display Position of Set the position to display a new alarm in the A&E Browser pane. Top
New Alarm Select [Top] or [Bottom].
A&E Messages Pane
Change Background Set whether to permit changing the Background Pattern in the Deny
Pattern A&E Messages pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
color in the A&E Messages pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
blinking at the beginning of A&E messages. Select [Allow] or
[Deny].
Change Font Set whether to permit changing the font in the A&E Messages Deny
pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Line Spacing Set whether to permit changing the height of one line in the A&E Deny
Messages pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
E120611E.ai

Default
Settings
A&E Messages Pane
Message Style when an unread message is present. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Column Set whether to permit changing the details or order of columns in Deny
the A&E Messages pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Change Column Width Set whether to permit changing the width of columns in the A&E Deny
Messages pane. Select [Allow] or [Deny].
Display Position of Set the position to display a new alarm in the A&E Messages Top
New Alarm pane. Select [Top] or [Bottom].
Details Pane
Show Set whether to show the Details pane. Select [Show Always], Switch
[Switch Show/Hide] or [Hide Always]. Show/Hide
Dynamic Filter Pane
Show Set whether to permit using the Dynamic Filter pane. Show
Select [Show] or [Hide Always].
Status Bar
Show Set whether to show the Status bar. Select [Show Always] or Show
[Hide Always]. Always
E120612E.ai

n Shelves Settings
Shelving information is defined in this tab.
The Shelves tab is shown below.
Extent of Shelving System User
ShelfName Description Icon Shelving Type Type of Shelving ... Shelving Duration (H... Shelving
Shelf1 Description1 C:\CENTUMVP\CA... Continuous Duration 10 0
Shelf2 Description2 C:\CENTUMVP\CA... Continuous Specify Time 3 0
Shelf10 Description10 C:\CENTUMVP\CA... Auto Duration 9 0
E120613E.ai
Figure Shelves Tab in Configurator of CAMS for HIS
Select [System] or [User] as the extent of shelving.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the extent of shelving, see the following:
“n Extent of Shelving” in E12.3.1, “Shelving”

Next, define each shelf. Up to 16 shelves can be set in the Shelves tab. But in Auto-Shelving,
only one shelf can be set.
The items that can be set in the Shelves tab are shown below.
Table Items Settable in the Shelves Tab
Extent of Shelving Select [System] or [User] as the extent of shelving. The default setting is [System].
Shelf Name Set a shelf name.
Description Enter a description of the shelf.
Icon Specify the path to the file you want to use as the icon for the shelf.
You can select a desired icon file in the File dialog box.
Shelving Type Select the type of shelving from [Continuous], [One-Shot] and [Auto]. [Auto] can be
specified for only one shelf.
Type of Shelving Duration Select the type of shelving duration from [Duration] or [Specify Time].
Shelving Duration (Hours) / Set the shelving duration in hours using an integer between 0 and 23.
Specify Time (Hour)
Shelving Duration (Minutes) / Set the shelving time in minutes using an integer between 0 and 59.
Specify Time (Minute)
Shelving Permitted User Set the operators who are allowed to use this Shelf.
If [System] is selected under [Extent of Shelving], select in the dialog box the user
permitted to perform shelving operation. Any of the users defined in the CENTUM VP
Security Builder can be selected. You can select multiple users.
This item cannot be specified if [User] is selected under [Extent of Shelving].
Any operator can unshelve.
E120614E.ai

n Import
You can import CENTUM VP engineering data. Tag information, plant hierarchy information and
user information in CENTUM VP can be imported into CAMS for HIS.
l Importing Data
Click [File] in the menu bar, point to [Import], and then select [Database of CENTUM VP]. The
following dialog box appears.
Import
CENTUM VP database will be imported. The current data will be overwritten.
Import Cancel
E120617E.ai
Figure Dialog Box Displayed at Start of Import
Clicking [Import] starts importing data, and opens the dialog box showing the progress of import.
Clicking [Cancel] in this dialog box cancels the import.
After the import has completed, the dialog box indicating the completion of import opens. Clicking
[OK] in this dialog box closes the dialog box.
Clicking [Cancel] closes the dialog box without importing data.
n Download
You can download the settings files created in Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
l Downloading Files
Click [File] in the menu bar, and then select [Download].
The Reason for the Change dialog box appears.
Reason for the Change
Reason
Download Cancel
C:\CENTUMVP\CAMS\configurator\work\dat
E120618E.ai
Figure Reason for the Change Dialog Box

Enter the reason for change, and then click [Download]. All settings files created in Configurator
of CAMS for HIS will be downloaded. If any of the selected files has been updated in other
Configurator of CAMS for HIS, the download of all the settings files stops and a cautionary
message is displayed.If you select [Download], the download will be continued and completed.
Clicking [Cancel] closes the dialog box without downloading the files.
If any edited settings file remains to be downloaded when Configurator of CAMS for HIS is
closed, a dialog box appears asking you if you wish a download of the remaining files. Select
[Yes], and Configurator of CAMS for HIS will download the applicable file and then close. If [No] is
selected, Configurator of CAMS for HIS will close without downloading the file. Clicking [Cancel]
returns to the condition immediately before Configurator closes.
You can also download files created externally. One of the following two methods can be used.
• Import an external file to CAMS for HIS, and then download the file to CAMS for HIS.
Use this method to download files that can be set in Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
• Directly download an external file by specifying the management path to the file.
Files that cannot be set in Configurator of CAMS for HIS (normalization logics, etc.) should
be downloaded directly.
Audit trails pertaining to download, such as reason for change, time and user, are managed by
Configurator of CAMS for HIS. The old databases are stored in the server.
l Downloading a File after Importing It to CAMS for HIS
IMPORTANT
After exporting the information on Alarm List tab, if you add or delete any line on the Alarm List
tab, the previously exported information will be different from the information of Configurator of
CAMS for HIS. In this case, you should not import the previously exported information of the
Alarm List tab.
Click [File] in the menu bar, point to [Import], and then select [External File].
The External File dialog box appears.
External File
Path of External File

...
Import Cancel
E120619E.ai
Figure External File Dialog Box
Enter the path to the external file, and click [Import]. You can also click […] to display a list of
folders and select a desired folder. Once the file has been imported, download the file.
Clicking [Cancel] closes the dialog box without importing the file.

l Directly Downloading an External File
IMPORTANT
Do not change anything here unless it is necessary since the settings here require the
professional knowledge on database.
Click [File] in the menu bar, and then select [Download External File].
The Download External File dialog box appears.
Download External File
Source File Name

...
Destination File Name

...
Download Cancel
E120620E.ai
Figure Download External File Dialog Box
Enter the path to the external file along with the download destination, and then click [Download].
The file will be downloaded. You can also click […] to display a list of folders and select a desired
folder.
Clicking [Cancel] closes the dialog box without downloading the file.

n Audit Trail
You can manage the audit trails of database changes, or revert the current database to an old
database.
Click [Tools] in the menu bar, and then select [Audit Trails of Database Changes].
The Audit Trails of Database Changes dialog box appears.
Audit Trails of Database Changes
Version Download Time User Name Download File Name Reason

1 2008/03/14 10:00 CAMS AlarmGroup.csv Test 1
5 2008/03/16 10:00 CAMS AlarmID.csv Test 3
13 2008/03/2010:00 CAMS AlarmID.csv Test 7
OK Retrieve Print Print Preview
E120621E.ai
Figure Audit Trails of Database Changes Dialog Box
The Audit Trails of Database Changes dialog box shows audit trails of changes that have been
made to the database in the past. Clicking [OK] closes the dialog box.
You can revert the current database to an old database by specifying the desired database file
and click [Retrieve] in this dialog box.
TIP
• The Version number displayed in Audit Trails of Database Changes dialog box increases by each odd
number like 1→3→5→7 per each modification and so on.
• When Commit Changes is performed on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, the version number will be
increased and the revisions will be logged in the audit trails.

n Performance Report
Shows various data based on which to determine if alarms are correctly set or unnecessary
alarms are set.
Click [Tools] from the menu bar, and then select [Performance Report].
The Performance Report window appears.
Performance Report
Total Number of Alarms 24

Main Memory Usage 10464(B) Detail
Graph Style
Pie Bar
Graph Properties
Attributes
Plant Hierarchy
Show graphs
E120622E.ai
Figure Performance Report Window
• [Total Number of Alarms]: The total number of alarms currently defined is shown.
• [Main Memory Usage]: The size of memory (bytes) used by the CAMS for HIS server is
shown.
• [Graph Style]: A graph showing the alarm ratios is displayed. You can select [Pie] or [Bar] as
the graph style.
• [Graph Properties]: [Attributes] and [Plant Hierarchy] are available.
Under [Attributes], select the attributes you want to display. A graph showing the number of
defined alarms having each attribute value defined for each selected attribute is displayed.
Under [Plant Hierarchy], select the hierarchy you want to display. A graph showing the
number of defined alarms below the selected hierarchy is displayed.
• [Show graph]: Clicking this button displays a selected graph.

n Backup
You can backup or restore the settings files created in Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
l Backing up the Database

1. Click [Tools] in the menu bar, and then select [Backup].
The Backup/Restore dialog box appears. When the dialog box for backup and restore is
displayed, you cannot operate Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
Backup/Restore
Backup Destination
...
Backup Restore Cancel
E120623E.ai
Figure Backup/Restore Dialog Box
2. Under [Backup Destination], specify the folder in which to save the settings files. You can
also click […] to display a list of folders and select a desired folder.
3. Clicking [Backup] opens the dialog box showing the progress of backup, and the database
will be backed up. Clicking [Cancel] in this dialog box stops the backup.
Clicking [Cancel] closes the dialog box without backing up the database.
Note the followings when running backup command.

• If a file is not saved, you need to save the file and then start backup.
• The destination of the backup should be a folder other than the folder of [configurator].
• When a folder is designated as the Backup Destination, if other files exist in this folder, the
new files created during backup will add to this folder without deleting the existing files.
However, if the new file has an identical name with an existing file, the existing file will be
overwritten.
• When running backup, not only the data created on Configurator of CAMS for HIS are
backed up, other data are also backed up.
l Restoring the Database

1. Click [Tools] in the menu bar, and then select [Backup].
The Backup/Restore dialog box appears. When the dialog box for backup and restore is
displayed, you cannot operate Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
2. Under [Backup Destination], specify the folder from which to restore the settings files.
You can also click […] to display a list of folders and select a desired folder.
3. Click [Restore].
Restoration will start and a dialog box indicating the restoration progress will be displayed.
Click [Cancel] on this dialog box will abort the restoration.
Clicking [Cancel] closes the dialog box without restoring the database.

When restoring the backup file is completed, the following message box will be displayed.
CAMS Configurator
Restore complete. Configurator is restarted now.
OK
E120631E.ai
Figure Restoration Completed Message Box
4. Click [OK].
Restart the Configurator of CAMS for HIS and the restored definitions will be displayed.
The data that were not backed up when performing backup operation cannot be restored
either.
n Alarm Rule Assistant

You can define reference information to help you determine the Detection and the priorities to be
shown in the Alarm Detail tab or Alarm List tab.
Click [Tools] in the menu bar, point to [Alarm Rule Assistant], and then select [View].
The Alarm Rule Assistant window appears.
Consequence VeryLarge Large Medium Small

Purpose
Safety Critical Critical High Disable

Environment Critical High Medium Disable
Financial Critical
High Medium Medium Disable
High
Medium
Low
Logging OK Cancel
Disable
E120624E.ai
Figure Alarm Rule Assistant Window
The Alarm Rule Assistant window is a spreadsheet where the vertical axis and horizontal axis
represent [Purpose] and [Consequence], respectively. Define information meeting your specific
purpose.
The options include [Critical], [High], [Medium], [Low], [Logging] and [Disable].
Clicking [OK] closes the dialog box after reflecting the settings.
Clicking [Cancel] closes the dialog box without reflecting the settings.

n Style Settings
In this window, the display format of the Details pane in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is
defined.
Click [Tools] in the menu bar, and then select [Style Settings].
The Style Settings dialog box appears.
Style Settings
Guidance
Editable (Text File Only)
Specify Alarm Attribute
Editable (Text File Only)
All Alarm Attributes
OK Cancel
E120625E.ai
Figure Style Settings Dialog Box
Specify the display format of Details pane by selecting one of the following three radio buttons.
• [Guidance]: The contents set to [Guidance] are shown in the Alarm Detail tab or the Alarm
List tab in the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
If the linked address is defined as an attribute, the linked address will be displayed as a
hyperlink. After clicking this link, the contents on the linked address will be displayed.
If a file name of a separated text file (*1) is specified, the contents in the text file can be
displayed. A file name needs to be specified for the text file but the path should be left intact.
By checking the option box of [Editable (Text File Only)], the text file can be edited.
Choose [File] - [Download External File] from menu bar and then save the text file.
(CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS \database\httppost
If the file does not exist in the above folder, a text file will be automatically created.
Moreover, the files in the httppost folder cannot be deleted.
*1: The supported multi-byte characters are those encoded with UTF-8 (with BOM) or UTF-16 (withBOM) only. Use Notepad.exe to
open the text file, choose [File] - [Save As…] and then choose UTF-8 for Encoding to save the file, the multi-byte characters in
the file will be saved with the supported encoding. However, if the text file contains the multi-byte characters that encoded other
than UTF-8 (with BOM) or UTF-16 (with BOM), the contents will be displayed with the invalid character set shown as foIlows:
??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????
lnvalid character set (Not UTF-8, UTF-16).
When the above error occurs, the text file needs to be opened and saved using the UTF-8 (with BOM) or UTF-16 (with BOM)
encoding and then run [File] - [Download External File].

• [Specify Alarm Attribute]: Selected A&E message attributes are shown.
Behavior when link address and/or text file(s) are defined is the same as that of [Guidance].
• [All Alarm Attributes]: All the attributes of A&E messages are shown. The displayed contents
are the same as the alarm attributes displayed on the Select Columns dialog box.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the alarm attributes displayed on the Select Columns dialog box, see the following:
n Message Monitor with Configuration Mode

You can start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the configuration mode.
Click [Tools] in the menu bar, and then select [Message Monitor Configuration].
The Message Monitor with Configuration Mode dialog box is displayed.
Message Monitor with Configuration Mode
USER: TESTUSER Start Cancel
E120626E.ai
Figure Message Monitor with Configuration Mode Dialog Box
Specify a user defined in the CENTUM VP Security Builder under [USER], and click [Start].
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS will start in the configuration mode reflecting the user
permissions of the specified user.
On the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS started in Configuration mode, choose [Tools] -
[Options] from menu bar so as to open the Option window, the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS can be customized on this window. When finish the settings on the [Option] window, choose
[File] - [Commit Changes] to save the customized options.
If SYSTEM is entered to [USER: ] and then start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, the
default settings can be defined. On the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, choose [File] - [Reset
to System Default] from menu bar or click [Reset to System Default] on Option window, this
settings may be displayed.

<E12.7 Settings to Enable CAMS for HIS> E12-105
E12.7 Settings to Enable CAMS for HIS

CAMS for HIS operates on a CENTUM VP HIS.
n Introduction Procedure of CAMS for HIS

The outline of introduction procedure for CAMS for HIS is specified below.
1. In the HIS Utility, enable CAMS for HIS.
2. Import CENTUM VP engineering data, and use the imported data to create settings files
that define alarms, window layout, and so on.
3. Download the created settings files to the database.
Create and download settings files using Configurator of CAMS for HIS started on any Operation
and Monitoring PC.

n HIS Utility Settings

To use CAMS for HIS, you need to enable CAMS for HIS in the HIS Utility.
Open the CAMS for HIS tab in the HIS Utility, set the necessary items, and then click the [OK]
button to close the HIS Utility. Reboot the PC.
IMPORTANT
Perform this process after downloading the project common settings to the HIS.
HIS Utility
User Action Security CAMS for HIS
CAMS for HIS (The computer should be restarted.)

Enable/Disable CAMS for HIS (The computer should be restarted.)
Enable CAMS for HIS

(The system configuration must be downloaded before
enabling CAMS for HIS)
Settings (The computer should be restarted.)
Maximum size of alarm buffer 2000
Set this HIS as Download Master

(Set one Download Master only for each equalization scope.)
Configuration Operation Keyboard
ACK key acknowledges the selected A&E Message

ACK key acknowledges all the displayed A&E Messages
Exclude operation guide messages
Detailed Setting
OPC A&E Server Connection
OK Cancel
E120701E.ai
Figure HIS Utility - CAMS for HIS Tab

Set the following items in the CAMS for HIS tab.
• [Enable CAMS for HIS]: Select this check box if you want to use CAMS for HIS.
• [Maximum size of alarm buffer]: Set the maximum number of alarms to be held in CAMS for
HIS. A desired number can be set as a multiple of 100, between 100 and 2000. The default
is 2000.
• [Set this HIS as Download Master]: Select this check box if you want to set the PC you are
currently using, as the Download Master. Only one Download Master should be set within
the Equalization Scope.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Download Master, see the following:
“n System Configuration of CAMS for HIS” in E12, “Consolidated Alarm Management Software”
• [ACK key acknowledges the selected A&E message]: If you want to acknowledge only the
selected A&E messages, click this radio button on.
• [ACK key acknowledges all the displayed A&E messages]: If you want to acknowledge all
the shown A&E messages at once, click this radio button on.
• [Exclude operation guide messages]: You can select whether to include operation guide
messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS or show them separately in the
Operator Guide view. Selecting this check box instructs CAMS for HIS to show operation
guide messages separately in the Operator Guide view. The check box is unselected by
default.
• [Detailed Setting]: A dialog box is displayed for setting HISs included in the Equalization
Scope of A&E messages. This is useful for dividing Equalization Scope intentionally.
The Detailed Setting dialog box is shown below.
Detailed Setting
Check the HIS for equalization
Station Name Station Number IP Address

HIS0163 1.63 172.17.1.63
HIS0164 1.64 172.17.1.64
HIS0262 2.62 172.17.2.62
HIS0263 2.63 172.17.2.63
HIS0264 2.64 172.17.2.64
OK Cancel
E120702E.ai
Figure Detailed Setting Dialog Box

• [OPC A&E Server Connection]: A dialog box is displayed for setting the connection between
CAMS for HIS and the OPC A&E server.
The OPC A&E Server Connection dialog box is shown below.
OPC A&E Server Connection
Computer Name of CAMS for HIS HIS0164
Computer Name of OPC A&E Server SIOS0138
Program ID in OPC A&E Server Yokogawa. ExaopcAESTARDOMFCx
OPC A&E Server

Computer Name of CAMS for HIS Computer Name of OPC A&E Server Progra
HIS 0164 SIOS 0138 Yokoga
HIS 0164 SIOS 0137 Yokoga
Apply Delete
OK Cancel
E120703E.ai
Figure OPC A&E Server Connection Dialog Box
The setting items on the dialog box are as follows:

• Computer Name of CAMS for HIS: Displays computer name of HIS. This name is not
editable.
• Computer Name of OPC A&E Server: Specify the computer name of OPC A&E server.
• Program ID in OPC A&E Server: Specify the program ID of OPC A&E server. Clicking the
arrow button at the right-hand side of the combo box, the program IDs obtained form the
OPC A&E server with the designated computer name can be found in the dropdown list for
selection.
• OPC A&E Servers: Displays a list of computer names of the CAMS for HIS and the OPC
A&E server registered so far as well as a list of program IDs in OPC A&E server.
TIP
• If PRM is defined as the connected OPC A&E server, the PRM A&E messages can be received by CAMS
for HIS through the PRM OPC A&E server. The receivable PRM A&E messages include the device alarms,
PAS alarms and diagnostic alarms. The type of alarms of the PRM A&E messages received by CAMS for
HIS are categorized as Asset.
• To display the PRM A&E messages on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, the operation file for filtering
the PRM alarms on the Filter Configurator needs to be edited in accordance with the A&E messages to be
displayed or to be sent to the operators.
• If the advanced diagnostic package is installed in PRM, and the option of [Use Messages from the following
HIS] is checked on Diagnosis tab of the PRM Setup Tool, the type of alarms of the PRM A&E messages
received by CAMS for HIS will be categorized as Guidance in stead of Asset.

• Apply: Applies the specified computer name of OPC A&E server and the selected program
ID to the connected OPC A&E server. Clicking this button will open the OPC A&E server
User Authentication dialog box.
The User Authentication dialog box is shown as follows:
User Authentication of OPC A&E Server
User Name
Password
OK Cancel
E120704E.ai
Figure User Authentication of OPC A&E Server Dialog Box
If the specified settings are correct, click [OK] button to continue. The specified computer
name and program ID will be registered to the connected OPC A&E server and displayed
in the list of the OPC A&E servers. Clicking [Cancel] button will return the OPC A&E Server
Connection dialog box without applying the settings.
TIP
The DCOM settings of the OPC server designated as the connected server may contain the OPC Enum or OPC
A&E server access control. In this case, enter User Name and Password and then click [OK] button on the User
Authentication of OPC A&E Server dialog box.
• Delete: Deletes the registered Computer Name of CAMS for HIS, Computer Name of OPC
A&E Server, Program ID in OPC A&E Server. Select the contents to be deleted on the OPC
A&E server and then click this button to delete them from the OPC A&E server.
• OK: Clicking this button will close the dialog box for OPC A&E server connection after
saving the settings.
• Cancel: Clicking this button will close the dialog box for OPC A&E server connection without
saving the settings.

<E12.8 Procedures for Starting Test of CAMS for HIS by Virtual Test> E12-110
E12.8 Procedures for Starting Test of CAMS for

HIS by Virtual Test
The Test Function of CENTUM VP consists of Virtual Test and Target Test. The test of
CAMS for HIS can be performed using the Virtual Test. Moreover, the Virtual Test can test
a stand-alone HIS or multiple HISs (Enhanced Test Function). The procedure for starting
the test of CAMS for HIS by Virtual Test will be explained below.
Moreover, in this section, a user in either the CTM_MAINTENANCE group or the CTM_
MAINTENANCE_LCL group is referred to as the CENTUM VP user with the Administrative
privilege.
n Test CAMS for HIS on an HIS

Procedures for testing CAMS for HIS on an HIS will be explained below.
l Procedure 1: Enableing CAMS for HIS

Enabling the CAMS for HIS on the HIS for virtual test:
1. Logon Windows as the CENTUM VP user with the Administrative privilege, and start HIS
Utility
2. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, check the option box of [Enable CAMS for HIS].
3. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, check the option box of [Set this HIS as Download
Master].
At this moment, in the [Detailed Setting], the station name and station number (0, 1) as well
as the IP address (127.0.0.1) are defined. And these settings should be kept intact.
Detailed Setting
Check the HIS for equalization
Station Name Station Number IP Address

pc001 0.1 127.0.0.1
OK Cancel
E120801E.ai
Figure Detailed Setting Dialog Box
4. Click [OK] button on HIS Utility.

5. Restart the PC.

l Procedure 2: Testing
After restarting the PC, start the Test Function (Virtual Test) and import the CENTUM VP
database.
1. Use a user account that can start the Operation and Monitoring Functions to logon
Windows.
2. Start Test Function (Virtual Test) on System View.
3. On Configurator of CAMS for HIS, import and download the CENTUM VP database.
TIP
When importing the CENTUM VP database on Configurator of CAMS for HIS, the Virtual Test needs to be
started.
When the above procedures are completed, testing CAMS for HIS can be performed in the
Virtual Test environment.
n Test CAMS for HIS on Multiple HISs

Procedures for testing CAMS for HIS on Multiple HISs of the same project will be explained as
follows.
Start
Procedure 1: Preparation
Procedure 2: Enable CAMS for HIS
Procedure 3-1: Start FCS Simulator
Procedure 3-2: Start Virtual HIS
End
E120802E.ai
Figure Procedure for Testing CAMS for HIS on Multiple HISs
l Procedure 1: Preparation
Preparing test on Multiple HISs:
1. The firewall of each HIS should be disabled.
2. If the attribute of the project for testing is Current Project, it is necessary to change the
attribute of the project from the Current Project to User-Defined project on the utility tool.

l Procedure 2: Enableing CAMS for HIS
Enabling the CAMS for HIS on all the HISs for virtual test:
1. Logon Windows as the CENTUM VP user with the Administrative privilege.
2. Start System View, choose [HIS] - [Virtual HIS] on the System View so as to start Virtual
HIS;
TIP
At this moment, no need to start FCS Simulator.
4. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, check the option box of [Set this HIS as Download
Master] and specify any of the Virtual HISs as the downloading master.
5. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, click [Detailed Setting] button so as to display the
Detailed Setting dialog box.
6. On the Detailed Setting dialog box, specify the Equalization Scope of the HISs. When doing
so, the IP addresses of the HISs should be correctly confirmed.
8. Restart the PC.
9. Do the above settings on all the HISs.
l Procedure 3-1: Start FCS Simulator

Starting FCS Simulator:
1. Use a user account that can start the Operation and Monitoring Functions to logon
Windows.
2. Start System View and then select the FCS for testing.
3. On the System View, choose [FCS] - [Test Function].
A dialog box showing that the Test Function is starting will be displayed. The figure below
shows the setting that the local PC is HIS0164 and the FCS Simulator will be started on
HIS0163.
Dialog
Change operation and monitoring function to virtual test mode.
OK?
HIS Station: HIS0164
FCS Start Computer Name: HIS0163 .....
No Connect to Other PC
OK Cancel
E120803E.ai
Figure Dialog Box Shows the Test Function is Starting

4. On the dialog box for starting the Test Function, confirm that the option box of [No Connect
to Other PC] is not checked. Otherwise, the option should be unchecked. And then put the
entries for [HIS Station] and [FCS Start Computer Name] setting items.
5. Click [OK] button on this dialog box so as to start the Test Function.
l Procedure 3-2: Start Virtual HIS

Starting all the Virtual HISs (except the HIS already started in Procedure 3-1):
1. When the PC restarted, use a user account that can start the Operation and Monitoring
Functions to logon Windows.
2. Start System View and then select an HIS.
3. Choose [HIS] - [Virtual HIS] on the System View so as to start Virtual HIS;
4. Do the same to all the HISs to start the virtual HIS.
5. On the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, import and download the CENTUM VP database.
TIP
When importing the CENTUM VP database on Configurator of CAMS for HIS, the Virtual HIS needs to be started.
When the above procedures are completed, testing CAMS for HIS can be performed in the
Virtual Test environment.

<E12.9 Procedures for Adding or Removing HIS> E12-114
E12.9 Procedures for Adding or Removing HIS

CAMS for HIS can perform alarm information equalization among all the HISs in the same
project. However, the Equalization Scope is definable by adding or removing the CAMS
enabled HIS. For doing so, the procedure must be observed. The procedure will explained
below.
Moreover, in this section, a user in either the CTM_MAINTENANCE group or the CTM_
MAINTENANCE_LCL group is referred to as the CENTUM VP user with the Administrative
privilege.
IMPORTANT
If the procedure described here is not observed, the defined engineering data may disappear or
the CAMS for HIS may fail.
n The First Time Using CAMS for HIS

When the first time using CAMS for HIS while all the HISs in the same equalization scope, the
HIS used as the Download Master should be setup and started first. Then any HIS can be next.
Do the same after upgrading to CENTUM VP and using CAMS for HIS for the first time.
n Procedures for Adding HIS in the Project that Applied with CAMS for
HIS
The procedure for adding HIS in the project that applied with CAMS for HIS will be explained
below.
l Procedure 1: Downloading Project Common Settings

After adding an HIS to CENTUM VP project, the project common settings need to be downloaded
to the HIS.
1. Confirm that the CAMS for HIS is disabled in the added HIS.
Otherwise, it is necessary to disable the CAMS for HIS, and then restart the computer.
2. Add a new HIS on System View.
3. Download the new project configuration to all the existing HISs.
4. Check if the newly added HIS can perform the operation and monitoring as other HISs.

l Procedure 2: Adjusting Equalization Scope of Existing CAMS for HISs
Add a new HIS to the Equalization Scope of CAMS for HIS:
Utility
2. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, click the [Detailed Setting] so as to display the
3. On the Detailed Setting dialog box, confirm the IP address, and check the check box of the
HIS so as to add the HIS into the Equalization Scope.
5. Do the same steps as above described when adding another new HIS to the Equalization
Scope of CAMS for HIS.
l Procedure 3: Stop/Restart CAMS for HIS Server Service

After completing Procedure 2, the CAMS for HIS server service needs to be stopped and
restarted on the HISs one by one.
1. After procedure 2, on Windows menu, choose [Control Panel] - [Administrative Tools] -
[Services] so as to display the Services window.
2. Find the CAMS for HIS service which is in Started status. Stop this service first and then
start it again.
Moreover, using the following command scripts can do the same thing.
NET STOP “CAMS for HIS”
NET START “CAMS for HIS”
However, do not stop the services in all the HISs in the Equalization Scope at the same
time, therefore, stopping and staring the services should be performed on the HISs one by
one.
l Procedure 4: Enabling CAMS for HIS on the New HIS

When the above procedures 2 and 3 are completed on all the HISs in the Equalization Scope, it
is necessary to enable the CAMS for HIS on the newly added HIS.
Utility
4. Restart the HIS. After restarting, the HIS will be automatically equalized with the alarm data
from other HIS, and then CAMS for HIS will be functioning on this HIS in the same way other
HISs.

n Procedure for Removing an HIS from the Project that Applied with
CAMS for HIS
The procedure for deleting an HIS from the project that applied with the CAMS for HIS will be
explained below. The text below is to explain how to disable CAMS for HIS on an HIS in a project
which is different from physically stopping the HIS in the project.
l Procedure 1: Disabling CAMS for HIS

Disabling CAMS for HIS on an HIS:
Utility
2. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, uncheck the option box of [Enable CAMS for HIS].
4. Restart the HIS.
For temporarily stopping the CAMS for HIS service on an HIS, the following procedures are not
required.
l Procedure 2: Downloading Project Common Settings after Deleting an HIS

After deleting an HIS from the CENTUM VP project, the project common settings need to be
downloaded to all the existing HISs.
1. On System View, delete an HIS from the project.
2. Download the project common settings to all the existing HISs.
l Procedure 3: Adjusting Equalization Scope of Existing CAMS for HIS

When an HIS is removed from CENTUM VP project, this HIS will be removed from the CAMS for
HIS Equalization Scope of all the HISs. Though the HIS is already removed from the Equalization
Scope of all the HISs after downloading the project common settings, it may be necessary to
confirm the result for sure.
Utility
2. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, click the [Detailed Setting] so as to display the
3. On the Detailed Setting dialog box, make sure that the removed HIS does not exist.
If a deleted HIS is shown in the HIS Advanced dialog box, it may indicate that the project common
settings are not properly downloaded to the HIS. The Procedure 2 needs to be performed again.

l Procedure 4: Stop/Restart CAMS for HIS Server Service
After completing Procedure 3, the CAMS for HIS server service needs to be stopped and
restarted on the HISs one by one in the same order as in procedure 3.
1. After procedure 3, on Windows menu, choose [Control Panel] - [Administrative Tools] -
[Services] so as to display the Services window.
2. Find the CAMS for HIS service which is in Started status. Stop this service first and then
start it again.
Moreover, using the following command scripts can do the same thing.
NET STOP “CAMS for HIS”
NET START “CAMS for HIS”
However, do not stop the services in all the HISs in the Equalization Scope at the same
time, therefore, stopping and staring the services should be performed on the HISs one by
one.
n Change Download Master

The procedure for changing Download Master is as foIlows:
1. On the existing Download Master PC, start Configurator of CAMS for HIS and backup the
data.
2. Remove the role of Download Master from this PC.
3. Set the new PC as the Download Master.
4. Restart the PC that just removed the role of Download Master in step 2 and the PC that just
set as the Download Master in step 3.
5. Start Configurator of CAMS for HIS on the PC that just set as the Download Master and run
the data restoration using the backup performed in step 1.

<E12.10 HIS Actions after Enabling CAMS for HIS> E12-118
E12.10 HIS Actions after Enabling CAMS for HIS

This section explains how the HIS and CAMS for HIS can be coordinated.

E12.10.1 Operation and Monitoring Windows on an HIS in

which CAMS for HIS Is Enabled
This section explains the Operation and Monitoring windows on an HIS in which CAMS
for HIS is enabled.
n System Message Banner

In the message display area, up to three latest system alarm or process alarm is displayed that is
not yet acknowledged in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
If any alarm is present, the button to call the alarm acknowledgement window blinks.
n Faceplate and Tuning Views

The alarm status of the applicable tag as shown in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is
reflected and displayed in these windows.
n Graphic View
The alarm status of the applicable tag as shown in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is
reflected and displayed in this window. The message primitives may be different from those
displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Browser Bar
This window is displayed in the same manner as on an HIS without CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Browser bar, see the following:
E2.6, “Browser Bar”
n Operation Keyboard LEDs

LEDs assigned to the Process Alarm, System Alarm and Operator Guide views continue to blink
while corresponding alarms are present.
n Buzzer
When a message is received, the HIS will sound a buzzer of the tone corresponding to the tone
number set for the type of the applicable message.

E12.10.2 CAMS for HIS/HIS Coordination Function
n Switching the CAMS for HIS User

Security of CAMS for HIS depends on the HIS user who is logged in the HIS. To change the
operation permissions for CAMS for HIS, log in again in the HIS’s User Login dialog box as a
different user with appropriate permissions.
TIP
When opening the User Login dialog box, the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS will restart.
n Calling an Operation and Monitoring Window from the Message

Monitor of CAMS for HIS
Each operation and monitoring window can be called from the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
using one of the following methods.
• In the A&E Messages pane, double-click an A&E message for which a tag name is defined.
• In the A&E Messages pane, point the mouse pointer to an A&E message, right-clicking the
mouse to display the context menu. Select a desired menu item in the context menu.
• Assign the call function for each window to a user-defined button in the toolbar of the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, and then click the button.
n Operation Keyboard Actions

The following explains how the operation keyboard can be used while CAMS for HIS is running.
• Acknowledgment key
Select a message and press the Acknowledgment key to acknowledge the message.
• Hard Copy key
Pressing this key lets you output the image of the entire screen.
TIP
You can also use the [Copy] key in the System Message Banner.
• Buzzer Reset
Pressing this key stops the buzzer.
n Display of A&E Messages Issued by ProSafe-RS

The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS selects and displays only ProSafe-RS messages before
selecting/showing messages of any other type. (*1)
If A&E messages issued by the SCS (Safety Control Station) of ProSafe-RS have already
been received when the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is opened, the messages are
automatically filtered using “SIS-System” (system alarm messages) or “SIS-Process” (process
alarm messages)” as the filter condition keyword and the filtered results are displayed.
*1: Applicable when a ProSafe-RS system is used.Function Block Detail Builder for the applicable tag.

E12.10.3 Differences between the HISs with and without CAMS

for HIS
The HIS with CAMS for HIS functions differently from the HIS without CAMS for HIS. The
differences are explained as follows.
n Settings on HIS Setup Window

In the HIS with CAMS for HIS, the following settings on HIS Setup Window will become invalid.
• [PRT] for [Message and Report] on Printer tab
The printers specified on HIS Setup window for process alarms, system alarms, operation
guide messages will be invalidated by CAMS for HIS.
• [Print Setup] on Printer tab
The printout settings on HIS Setup window is not valid and the printout settings for CAMS
for HIS should be defined on the dialog box for print settings called from Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS or Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
• [Font] on Display tab
[Font] defined on Display tab of HIS Setup window is not valid. The font of Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS should be defined on the Option window of Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS.
• [Alarm Summary Mode] on Alarm tab
The settings on Alarm tab of HIS Setup window do not take effect on Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS.
n Comparing the HISs with and without CAMS for HIS

The differences between the HISs that CAMS for HIS is enabled and disabled are shown as
follows:
l Window Accesses
The comparisons of the window access are shown in the table below.
Table Window Accesses
Comparison HIS with CAMS for HIS HIS without CAMS for HIS
Pointing a process alarm Right clicking may open a menu but Edit is Right clicking may open a menu.
message and right click not available on the menu.
Pointing a system alarm Right clicking may open a menu but only Help Not functioning
message and right click window can be opened from the menu.
Pointing an operation No affect at all. The builder defined window No menu displays. If a window is defined on
guide messages and will be ignored; the error operation alarm the builder, the window will be displayed.
double click buzzer does not act either.
Pointing a dialog Right clicking may open a menu. No affect
message and right click
Pointing an operation • Check Device: DeviceViewer will be • Check Device: DeviceViewer will be
guide messages from displayed regarding Device Tag. displayed regarding Device Tag.
PRM and double click DeviceViewer is a plug-in application of DeviceViewer is a plug-in application of
(*1) PRM. PRM.
• Check Tag: A faceplate view will be • Check Tag: A faceplate view will be
displayed regarding Block Tag. displayed regarding Block Tag.
E121001E.ai
*1: The HIS with the CAMS for HIS can be a recipient of the A&E messages sent from PRM for operators. the type of alarms will be
categorized as Asset in stead of Guidance.
To define an HIS to receive the A&E messages sent from PRM for operators, PRM should be set as the OPC A&E server on the
HIS Utility.

l Acknowledgement Actions
Comparisons on the acknowledgement actions are shown in the table below.
Table Acknowledgement Actions
Acknowledgement Both [Acknowledge] and [Acknowledge All] On Alarm tab of HIS Setup window, the
Action (Acknowledge buttons can be defined on the Message [Group Acknowledgement] or [Individual
and Acknowledge All) Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Acknowledgement] can be selected as the
[Message Acknowledgement Method].
This setting is valid for process alarm, system
alarm and operation guide messages.
Push the Acts according to the selection of [ACK key Acts according to the setting of [Message
acknowledgement key acknowledges the selected A&E Message] or Acknowledgement Method] on Alarm tab of
on the operator [ACK key acknowledges all the displayed the HIS Setup Window
keyboard A&E Messages] on the CAMS for HIS tab of
HIS utility
Security on The user started the Message Monitor of When acknowledging the alarms of the tags
Acknowledgement CAMS for HIS is permitted to acknowledge with the security level 6 to 8, the
the messages. acknowledgement action of a user is
For the alarms of the tags with security level restricted by his privilege level and the
6 to 8, the HIS with CAMS for HIS and the security level of the target. No additional
HIS without CAMS for HIS behave the same restrictions are applied.
though Configurator of CAMS for HIS needs
to be defined.
Acknowledgement Acknowledgement on Message Monitor of When acknowledging the alarms of the tags
restricted by the mode CAMS for HIS is irrelevant to the key position. with the security level 6 to 8, the restrictions
key position on the on monitoring and acknowledging the alarms
operation keyboard depend on the key position on the operation
keyboard.
Permission for deleting the system alarm or
operation guide messages also depends
on the key position on the operation keyboard.
Acknowledging process The alarm messages can be acknowledged Alarms of each tag can be acknowledged.
alarms individually. When an alarm message is The messages with the same tag will be
acknowledged on one HIS, it is also acknow- acknowledged together.
ledged on HISs through the control bus.
Acknowledgment on All the alarms of the same tag become Alarms on process alarm view become
tuning view or graphic acknowledged together on Message monitor acknowledged.
view of CAMS for HIS. (They were equalized
according to the ACK status change message
from the FCS.) (*1)
System alarm messages The acknowledgment status of all the HISs in The acknowledgment status of all the HISs in
and operation guide the equalization scope will be equalized. the operation group will be equalized.
messages affected by (CAMS for HIS does not use operation
acknowledgement groups.)
E121002E.ai
*1: Even if the multiple tags are set in the same alarm group, and the option of [Apply to All] is set as [Enabled] on the message
monitor of CAMS for HIS, only the tags of the A&E messages acknowledged on the tuning view or graphic view are displayed as
acknowledged.

l Delete or Manual Reset
Comparisons on the deleting and manually resetting are shown in the table below.
Table Delete or Manual Reset
Deleting message On CAMS for HIS, when a user deletes a Deleting message is possible.
message, the user is actually manually
resetting the message. Therefore, the
message is disappeared only because the
alarm status is manually reset, it by no means
that the message is deleted.
Restrictions on deleting On Configurator of CAMS for HIS, the permissi S1 user is restricted (set in registry.)
(Security) on or denial for manually resetting messages
can be specified for individual user or user
groups.
Deleting process alarms After manually resetting an acknowledged User cannot delete process alarm.
process alarm, the alarm message will
disappear. By default, manually resetting the
process alarm is not permitted.
Deleting system alarms After manually resetting an acknowledged The acknowledged system alarms can be
system alarm, the alarm message will deleted using the deleting button.
disappear. By default, manually resetting the
system alarm is permitted to all users other
than S1 privileged users.
Deleting operation After manually resetting an acknowledged The acknowledged operation guide
guide messages operation guide messages, the message will messages can be deleted using the deleting
disappear. By default, manually resetting the button.
operation guide messages is permitted to all
users other than S1 privileged users.
E121003E.ai
l Recovery Actions
Comparisons on the recovery actions are shown in the table below.
Table Recovery Actions
Process alarm When an acknowledged alarm recovers, the When an acknowledged alarm recovers, the
alarm message will disappear. Under this alarm message will disappear.
circumstance, the priority of the recovery
message should be low.
NR indication for the By default, NR is not indicated. However, if on If all the alarms of a block are recovered to
unexercised alarms the CENTUM VP Alarm Priority builder, the normal state, the alarm status of the block will
alarm is defined to indicate the recovery be indicated with NR.
(specified with NL), NR will be indicated for
the alarm signal.
NR is indicated for the unengaged
annunciator.
System alarm When a system alarm signal recovers, the When a system alarm signal recovers, the
recovery message will initiated. When an recovery message will initiated. However,
acknowledged alarm recovers, or when even when an acknowledged alarm recovers,
manually resetting an acknowledged system or when manually resetting an acknowledged
alarm, the alarm message will disappear. system alarm, the alarm message will not
For the alarms that do not initiate the recovery disappear.
messages, when the alarm messages are
acknowledged, the message will disappear
after manually resetting.
Operation guide No recovery message No recovery message
messages
E121004E.ai

n Inhibited Messages
By the default setting, the following messages are not shown on Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS.
• No. 0394: Downloading database into the Exaopc station completed
• No. 0510: Database download
• No. 0514: Operation and monitoring function database change
n CAMS for HIS Specific Messages

CAMS for HIS will initiate a system alarm when the number of buffered messages reaches 80%
of buffer capacity.
CAMS Alarm Buffer has exceeded 80% of the maximum in number.
This system alarm will vanish when the number of buffered messages declined to 70% of buffer
capacity.
CAMS Alarm Buffer is within 70% of the maximum in number.
However, the tag mark of this system alarm is different from other CENTUM VP system alarms. It
is the same one displayed at the beginning of the A&E messages without the default tag marks.
n Other Differences
The other differences are shown as follows.
• Windows cannot be called with filter conditions specified. Even if filter conditions are
specified, they will be ignored. (Example: .AL@FIC100)
• Operation group identifies used on the HIS (such as “A1”) are ignored. All alarm statuses
follow the same settings across all HISs.

E12.10.4 Process Alarm of HIS and Alarm Inhibited by CAMS

for HIS
On the HIS that CAMS for HIS is enabled, when a process alarm is generated by a function
block or annunciator of FCS, the alarm inhibition settings of CAMS for HIS will affect the
process alarm status displayed on HIS. (*1) In this section, how a process alarm shift its
status on HIS varies with the settings of inhibiting or not inhibiting the alarm defined on
CAMS for HIS will be explained. Moreover, the difference between the alarm inhibition by
CAMS for HIS and the alarm inhibition by HIS settings will be explained.
*1: The message primitives in the graphic window will not be affected.
n CAMS for HIS Alarm Inhibition and Alarm Status Change on HIS
When a process alarm occurred in FCS and then recovered, if this alarm message is subject to
A&E message inhibition, this alarm message will not be shown on Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS. On the HIS operation and monitoring window, this message will not change status.
The following three methods can inhibit the alarm on CAMS for HIS (*2):
• Disable the Detection attribute of the A&E message
• Change the alarm priority of the A&E message to Logging
• Enable suppression to the A&E message
*2: Applications which operating on the FCS will not be affected.
TIP
The difference between disabling the alarm detection and changing the alarm priority to Logging is if the message
will be stored as historical data. When disable Detection attribute of a message, the message will not be stored
in historical files. While when change the message’s priority to Logging, the message will be stored in that. If both
are defined to a message, the message will not be stored nor displayed on the Historical View of CAMS for HIS,
since disabling the detection capability overrides the Logging priority.
If a message is subject to Suppression, the message will be stored in historical files and displayed on the
Historical View of CAMS for HIS.
CAMS for HIS alarm inhibition and HIS actions are explained below.
l Message Displays when Turn Suppression On or Off

When an alarm occurs while its message is suppressed, its message will not be displayed.
However, if you turn off the suppression of the alarm, and then turn on and off the suppression
again, the messages for indicating the alarm occurrence, recovery and occurrence will be
repeated on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The same displays of the process alarm
occurrence and recovery will also be shown on the HIS operation and monitoring window.
• When Suppression is Turned Off while the Alarm is Occurring:
When Suppression is turned off while the alarm is occurring, the process alarm message
will be displayed on the HIS operation and monitoring window to show the signal is
changing from normal to alarming status.

• When Suppression is Turned On while the Alarm is Occurring:
When Suppression is turned on while the alarm is occurring but the message is suppressed,
the process alarm recovery message will be displayed on the HIS operation and monitoring
window to show the signal is changing from alarming status to normal status.
However, if the process alarm signal sent from FCS is not received by CAMS for HIS, the
recovery message will not be displayed.
Relations of process alarm display on HIS operation and monitoring window and turning
suppression on or off are shown in the figure below.
Process alarm display on the
message monitor of CAMS for HIS
Process alarm display on HIS
NR HI NR HI NR
operation and monitoring window
Suppression processing OFF ON OFF ON
Message initiation in FCS

Alarm statuses of a device Stopped HI NR HI NR HI
No recovery message will be displayed if the process alarm signal sent from
FCS is not received by CAMS for HIS.
: Process Alarm Occurring Message

: Process Recovery Message
E121005E.ai
Figure Relations of Process Alarm Display on HIS Operation and Monitoring Window and Turning
Suppression On or Off
l Alarm Message Display after Enabling Detection Attribute and Changing Alarm
Priority
When enabling the alarm detection and changing the alarm priority (to Logging), the suppressed
messages will not be displayed on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS even if the alarm is
occurring.
Relations of process alarm display on HIS operation and monitoring window and enabling or
disabling detection are shown in the figure below.
NR HI NR HI NR
Enabling or Disabling Detection
Enable Disable Enable Disable
attribute
Alarm statuses of a device Stopped HI NR HI NR HI

E121006E.ai
Figure Relations of Process Alarm Display on HIS Operation and Monitoring Window and Enabling or
Disabling Detection

n Function Block Alarm Inhibition (AOF) and Alarm Status Change on

HIS
The alarm status change on HIS is different when a function block alarm inhibition is applied
(AOF) and when CAMS for HIS alarm suppression is turned on. In this section, how the process
alarm displayed on HIS is affected by function block alarm inhibition (AOF) will be explained.
l Message Display When Turning on Alarm Inhibition (AOF) for All Blocks
When all the function blocks are turned to AOF statuses, no process alarms from these function
blocks can be displayed on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. No process alarm from these
function blocks can be displayed on HIS operation and monitoring window either.
If the alarms are occurring while the function blocks are in AOF statuses, the alarms of these
function blocks may only be displayed on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS when all the
function blocks are released from AOF statuses. The timestamp for the alarm occurrence will be
the last time that the alarm status changed but not the time that the AOF was released. These
alarm messages will also be displayed on HIS operation and monitoring window.
Relations of process alarm display on HIS operation and monitoring window and switching
function block between AON and AOF statuses are shown in the figure below.
HI NR HI HI NR HI NR HI HI NR HI
Switching Function Block between
AON AOF AON
AON and AOF for All Blocks
Alarm statuses of a device HI NR HI NR HI NR HI NR HI

E121007E.ai
Figure Relations of Process Alarm Display on HIS Operation and Monitoring Window and Switching
Function Block between AON and AOF for All Blocks
l Message Display when Turning on AOF for All Blocks and CAMS for HIS Alarm
Suppression Together
If the alarms are occurring while the function blocks are in AOF statuses, if the CAMS for HIS
alarm suppression and AOF are both released, the alarms of the function blocks will be displayed
on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The timestamp for the alarm occurrence will be the last
time that the alarm status changed but not the time that the AOF was released. These alarm
messages will also be displayed on HIS operation and monitoring window.

l Message Display When Turning on Alarm Inhibition (AOF) on a Block
When a function block is turned to AOF status, no process alarms from this function block can
be displayed on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Meanwhile, they can be displayed on HIS
operation and monitoring window.
If an alarm is occurring while the function block is in AOF status, the alarm of this function block
may only be displayed on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS when the function block is released
from AOF status. The timestamp for the alarm occurrence will be the last time that the alarm
status changed but not the time that the AOF was released.
Relations of process alarm display on HIS operation and monitoring window and switching
function block between AON and AOF statuses are shown in the figure below.
HI NR HI NR HI NR HI NR HI
Switching Function Block between
AON on a Block AOF on a Block AON on a Block
AON and AOF on a Block
Alarm statuses of a device HI NR HI NR HI NR HI NR HI

E121008E.ai
Figure Relations of Process Alarm Display on HIS Operation and Monitoring Window and Switching
Function Block between AON and AOF on a Block
l Message Display when Turning on AOF on a Block and CAMS for HIS Alarm
Suppression Together
If an alarm is occurring while the function block is in AOF status, if the CAMS for HIS alarm
suppression and AOF are both released, the alarm of this function block will be displayed on
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The timestamp for the alarm occurrence will be the last time
that the alarm status changed but not the time that the AOF was released.

<E12.11 Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS> E12-129
E12.11 Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

The Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS displays the past A&E messages and operation
records of operators on the window for the historical data list, that CAMS for HIS keeps.
The operation records include not only the HIS operations but also the operations
performed from the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
The window appearance and the window operation of Historical Viewer of CAMS for
HIS are similar to the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS besides some specific features
of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS. These specific features and operations will be
explained below.
n Main Window of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

The main window of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is shown as follows:
CAMS for HIS : Historical Viewer
File Edit View Operation
Filter Process - ProcessAlarm

Date Messages
All Filters Favarites EVt 2008/03/23 10:20:50 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter NR
- TESTUSER(629) 2008/03/23 10:20:50 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter PV = 46.9 L/M HI Recover
+ SIS(190) 2008/03/23 10:20:50 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter PV = 46.9 L/M HH Recover
2008/03/23 10:20:44 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter MV = 30.0 % old= 73.3 [TESTUSER@
System(618) 2008/03/23 10:16:37 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter PV = 50.5 L/M HH
Process(201) 2008/03/23 10:16:37 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter PV = 50.5 L/M HI
Operator Guide(190) 2008/03/23 10:16:31 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter MV = 73.3 % old= 0.1 [TESTUSER@HI
Dynamic Filter(190) 2008/03/23 10:15:33 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter ML = 20.0 % old= 0.0 [TESTUSER@HI
2008/03/23 10:15:21 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter MV = 0.1 % old= 0.0 [TESTUSER@HI
2008/03/23 10:11:25 %AN0001S0101 ALM
2008/03/23 10:11:24 %AN0001S0101 PV = ON old=OFF [TESTUSER@H
EVt 2008/03/23 09:43:50 FIC202 Secondary Flowmeter MAN
EVt 2008/03/23 09:43:50 FIC201 Primary Flowmeter MAN
YHIS.MesageNo 4609
Timestamp 2008/03/23 10:11:25.000
Timestamp.Server 2008/03/23 10:11:26.218
Message %AN0001S0101 ALM
Message.Buzzer 5
MessageNo 1201
TypeOfAlarm Process
Source %AN0001S010101.ALM
Source.Plant FCS0101
TagName %AN0001S010101
AlarmPriority Medium
Process Operator
Guide
E121101E.ai
Figure Main Window of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

n Specification of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

The specification of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is as follows:
• Up to 10000 messages can be displayed.
• The shelves cannot be applied to the historical messages. The historical messages are
listed in the Historical Messages pane as the historical report.
• When a Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is started, it uses the same display style of the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the same HIS. The display style of Historical Viewer
cannot be defined on Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
• The CurrentProduct [Batch ID] filters created on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
cannot be inherited.
n Categories of Historical Data on Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

On Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, the historical data are handled in three categories. The
historical data of the three categories can be displayed by selecting the menu items in the menu
bar or clicking the respective buttons on toolbar. The details are as follows:
l Alarm
All the alarms displayed on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS belong to this category
including the alarm-off (AOF) and suppressed alarm messages. Some of the messages belong
to the Alarm category may not be displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
l Operation Record
All the operations recorded on the HIS Historical Message Report window and on the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS belong to this category.
l Event
All the messages not belong to the Alarm and Operation Record categories belong to Event
category.
n Historical Data Displayed on Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

Not only the A&E messages of the plant control and status can be displayed on the Historical
Viewer of CAMS for HIS but also the events and the records of the operations on the CAMS for
HIS. Therefore, some A&E messages displayed on the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS are not
available on the legacy CENTUM VP alarm view.
Events and records specific to CAMS for HIS displayed on the Historical Viewer are as follows.
l Historical Data of Events and Records of Operations on CAMS for HIS

• Operations of CAMS for HIS: Acknowledgment (Ack), Manual reset, Suppressing, Shelving,
Committing changes, downloading an so on
• System alarm messages generated from CAMS for HIS are the messages regarding
equalization scope and the alarm buffer capacity.
l A&E Messages Obtained Through OPC A&E Sever

• PRM A&E Messages: Device Alarm, PAS Alarm, Diagnosis Alarm
• STARDOM A&E Messages: System Alarm/Event Messages, Application Alarm/Event
Messages

n Historical Data Cannot be Displayed on Historical Viewer of CAMS for

HIS
The alarms not detected by CAMS for HIS in accordance with the settings on the Alarm Details
tab and the Alarm List tab of CAMS for HIS Configurator will not be displayed on the Historical
Viewer of CAMS for HIS.

E12.11.1 Open or Close Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

On one HIS, only one Historical View of CAMS for HIS can be opened. How to open or
close the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is explained as follow.
n Open Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

There are two ways to start the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS. The two ways are as follows:
l From Browser Bar

When calling the Historical Message Report window from [Call View] of Tool Button Tool Box on
Browser bar, the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS can be displayed.
At the first time starting the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, only the latest alarm messages
are displayed. From the second time, the previously historical messages resulted from the
previous search will also be displayed.
l By Assigning a Window Call Object

The Historical Message Report window can also be called by assigning a Touch Target on
Product Control view. Using a Batch ID as criterion, the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS can be
displayed instead of the Historical Message Report window.
When starting Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS from the Product Control view, a filter will be
automatically created using Bacth ID as criterion. The filtered result will be displayed in the A&E
Historical Messages pane.
n Close Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

How to close the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is as follows:
• Click the Close button of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
• Choose [File] - [Exit] from the menu bar of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
• Run User-In or User-Out.
• Press [ERAS] function key on the Operation Keyboard.

E12.11.2 Layout of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

The layout of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is similar to the layout of the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The detailed items that specific to the Historical Viewer of CAMS
for HIS will be explained below.
n Main Window
The window panes of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS will be displayed in the Historical
Viewer of CAMS for HIS. When the Message Monitor is customized to a different layout, the
Historical Viewer will be changed to the same. The display style of Historical Viewer cannot be
directly customized.
The figure below shows the appearance of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
CAMS for HIS : Historical Viewer
Menu Bar
Toolbar
Filter
A&E Historical Messages Pane
Filters Pane
Details Pane
Status Bar
E121102E.ai
Figure Appearance of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

n Menu Bar
Operations available in the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS can be selected using the menu
items in the menu bar. A list of menu items is shown below.
Table Menu Items of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
Menu Description
File
Properties Displays the properties of filter.
Export... Exports the historical data in the Historical Messages pane to a CSV file.
Print... Prints the displayed screen image.
Exit Exits the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
Edit
Search Opens a dialog box to setup the searching criteria for searching the historical data.
Stop Searching Stops searching.
View
Filter Pane Shows or hides the Filter pane.
Details Pane Show or hide the Details pane.
Alarm Displays alarm messages. When open the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS,
this filter is selected and the alarm messages are displayed.
Operation log Displays the operation records.
Event Displays events.
Operation log of other users Displays the operation records of other users of the HISs within the equalization
scope.
Next Forwards the display on the Historical Messages pane towards the later records
according to the timestamps. This will scroll the half of the displayed contents
in the Historical Messages pane.
Previous Backwards the display on the Historical Messages pane towards the earlier records
according to the timestamps. This will scroll the half of the displayed contents
in the Historical Messages pane.
Operation
Clear Details Pane Deselects the selected A&E messages and clears the contents in Details pane.
E121103J.ai

n Toolbar
Contains the valid buttons for the Historical Viewer among the buttons on the toolbar of the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, and the buttons specific to the Historical Viewer of CAMS for
HIS.
A display of this toolbar is shown as follows:
E121104E.ai
Figure A Display of Buttons on Toolbar of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS (Default)
The details of the buttons specific to the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS are explained as
follows:
E121105E.ai
Print: Prints the contents displayed in the Historical Messages pane.
E121106E.ai
Clear Details Pane: Deselects the selected historical data and clear the contents in the Details
pane.
E121107E.ai
Show Filter Pane: Toggles to show or hide the filter pane by a click.
E121108E.ai
Show Details Pane: Toggles to show or hide the details pane by a click.
E121109E.ai
Display the search dialog box: Opens a dialog box to setup the searching criteria for searching
the historical data.
E121110E.ai
Stop the search of Alarm: Stops searching.
E121111E.ai
Export the Alarm in CSV format: Exports the historical data in the Historical Messages pane to a
CSV file.

E121112E.ai
Switch Display/Hide the Alarm: Displays alarm messages. When open the Historical Viewer of
CAMS for HIS, this filter is selected and the alarm messages are displayed. The Alarm can be
shown or hidden by a click.
E121113E.ai
Switch Display/Hide the operation Record: Displays the operation records. The displayed
operation record can be shown or hidden by a click.
E121114E.ai
Switch Display/Hide the Event: Displays events. The displayed event can be shown or hidden by
a click.
E121115E.ai
Display the operation Records of Other Users: Displays the operation records of all users of the
HISs within the equalization scope. The displayed operation records can be shown or hidden by
a click.
E121116E.ai
Previous: Backwards the display on the Historical Messages pane towards the earlier records
according to the timestamps. This will scroll the half of the displayed contents in the Historical
Messages pane. This button becomes valid when the displayed data in the Historical Messages
pane are more than one page can hold.
E121117E.ai
Next: Forwards the display on the Historical Messages pane towards the later records according
to the timestamps. This will scroll the half of the displayed contents in the Historical Messages
pane. This button becomes valid when the displayed data in the Historical Messages pane are
more than one page can hold.

n Filter Pane
The main features of Filter pane are the same as in Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The
features specific to the Filter pane of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS are as follows:
• When started, the root of the tree is always selected.
• When the filter pane is running, the historical data of filter name, filter icon (*1) and the total
number of filtered historical data (*1) will be displayed.
• Icon blinking or emphases cannot be applied to the on unread alarms.
• Load Shedding cannot be set.
• On the context menu, only [Properties] is available.
*1: The filter icon and the total number of filtered historical data are displayed only when they are defined to be displayed on the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Historical Messages pane

The historical data are displayed in this pane. One record takes one line.
The features specific to the Historical Messages pane of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
are as follows:
• On title bar, the times specified in the searching criteria are displayed.
• The historical date cannot be eclipsed (by clicking Show Data Tree).
• Icon blinking or Emphases cannot be applied to the unread alarms.
• No context menu. Moreover, double clicking will not run the assigned tasks.
n Details Pane
When selecting a record in the Historical Messages pane, the attributes of the corresponding
historical record will be displayed. The displayed attributes are stored in the following file.
(CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS\database\Style\alarm-list.csv
User can define a user file. The user-defined file will be stored in the following path:
(CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS\database\Client\Config\<UserID>\alarm-list.csv
When choosing [Clear Details Pane] from menu bar or clicking [Clear Details Pane] on the
toolbar, the data displayed in the Historical Messages pane will be cleared and the report pane
will show its background color. For the records that do not have attribute, the above operations
will not show anything. Moreover, those records do not have memorandums either.
n Dynamic Filter Pane

The main features of Dynamic Filter pane are the same as in Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
However, the button for registering filters is not valid.
n Status Bar
On the Status bar, the following items are indicated:
• Help Messages: The simple descriptions about the menu items and buttons of the toolbar
are displayed as the help messages.
• Progress Bar: The progress of search the historical data is indicated by this progress bar.
• Search Criterion: When the filter is running, the searching criterion is displayed.

E12.11.3 Specification of Historical Data Display

The detailed specification of historical data display will be explained below.
n Style of Historical Messages pane

The historical data are displayed in the Historical Messages pane. If the historical data contain
too many records that cannot be displayed in one page, the pane can be scrolled.
Among the historical data, the Alarm, the Operation Record and Event can be separately
displayed or can be displayed together. For easily identify the different messages, the marks are
placed at the beginning of each message of Operation Records and Events. The name of the
marks for Operation Records and Events are different. The names are as follows:
E121118E.ai
Figure Mark for Operation Record
E121119E.ai
Figure Mark for Event
Moreover, in the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, the suppressed A&E messages are
displayed and the suppression marks are displayed at the beginning of the suppressed A&E
messages. The exclamation marks are displayed at the beginning of repeating alarms. If a
repeating alarm is also a suppressed alarm, the suppression mark will take precedence.
E121120E.ai
Figure Suppression Mark
n Historical Data Display and User Privilege (User Right)

Among the historical records, the alarm display is restricted by the privilege of the user that logon
the HIS. The operations records and events are not restricted so that all the operation records
and events of all users within the equalization scope of the HIS will be displayed. However, some
of the system alarm messages such as FCS start or FCS stop will be displayed on for the users
with proper privileges.

n Operation Records in Historical Data Display

The operation records for the operations on HIS and for the operations on CAMS for HIS are
displayed differently. The instances are as follows.
l Operation Record of Operations on HIS

An operation record for the operation on HIS contains the information of the operator. An example
of an operation record for the operation on HIS is as follows:
Table Operation Record for the Operation on HIS
Type Operation Message Display
System Operation Copy ALL Programs of FCS0101 All Program Copy Operation
FCS [ONUSER@HIS0124]
Process Operation Change Block Mode FIC001-1 Distillation Tower -1 Inlet Flow MAN
old=CAS [ONUSER@HIS0124]
E121121E.ai
l Operation Record of Operations on CAMS for HIS

The operation records for the operations on CAMS for HIS vary with different type of operations.
The recorded operations on CAMS for HIS are as follows:
Table Recorded Operations on CAMS for HIS
Operated Window Operation Instance Remarks
Operation on Ack Acknowledge, Acknowledge All
Message Monitor
Manual Reset Manual Reset, Manual Reset All
of CAMS for HIS
Suppression • Release suppression on Suppression
dialog box.
• Apply or release suppression on the
Suppression dialog box during function
check.
• Run Suppress command.
Shelving Drop an A&E message to Continuous
Shelf or One-Shot Shelf.
Resetting • Reset Continuous Shelf or One-Shot When resetting Continuous Shelf or
Shelving Shelf when alarms are shelved in the One-Shot Shelf, resetting the shelf
shelves. itself will be logged, and this will be
• Drag an A&E message from Continuous followed by the events of removing
Shelf or One-Shot Shelf and drop to filter all the A&E messages from the shelf.
pane.
Clear Shelf Clear Continuous Shelf or One-Shot Shelf.
AutoShelf Drop the records to Auto Shelf according
the filter.
Reset AutoShelf Reset Auto-Shelving
Commit Changes Save the settings for the Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS.
Operations on Downloading Download the change settings defined on
Configurator of the configurator of CAMS for HIS.
CAMS for HIS
E121122E.ai

The operation records for the operations on the CAMS for HIS are displayed with the attributes
of the A&E messages. Therefore, the operation records can be displayed together with alarms
and events. The operation records for the operations on the CAMS for HIS for HIS are shown as
follows:
Table Operation Records for the Operations on the CAMS for HIS
Operation Attribute Attribute Attribute Message Display
Timestamp HisUserName HisStnName
Timestamp.Server
Timestamp.Source
Ack Time User HIS Ack:User(ONUSER@HIS0124):PairKey
Manual Reset Time User HIS ManualRecover:User(ONUSER@HIS0124):
PairKey
Suppression Time User HIS SuppressionON:User(ONUSER@HIS0124):
Group(Group Name)
User HIS SuppressionOFF:User(ONUSER@HIS0124):
Group(Group Name)
Shelving Time User HIS Shelving:User(ONUSER@HIS0124):PairKey:
Shelf(Shelf Name):Timestamp
Resetting Shelving Time User HIS CancelShelving:User(ONUSER@HIS0124):
PairKey:Timestamp
Clear Shelf Time User HIS ResetShelving:User(ONUSER@HIS0124):
Shelf(Shelf Name)
AutoShelf Time User HIS AutoShelving:User(ONUSER@HIS0124):
Filter(Filter Name)
Reset AutoShelf Time User HIS CancelAutoShelf:User(ONUSER@HIS0124)
Commit Changes Send Time User HIS Load: User (ONUSER@HIS0124):
Version (version of database)
Downloading Send Time User HIS Load: User (ONUSER@HIS0124):
Version (version of database)
E121123E.ai

E12.11.4 Search Historical Data

How to search the historical data on the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
n Open Search Dialog Box

The criteria for searching historical data can be defined on the search dialog box. Choosing [Edit]
- [Search] from menu bar or clicking [Display the search dialog box] button from the toolbar may
open the search dialog box.
The setting items on the search dialog box are as follows:
• Date; All/ Specified date/Past
• Message Type; All/ Specify Message Type/ Specify Number (*OK)
• Occurrence Source; All/ Specify Occurrence Source
• User; All/ Specify User
• Arbitrary Character; No Check/ Check (* is available)
• Direction; Backward/ Forward
• Display; All/ Search
A search dialog box is shown below.
SearchDialog
Data Message Type Occurrence Souce User Arbitrary Character
Direction
All Backward
Specified Date Forward
between 2008/03/23 12:05:00

Display
and 2008/03/24 6:00:00
All
Past 5 Weeks
Search
Search Cancel
E131124E.ai
Figure Search Dialog Box of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
The criteria and setting items on the search dialog box can be defined in the same way as
searching the historical messages on the HIS historical report window.
SEE
ALSO For more information about searching the historical messages on the HIS historical report window, see the
following:
E8.2.3, “Searching for a Historical Message”
When starting Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS from the Product Control View, a BatchID is
automatically defined as the searching criterion.

l Searching Range by Specifying Date
A searching range can be defined according to the specified date and time, or time range.
l Search All A&E Messages Sent from PRM

On the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, searching can be performed for the A&E messages
sent from PRM through OPC A&E server. On the Message Type tab of Search dialog box, click
the [Specify Message Type] radio button and then check the [Asset Messages] option box. When
clicking the [Search] button, the PRM A&E messages or A&E messages categorized as Asset for
the type of alarms can be searched.
n Action of Other Panes During Searching

When searching starts, the selected messages in filter pane or in the Historical Messages pane
will be deselected. The display in the filter pane will become the default display, i.e., the display
as if the top filter is selected.
Clicking the [Cancel] button on the search dialog box, the search dialog box will be closed. And
the selected messages in filter pane or in the Historical Messages pane will be unchanged.
n If a Search Results in more than 10000 Matches

When a search resulted in more than 10000 matches, only 10000 matches can be displayed in
one page of Historical Messages pane. Choosing [View] - [Next] or [View] - [Previous] will scroll
the Historical Messages pane up or down for a half page. Thus 5000 messages either before or
after will be displayed to replace half of the previously displayed messages.
TIP
When a search result in 10000 matches, the displayed and the skipped records are not consistent though 10000
records will be displayed. For an example, if the searching criterion is defined with a past period, the matches
may be shown from the oldest to the newest. Consequently, the later parts of the historical data are discarded
due to overflow.
n Cannot Equalize Searching Criteria

The searching criteria of one HIS cannot be equalized to other HISs even though they are in the
same equalization range. The searching criteria can only be defined in the HIS that running the
Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS and handled by that HIS only.

E12.11.5 Filtering Historical Data

On the historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, the filters can be used for filtering the historical
data. The filters here are slightly different from the filters on the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS. The main differences will be explained below.
n Filtering
On the Historical Viewer, all the historical messages displayed in the Historical Messages pane
can be filtered.
In the historical Messages pane, the alarms, operation records and events are separately
displayed as the historical data.
l Filter Properties
The properties sheet of a filter on Filter pane can be opened by following operations:
1. Choose a filter in the Filter pane, and then right click the mouse.
A context menu will be displayed.
2. Click Properties on the context menu.
The Properties sheet selected filter will be displayed.
A Properties sheet of a filter is shown as follows:

'Process' properties
Filter Name Process
Description Process Alarm
Path /Process
Filter Type System Filter
Conditional expression True
and TypeOfAlarm = "Process"
OK
E121125E.ai
Figure A Properties Sheet of a Filter
The Properties sheet of a filter on the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is about the same with
the filters on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The only difference is the properties sheet
on Historical Viewer is not editable. Therefore, buttons for moving the filters or [Cancel] are not
available.

<E12.12 Function Check of CAMS for HIS> E12-144
E12.12 Function Check of CAMS for HIS

The Function Check displays A&E messages and simulates processing in the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The Function Check uses the dedicated tools Alarm Generator
and the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
This section explains how to operate the tools required for the Function Check and the
procedures of executing the Function Check.
IMPORTANT
The function check should be performed after the engineering works for the field control station
such as details of I/O modules or FCS configurations on the FCS builders.
n Purpose of the Function Check

The purpose of the Function Check is to verify that the operations of CAMS for HIS are proper for
the alarm system designs, and that designs of A&E messages are appropriate. It is not intended
for checking simple entry mistakes.
n Overview of the Function Check

In the Function Check, a test environment is launched separately from the environment where
CAMS for HIS actually runs, to simulate generation of A&E messages and process the alarms
with the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode). For the Function Check
environment, it is possible to copy and use the environment where CAMS for HIS actually runs.
The Function Check can be executed in parallel while actually running the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS on an existing system.
l Target A&E Messages of the Function Check

When the Function Check is executed, it operates on the following A&E messages:
• Process alarm messages of CENTUM VP
• Annunciator messages of CENTUM VP
• A&E messages via the OPC A&E server
l Items that can be Verified by the Function Check

In the Function Check, the following items are the main focus.
• Is the Shelving timeout setting appropriate?
• Is the logic of filter conditions consistent?
• Is the Load Shedding setting value appropriate?
• Suppression: Is the Suppression group range, etc. appropriate?
• User security: Are the operation authority and A&E Messages Receiving settings of the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, etc. appropriate?
• Configuration of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS: Is sorting of A&E messages
working properly? Are choices of fonts, colors, widths of columns and Details pane display
options appropriate for the operation and monitoring?

n Security in the Function Check

The scope of operation and monitoring for the HIS is determined by the HIS security settings
when the Function Check is executed.
n Operation Environment of the Function Check

The operation environment of the Function Check is shown below.
• Hardware Environment
Under the recommended hardware environment of CAMS for HIS, up to 1 GB disk space is
required for the Function Check environment.
• Software Environment
Same as recommended for CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For the operation environment of CAMS for HIS, see the following GS document:
“Operating Environment” in “LHS5100S Standard Builder Function” (GS 33M10D10-40E)

E12.12.1 Function Check Execution Task Flow

The tasks of the Function Check can basically be divided into a flow of tasks performed
mainly by personnel in charge of engineering and a flow of tasks performed by operators.
The difference between these tasks is whether or not Configurator of CAMS for HIS is
used or not.
This section shows each flow of tasks involved in execution of the Function Check.
SEE
ALSO To use Configurator of CAMS for HIS, it is necessary to specify the Download Master. For detail, see the
following:
“n System Configuration of CAMS for HIS” in E12, “Consolidated Alarm Management Software”
n Function Check Execution Task Flow for Personnel in Charge of

Engineering
The overview of the tasks involved in Function Check execution when Configurator of CAMS for
HIS is used is illustrated in the following flowchart.
Start
E12.6.1,
Start Configurator of CAMS for HIS
“Starting and Exiting Configurator of
CAMS for HIS.”
E12.12.3,
Start Alarm Generator
“Starting and Exiting Alarm Generator.”
Create/save A&E messages (simulation alarms) E12.12.5, “Creation of Scenarios”
E12.12.7,
Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
“Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of
(Function Check mode)
CAMS for HIS (Function Check Mode)”
Generate A&E messages (simulation alarms) E12.12.8,

“Execution of Function Check”
Verify operations/modify or change in the

Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS E12.12.8,
(Function Check mode) “Execution of Function Check”
Select [Commit change] to save the Function

E12.12.8,
Check results
Download definition files E12.12.8,

End
E121201E.ai
Figure Function Check Execution Task Flow for Personnel in Charge of Engineering

n Function Check Execution Task Flow for Operators

The overview of the tasks involved in Function Check execution when Configurator of CAMS for
HIS is not used is illustrated in the following flowchart.
Start
E12.12.3,
Start Alarm Generator
“Starting and Exiting Alarm Generator.”
Create/save A&E messages (simulation alarms) E12.12.5, “Creation of Scenarios”
E12.12.7,
Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
“Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS (Function Check Mode)”
E12.12.8,
Generate A&E messages (simulation alarms)
Verify operations/modify or change in the E12.12.8,

Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS “Execution of Function Check”
Select [Commit change] to save the Function E12.12.8,

Check results “Execution of Function Check”
End
E121202E.ai
Figure Function Check Execution Task Flow for Operations in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

E12.12.2 What is Alarm Generator?

Alarm Generator is a dedicated tool provided for the Function Check. This section
explains Alarm Generator.
n Alarm Generator Window

The Alarm Generator window is shown below.
Alarm Generator
File Edit Alarm Control
Scenari... Comment Scenari... #OPC Alarm

OPC2 OPC Alarm OPC
OPCAE,3,Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARDOMFCX.1 HIS0164,4,105,500,
CENTUM CENTUM CENTUM OPCAE,3,Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARDOMFCX.1 HIS0106,4,105,500,
Delay, 1000
OPCAE,3,Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARDOMFCX.1 HIS0164,4,105,500,
#Finish ...
Preparing DesignCheck environment. Please wait for a few moment ...

Preparing DesignCheck environment is ready.
A scenario file is selected. Line 1

E121203E.ai
Figure Alarm Generator Window
n Functions of Alarm Generator

The functions of Alarm Generator are explained below.
• Creating and saving A&E messages (simulation alarms)
This function creates and saves A&E messages (simulation alarms). Data files saved by this
function are called scenarios.
• Generating A&E messages (simulation alarms)
This function loads created scenarios and generates A&E messages (simulation alarms)
for testing. These A&E messages (simulation alarms) can only be displayed and processed
in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) started in the test
environment for the Function Check.
• Reflecting Function Check results
This function reflects modifications made during the Function Check in the environment
where CAMS for HIS actually runs.

E12.12.3 Starting and Exiting Alarm Generator

This section explains how to start and exit Alarm Generator
n How to Start Alarm Generator

Only one Alarm Generator can be started for each HIS. There are two methods for starting Alarm
Generator: Either Configurator of CAMS for HIS or from the Start menu.
l Starting from Configurator of CAMS for HIS

Users designing the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS and A&E messages can start Alarm
Generator from Configurator of CAMS for HIS. In this case, the privilege level of the logon user
can be selected when starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
In the following, it is shown how to start Alarm Generator from Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
1. Select [Program] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Configurator of CAMS for HIS] from [Start]
menu to start Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
2. From the menu bar of Configurator of CAMS for HIS, select [Tools] - [Alarm Generator].
Alarm Generator starts up.
SEE
ALSO For how to select users’ privilege levels for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode), see
the following:
“l When Alarm Generator is Started from Configurator of CAMS for HIS” in “n How to Start the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check Mode)” in E12.12.7, “Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS (Function Check Mode)”
l How to Start Alarm Generator from the Start Menu

Select [Program] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Alarm Generator of CAMS for HIS] from [Start]
menu to start Alarm Generator.
Alarm Generator starts up.
l Starting Multiple Alarm Generators

It is not allowed to start multiple Alarm Generators. If it is attempted to start another Alarm
Generator when Alarm Generator has already been running, a dialog box below appears:
Alarm Generator
Already started. Cannot start concurrently.
OK
E121204E.ai
Figure Error Dialog Box for Starting Multiple Alarm Generators
In this case, you either use the started Alarm Generator, or exit the started Alarm Generator and
then start it again for generating the simulation alarms.
If Alarm Generator has been started using the terminal service, the Function Check can only
be executed in the session where Alarm Generator was started up first. If it is attempted to start
another Alarm Generator, same dialog box appears.

n How to Exit Alarm Generator

In the following, it is explained how to exit Alarm Generator.
• Select the [Close] button of Alarm Generator.
• From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [File] - [Exit].
l Operations to Close Alarm Generator without Reflecting Changes

If it is attempted to close Alarm Generator without reflecting modifications/changes made during
the Function Check in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) in the
environment where CAMS for HIS actually runs, a dialog box below appears:
Alarm Generator
Any changes of the setting of CAMS message monitor will be lost if

exit without commit the changes. Do you want to commit the changes?
Yes No Cancel
E121206E.ai
Figure Error Dialog Box Indicating Changes are not Reflected
Click [Yes] to close Alarm Generator after reflecting the Function Check results. In this case,
Alarm Generator is closed after reflecting the Function Check results in the actual operation
environment of CAMS for HIS.
Click [No] to close Alarm Generator without reflecting the Function Check results. In this case,
Alarm Generator is closed without reflecting the Function Check results in the actual operation
environment of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For the operations to reflect changes, see the following:
“n Reflecting Changes” in E12.12.8, “Execution of Function Check”

E12.12.4 Layout of Alarm Generator

Alarm Generator consists of the following bars and panes.
• Menu Bar
• Toolbar
• Scenario Files Pane
• Scenario Details Pane
• Errors/Progress Pane
• Status Bar
These bars and panes explained individually.
n Appearance of Alarm Generator

The figure below shows the appearance of Alarm Generator.
Alarm Generator
Menu Bar
Toolbar
Scenari... Comment Scenari...
Scenario Files Pane Scenario Details Pane
Errors/Progress Pane
Status Bar
E121207E.ai
Figure Appearance of Alarm Generator

n Menu Bar
Operations available in Alarm Generator can be selected using the menu items in the menu bar.
A list of menu items is shown below.
Table Menu Items in Alarm Generator
Menu Description
File
New Creates a new scenario. The file extension is fixed to “.snr.”
Save... Saves a scenario.
Save as... Saves a scenario with a new name.
Delete... Deletes a scenario.
Commit change Reflects and saves settings changed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode) in the actual operation environment.
Exit Exits Alarm Generator.
Edit
Copy Selects a character string to be copied.
Cut Selects a character string to be cut.
Paste Pastes the selected character string.
Alarm Control
Check format Verifies that the format of the scenario specifications is correct.
Run... Generates A&E messages (simulation alarms).
Run a step Generates A&E messages (simulation alarms) for each line of a scenario.
Pause Pauses generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms).
Stop Stops generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms).
E121208E.ai
n Toolbar
The toolbar displays various buttons that are mostly equivalent to the menu items of the menu
bar.
E121209E.ai
Figure Toolbar of Alarm Generator
The toolbar buttons are explained below.
E121210E.ai
New: Creates a new scenario. The file extension is fixed to [.snr].
E121211E.ai
Save...: Saves a scenario.
E121212E.ai
Delete...: Deletes a scenario.

E121213E.ai
Commit change: Reflects and saves settings changed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode) in the actual operation environment.
E121214E.ai
Copy: Selects a character string to be copied.
E121215E.ai
Cut: Selects a character string to be cut.
E121216E.ai
Paste: Pastes the selected character string.
E121217E.ai
Run.../ Pause: Switches between generating/pausing A&E messages (simulation alarms) at

every click.
E121218E.ai
Stop: Stops generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms).
E121219E.ai
Run a step: Generates A&E messages (simulation alarms) for each line of a scenario.
E121220E.ai
Check format: Verifies that the format of the scenario specifications is correct.
n Scenario Files Pane

This pane displays a list of scenarios. Scenarios are saved in the following folder.
(CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS\ScenarioFiles

n Scenario Details Pane

If a scenario is selected in the Scenario Files Pane, this pane displays the details of the file in
conjunction with the selection. A&E messages (simulation alarms) are generated according to
the details in the file. The line defining the A&E message (simulation alarm) being generated
is highlighted in the pane. The displayed scenario is automatically scrolled as the processing
progresses, and this pane always shows the line defining the A&E message (simulation alarm)
being generated.
In the execution step where A&E messages (simulation alarms) are generated line by line, the
execution is started from the line immediately following the currently highlighted line. If no line is
highlighted, the execution is started from the top line.
During creation of a scenario, various conditions related to generation of A&E messages should
be entered directly in this pane. While editing a scenario, it is possible to edit details displayed in
this pane directly.
SEE
ALSO For the details of scenario information, see the following:
“n Detailed Scenario Definition” in E12.12.5, “Creation of Scenarios”
n Errors/Progress Pane
This pane displays the information of errors found in descriptions in a scenario.
This pane also displays the detailed information of A&E messages (simulation alarms) being
generated, if any.
l Displaying Error Information

Error information is displayed using the format of line number, column number, [error information],
[scenario information in erroneous line].
• Line number, column number
Indicates the line number and column number of the error in the Scenario file.
• Error information
Indicates the error description.
• Scenario information in erroneous line
Indicates the erroneous script in the Scenario file.
A display example of Error information is shown below.
Display example 1:
Line 13, column 1, [Simulated alarm type is not correct. Only “BlockProcessAlarm”,
“Annaciator”, “OPCAE” can be specified for the simulated alarm type.], [SystemAlarm, PID,
HI, SRALM, 10]
Display example 2:
Line 7, column 5, [The number of alarms to be generated is outside the range. Specify a
value in the range from 0 to 500.], [BlockProcessAlarm, PID, HI, SRALM, -10]

l Displaying Progress Information
The display format of progress information is different for process alarm messages/annunciator
messages of CENTUM VP and A&E messages acquired via the OPC A&E server.
Progress information of CENTUM VP’s process alarm messages/annunciator messages is

displayed in the following format.
Line number, alarm type, tag name, alarm status, alarm/recovery/re-alarm, control station
name, plant hierarchy name, alarm priority, alarm color
• Alarm type: BlockProcessAlarm or Annunciator
• Alarm/recovery/re-alarm: Either SALM, SRCV or SRALM
• Control station name: Control station name to which a tag belongs
• Plant hierarchy name: Project ID>plant hierarchy name (> is a single-byte space)
• Alarm priority: Alarm priority defined in Alarm Processing Table Builder
• Alarm color: Display color defined in Alarm Processing Table Builder
Display example:
Line 13, BlockProcessAlarm, PID.HI, SALM, FCS0101, P1 FCS0101 %DR0001S010101,
2, R
SEE
ALSO • For the details of alarm type and alarm/recovery/re-alarm, see the following:
“l Alarm Lines” in “n Detailed Scenario Definition” in E12.12.5, “Creation of Scenarios”
• For the details of alarm priority and alarm color, see the following:
E10.4, “Alarm Status Character String and Alarm Processing”
Progress information of A&E messages acquired via the OPC A&E server is displayed using the
following format.
Line number, alarm type, Route, Source, ConditionName, message
• Alarm type: Fixed to [OPCAE]
• Route: Transmission pathway of A&E messages
• Source: Message generation source
• ConditionName: Alarm status
• Message: Message character string
Display example:
Line 21, OPCAE, Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARDOMFCX.1 HIS0101, CASCADE.NPAS_PID.
pidcas2, HI, CASCADE.NPAS_PID.pidcas2 HI Alarm PV=80.00[%]
SEE
ALSO For the details of alarm type, route, source, ConditionName and messages, see the following:
“l Alarm Lines” in “n Detailed Scenario Definition” in E12.12.5, “Creation of Scenarios”
n Status Bar
This area displays which step in a scenario is being executed when an A&E message (simulation
alarm) is being generated. It is displayed when the Scenario Details Pane is selected.

E12.12.5 Creation of Scenarios

A scenario defines A&E messages (simulation alarms) to be generated. This section
explains the procedure of scenario creation along with precautions that should be
observed during the creation.
n Scenario Format
When creating a scenario, simply write the A&E messages (simulation alarms) to be generated,
the intervals at which they are generated, how many times they are generated, as well as
other conditions related to generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms) in text format, and
separate each condition with commands. Files are saved in CSV format.
Conditions written in a scenario are displayed in the Scenario Details Pane of Alarm Generator.
An example of a scenario is shown below. This example shows a list of definitions for generation
of CENTUM VP’s process alarm messages.
Management Information Line Ver001, CENTUM, comment
Comment Line #CENTUM Process Alarm Scenario
Alarm Lines BlockProcessAlarm, PID, HI, SALM, 10, 500

Delay Time Line Delay, 2000
BlockProcessAlarm, PID, HI, SRALM,,
BlockProcessAlarm, PID, HI, SRCV,,
BlockProcessAlarm, PID21, LL, SALM,,
Loop Start Lines Loop, 2, 300

BlockProcessAlarm, PID31, HI, SRALM,,
BlockProcessAlarm, PID31, HI, SRCV,,
BlockProcessAlarm, PID51, LL, SRALM, 2, 400
BlockProcessAlarm, FC_SW_VAP3, LO, SALM,,
Loop End Lines LoopEnd
E121221E.ai
Figure Scenario Example
n Procedure of Scenario Creation

A scenario can be created using Alarm Generator or any other editor. This section explains the
procedure for creating a scenario using Alarm Generator.
TIP
Creation, edition, saving and deletion of scenarios are disabled during generation of A&E messages (simulation
alarms).

l Creating a New Scenario
1. From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [File] - [New]. Alternatively, click the [New]
button in the toolbar. The Choose Scenario Type dialog box appears.
Choose Scenario Type
Scenario Type CENTUM Process AI
OK Cancel
E121222E.ai
Figure Choose Scenario Type Dialog Box
2. Select [Scenario Type] in this dialog box to display the pull-down menu and select the type
of target A&E messages to be used in the Function Check.
There are following two options:
• CENTUM Process Alarm: Process alarm/Annunciator messages of CENTUM VP
• OPC Alarm: A&E messages via the OPC A&E server
3. Click [OK].
Alarm Generator appears. At this point, nothing is written in the Scenario Details Pane yet.
4. Write the scenario text directly in the Scenario Details Pane.
SEE
ALSO For definitions related to scenarios, see the following:
“n Detailed Scenario Definition”
5. From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [File] - [Save...]. Alternatively, click the
[Save...] button in the toolbar.
The dialog box for saving a scenario appears.
SaveAs
Scenario TEST
Comment Test Scenario for PJT01
OK Cancel
E121223E.ai
Figure Dialog Box for Saving Scenarios
6. Enter text in the [Scenario] and [Comment] fields. The [Scenario] must be a valid MS-
Windows file name. The [Comment] can be any character string of up to 64 single-byte
characters.
7. Click [OK].
The scenario is saved and the file information is displayed at the top of the Scenario Files
Pane.
Click [Cancel] to cancel saving.

l Editing Scenarios
1. Select a file to be edited in Alarm Generator’s Scenario Files Pane.
The information in the selected scenario is displayed in the Scenario Details Pane.
2. Modify the scenario directly in the Scenario Details Pane.
SEE
ALSO For definitions related to scenarios, see the following:
“n Detailed Scenario Definition”
3. To overwrite a file, select [File] - [Save...] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator.
Alternatively, click the [Save...] button in the toolbar.
To save a file with a different name, select [File] - [Save as...] from the menu bar of Alarm
Generator.
A dialog box for saving scenarios appears and the information of the original file is displayed
in the [Scenario] and [Comment] fields.
4. When overwriting a file, only [Comment] can be edited. Enter [Comment] as required. The
[Comment] can be any character string of up to 64 single-byte characters.
When saving a file under a different name, both [Scenario] and [Comment] can be edited.
Enter [Scenario], and enter [Comment] if necessary. The [Scenario] must be a valid MS-
Windows file name. The [Comment] can be any character string of up to 64 single-byte
characters.
5. Click [OK].
The scenario is saved and the file information is displayed at the top of the Scenario Files
Pane.
Click [Cancel] to cancel saving.
l Confirmation of Saving Scenario being Created

If it is attempted to create a new scenario before the scenario currently being created is saved,
the following confirmation dialog box appears.
Alarm Generator
Do you want to save changes to the scenario before closing?
Yes No Cancel
E121224E.ai
Figure Confirmation Dialog Box for Saving Scenario
Click [Yes] to save the scenario currently being created. The subsequent operations are the
same as step 3 and onward of the operations for editing scenarios.
Click [No] to discard the scenario currently being created. The subsequent operations are the
same as the operations for creating a New Scenario.
Click [Cancel] if the scenario should be neither saved nor discarded.

l Deleting Scenarios
1. Select a file to be deleted in Alarm Generator’s Scenario Files Pane.
2. From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [File] - [Delete...]. Alternatively, click the
[Delete...] button in the toolbar.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
3. Click [Yes].
The selected scenario is deleted and the corresponding file information is deleted from the
Scenario Files Pane.
Click the [No] button to cancel deletion of a scenario.
n Precautions when Creating Scenarios

The following precautions shall be observed when creating scenarios.
l Existence of A&E Messages from Different Generation Sources

It is not allowed to describe process alarm messages/annunciator messages of CENTUM VP
and A&E messages acquired via the OPC A&E server in a single scenario.
l Maximum Number of Lines in a Scenario: 300 Lines

No more than 300 lines, including spaces and comments, can be written/read to/from a single
scenario using Alarm Generator. If a scenario containing more than 300 lines is created using
another editor and loaded with Alarm Generator, only 300 lines will be displayed in the Scenario
Details Pane. A message dialog box below appears:
Alarm Genarator
A scenario file is limited to 300 lines (empty lines and comment text lines are included.)
OK
E121225E.ai
Figure Message Dialog Box Displayed when the Number of Scenario Lines Exceeds 300
l Maximum Number of Scenarios: 100

Scenarios are saved in the following folder.
(CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS\ScenarioFiles
The number of scenarios saved in this folder can be up to 100. If 101 or more files are saved, the
Scenario Files Pane displays up to 100 scenarios starting from the newest.
If it is attempted to create and save more than 100 scenarios using Alarm Generator, a message
dialog box below appears:
Alarm Generator
The number of scenario files exceeds the limit. Do you want to delete the existing files?
Yes No
E121226E.ai
Figure Message Dialog Box Displayed when the Number of Scenarios Exceeds 100

In this case, decrease the number of scenarios by deleting existing scenarios or moving
scenarios to other folders. The procedure for deleting existing scenarios is shown below.
1. Click [Yes] in the message dialog box displayed when the number of scenarios exceeds
100.
The Delete Scenario dialog box appears.
Delete Scenario
Select Files to Delete.
Scenario Name Comment Scenario Type
CENTUM CENTUM CENTUM
COPY (10) of CENT... CENTUM CENTUM
COPY (10) of Copy o... CENTUM CENTUM
COPY (10) of Copy o... opcAlarm OPC
COPY (10) of Copy o... comment CENTUM
COPY (10) of opcAla... opcAlarm OPC
COPY (10) of Right comment CENTUM
COPY (11) of Copy o... opcAlarm OPC
COPY (11) of CENT... opcAlarm OPC
Delete Cancel
E121227E.ai
Figure Delete Scenario Dialog Box
2. In the Delete Scenario dialog box, check the boxes of scenarios to be deleted.
3. Click the [Delete] button.
The selected scenarios are deleted and the corresponding file information is deleted from
the Scenario Files Pane. Afterward, new scenarios are saved automatically.
Click the [Cancel] button to close the Delete Scenario dialog box without deleting scenarios.
If [No] is clicked in the message dialog box displayed when the number of scenarios exceeds
100, the scenario deletion processing is stopped.
l A&E Message Generation Time Accuracy: 100 ms

The shortest time interval at which A&E messages (simulation alarms) can be generated is
100 ms. If a time interval shorter than 100 ms is specified, operations cannot be guaranteed to
proceed exactly as defined in the scenario.
Depending on the CPU load, up to 100 ms delays may occur. For example, time interval is set
to generate A&E messages (simulation alarms) at 220 ms, the generation intervals of A&E
messages (simulation alarms) may vary in the range from 220 ms to 320 ms, depending on the
CPU load in reality.

n Detailed Scenario Definition

This section explains details of conditions defined in scenarios.
l Management Information Line

This line contains information of a scenario. The definition syntax and meaning of each item are
shown below.
Definition syntax: Scenario version, alarm category, scenario comment
Table Conditions Written in Management Information Line
Condition Explanation Definition example
Scenario version Fixed to [Ver001] Ver001
Alarm category Distinguishes between CENTUM VP’s A&E messages or A&E messages CENTUM
acquired via the OPC A&E server
• Fixed to [CENTUM] in the case of CENTUM VP’s A&E messages
• Fixed to [OPC] in the case of A&E messages acquired via the OPC
A&E server
Scenario comment Write a brief explanation of the scenario. Any character string up to Operation check of
64 single-byte characters can be entered. filter 01
E121228E.ai
Among the conditions written in the management information line, [Scenario version] and [Alarm
category] are automatically filled in when creating scenarios using Alarm Generator. There is no
need for the users to fill in these fields. Moreover, the text entered in [Comment] of the dialog box
for saving a scenario will be displayed in [Scenario comment].
TIP
Conditions in these fields are not displayed in Alarm Generator’s Scenario Details Pane, but a scenario cannot
be loaded if there is any erroneous information in these fields. Be careful when creating scenarios using other
editors.
l Comment Line
This line is a scenario comment. By typing [#] at the line start, the information in the line is treated
as comment and has no influence on creation and generation of simulation alarms.

l Alarm Lines
• Definition syntax of process alarm messages of CENTUM VP
This line contains information of process alarm messages of CENTUM VP. The definition
syntax and meaning of each item are explained below.
Definition syntax: Alarm type, tag name, alarm status, alarm/recovery/re-alarm, number of
repetitions, generation intervals
Table Conditions to be Written in Alarm Lines - CENTUM VP’s Process Alarm Messages
Alarm type Fixed to [BlockProcessAlarm] in the case of CENTUM VP’s process alarm BlockProcessAlarm
messages.
If the alarm type is omitted, it is treated as “BlockProcessAlarm.”
Tag name Specify a tag name of a function block. PID
When multiple projects are involved, it is possible to specify tag names PID@P2
of other projects using the syntax of [tab name@project ID].
Alarm status Define an alarm status. Specify alarm status characters such as HI and HI
LO.
Alarm/recovery/ Specify whether alarm, recovery or re-alarm applies. SALM
re-alarm • [SALM] in the case of alarm generation
• [SRCV] in the case of alarm recovery
• [SRALM] in the case of re-alarm
Number of repetitions Define the number of repetitions if alarms are generated repeatedly. 10
Any number in the range from 0 to 500 can be defined. If the number of
repetitions is omitted, it is treated as 1 (no repetition).
If 0 is defined, the corresponding A&E message is not generated at all.
Generation intervals Define the intervals at which alarms are generated repeatedly. The unit 500
is [ms]. The intervals can be defined in the range from 0 to 1800000
(30 minutes) (*1). If the generation interval is omitted, it is treated as
1000 (1 second).
E121229E.ai
*1: If a time interval shorter than 100 ms is specified, operations cannot be guaranteed to proceed exactly as defined in the scenario.
In this case, the actual generation intervals will vary depending on the CPU load.

• Definition syntax of CENTUM VP’s annunciator messages
Write information of CENTUM VP’s annunciator messages in this line. The definition syntax
and meaning of each item are explained below.
Definition syntax: Alarm type, annunciator name, alarm location, alarm/recovery/re-alarm,
number of repetitions, generation intervals
Table Conditions Written in Alarm Line - CENTUM VP’s Annunciator Messages
Alarm type Fixed to [Annunciator] in the case of CENTUM VP’s annunciator Annunciator
messages (*1).
If the alarm type is omitted, it is treated as “BlockProcessAlarm.”
Annunciator name Specify a tag name or element number of an annunciator. ANN – LOW01
%AN0123S010101
Alarm location Specify a sequence table or a SEBOL tag name that generates ST16-A01
annunciator messages. If the tag name above is omitted, it is treated as
if messages are generated from the plant hierarchy name to which the
annunciator belongs.
Alarm/recovery/ Specify whether alarm, recovery or re-alarm applies. SALM
re-alarm • [SALM] in the case of alarm generation
• [SRCV] in the case of alarm recovery
• [SRALM] in the case of re-alarm
Generation intervals Define the intervals if alarms are generated repeatedly. The unit is [ms]. 500
The intervals can be defined in the range from 0 to 1800000 (30 minutes)
(*1). If the generation interval is omitted, it is treated as 1000 (1 second).
E121230E.ai
*1: Normal annunciators and annunciators with data are not distinguished. For this reason, e.g., message No.0120 is generated
even in cases where message No.0122 should be generated under normal circumstances.

• Definition syntax of A&E messages via the OPC A&E server
Write information of A&E messages via the OPC A&E server in this line. The definition
syntax and meaning of each item are explained below.
Definition syntax: Alarm type, NewState, Route, Source, EventType, EventCategory,
Severity, ConditionName, NumEventAttrs, EventAttributes0, EventAttributes1,
EventAttributes2, EventAttributes3, EventAttributes4, Message, Number of repetitions,
Generation intervals
Table Conditions Written in Alarm Line of A&E Messages Acquired via the OPC A&E Server
Alarm type Fixed to [OPCAE] in the case of A&E messages via the OPC A&E server. OPCAE
If the alarm type is omitted, it is treated as “OPCAE.”
NewState Specify alarm generation/alarm recovery. (*1) 3
• Alarm generation: 3
• Alarm recovery: 1
Route Specify the pathway of A&E messages transmission. The specification Yokogawa.Exaopc
format is shown below. AESTARDOMFCX.
ProgramIDnComputerName 1 HIS0101
n: space
Source Specify a messages generation source. CASCADE.NPAS_
PID_pidcas2
EventType Specify an event type. 1
• Simple event: 1
• Condition event: 4
EventCategory The value depends on the OPC vendor. 105
In the case of STARDOM, the process alarm is [105].
Sevirity Specify the severity using a numerical value in the range from 1 to 1000. 500
The greater the value, the severer the alarm.
ConditionName Define an alarm status. Specify alarm status characters such as HI and HI
LO.
NumEventAttrs The value depends on the number of OPC vendor attributes. 5
Valid values must be in the range from [YOPC.EventAttributes1] to
[Number of attributes].
A setting of [5] process alarms is appropriate in case of STARDOM.
EventAttributes0 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It is a message number in the 192
case of STARDOM.
EventAttributes1 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It is an IP address in the case of 10.0.139.73
STARDOM.
EventAttributes2 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It is alarm generation time in the 2008/03/23 13:31:45
case of STARDOM.
EventAttributes3 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It indicates milliseconds of the 514
alarm generation time in the case of STARDOM.
EventAttributes4 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It is a node identifier in the case FCN01
of STARDOM.
Message The character string depends on the OPC vendor. CASCADE.NPAS_
PID_pidcas2 HI
Alarm PV=80.00[%])
Generation intervals Define the intervals at which alarms are generated repeatedly. The unit 500
is [ms]. The intervals can be defined in the range from 0 to 1800000
(30 minutes) (*2). If the generation interval is omitted, it is treated as
1000 (1 second).
E121231E.ai
*1: Can be set when EventType is a condition event.


TIP
For generating A&E messages acquired via the OPC A&E server require the professional knowledge on OPC
A&E server interface.
l Delay Time Line

Specify a time period during which simulation alarms are not generated during A&E message
(simulation alarms) generation processing.
The definition syntax and meaning of each item are explained below.
Syntax: Delay, time period
Example: Delay, 300
The unit is [ms]. It can be specified in the range from 0 to 1800000 (30 minutes) (*1). If the delay
time is omitted, it is treated as 1000 (1 second).
l Loop Start Lines

The start of processing loops A&E message (simulation alarm) generate is defined in these lines.
The definition syntax and meaning of each item are explained below.
Syntax: Loop, number of loop executions, loop execution time intervals
Example: Loop, 2, 300
For the number of loop executions, define how many times a loop is repeated. The valid range is
from 0 to 500. If the number of loop executions is omitted, it is treated as 1 (no repetitions).
For the loop execution time interval, define the interval of loop repetitions. The unit is [ms]. The
interval can be specified in the range from 0 to 1800000 (30 minutes) (*1). If the loop execution
time interval is omitted, it is treated as 1000 (1 second).
l Loop End Lines

The end of processing loops A&E message (simulation alarm) generate is defined in these lines.
Syntax: LoopEnd

E12.12.6 Functions of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

(Function Check Mode)
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, which is used in the Function Check, is able to
simulate the operation and monitoring environment where CAMS for HIS actually runs
and perform the same processing operations. However, there are certain functions and
operations unique to the Function Check, which are explained in this section.
n External Appearance of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

(Function Check Mode)
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) uniformly uses red for the
background color of title of each pane, so that it is easily distinguished from the actually running
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Specifications of the Message Monitor of CAMS of HIS (Function

Check Mode)
The database of CAMS for HIS used in the Function Check is completely independent from
the databases running on the actual machines. Even when the Function Check is performed
while running the actual machines, the A&E messages (simulation alarms) will never affect
the operations of CAMS for HIS (where the actual operation is being executed) or HIS. These
specifications are explained below.
• No audible sound for the simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms).
• Do not show the simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms) on System Message banner
of HIS.
• Do not blink the icons of simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms) on System Message
banner of HIS.
• The LED on the operation keyboard are not affected by the simulated A&E messages
(simulation alarms).
• Pressing ACK key on the operation keyboard will not acknowledge the simulated A&E
messages (simulation alarms).
• Faceplate view and tuning view will not change to alarm status for the simulated A&E
• Related items in graphic view will not change to alarm status for the simulated A&E
• The icons of the related windows in the Browser bar will not indicate alarm status for the
simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms).
• Acknowledging the simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms) will not affect the alarm
status on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Simulated Shelving and Suppression performed during function check on Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS will not affect the actual shelving and suppression of the A&E messages on
the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• The simulations performed on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS during function check will
not be recorded as the historical operation records.
• The simulated the A&E messages (simulation alarms) will not be printed out.

l Different from Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode)
The menu items on the menu bar of Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS at Function Check mode
and at Normal mode are slightly different.
At Function Check mode, an additional menu item [Suppression...] is available on the [Tools]
menu of Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. This menu item can be used to call the Suppress/
Unsuppress dialog box for functional check.
n Suppression
SEE
ALSO For more information about Suppression in the Function Check mode, see the following:
“l Suppression in the Function Check Mode” in “n Verification of Display and Processing of A&E
Messages” in E12.12.8, “Execution of Function Check”

E12.12.7 Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of CAMS for

HIS (Function Check Mode)
This section explains how to start and exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode) in the Function Check.
n How to Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check
Mode)
Only one Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) can be started for each HIS
from Alarm Generator. However, the procedure of starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode) also varies depending on how Alarm Generator is started.
The procedure of starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) is
explained below.
l When Alarm Generator is Started from Configurator of CAMS for HIS

1. Select [Alarm Control] - [Run...] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click
the [Run.../ Pause] button in the toolbar.
The Choose user dialog box appears.
Choose user
User TESTUSER
OFFUSER
ONUSER
ENGUSER
PROG
TESTUSER
OK Cancel
E121232E.ai
Figure Choose User Dialog Box
2. In the Choose user dialog box, select the privilege level of the users of the Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) and click [OK].
Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) with the selected user.
TIP
It is possible to select another User when restarting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check
mode).
l When Alarm Generator is Started from the Start Menu

Select [Alarm Control] - [Run...] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the
[Run.../ Pause] button in the toolbar.
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) is started with User
corresponding to the HIS security settings of the HIS that performs the Function Check.
l Starting Multiple Message Monitors of CAMS for HIS (Function Check Mode)
It is not allowed to start multiple Message Monitors of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).

n How to Exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check
Mode)
In the following, it is explained how to exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function
Check mode).
• Select the [Close] button of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
• From the menu bar of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode), select
[File] - [Exit].
• Select the [Close] button of Alarm Generator.

E12.12.8 Execution of Function Check

The Function Check is used to generate A&E messages (simulation alarms) with Alarm
Generator and simulate how A&E messages are acquired, displayed and processed in the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
Tasks performed in the Function Check are explained below.
• Scenario format check
• Generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms)
• Verification of A&E message display and processing
• Reflection of changes
This section explains the tasks involved in the Function Check and the execution
procedure.
n Scenario Format Check

This task is performed in Alarm Generator.
It is performed to verify that there are no contradictions or errors in the conditions defined in the
Scenario Details Pane with respect to the scenario format. The scenario format is verified in the
following cases.
• When [Alarm Control] - [Check format] are selected from the menu bar of Alarm Generator
• When the [Check format] button in the toolbar is clicked
• When A&E messages (simulation alarms) are generated from Alarm Generator
If any errors are detected, the error information is displayed in the “Errors/Progress Pane.” The
generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms) is stopped if starting to generate the A&E
n Generation of A&E Messages (Simulation Alarms)

This task is performed in Alarm Generator.
l Execution
This task generates A&E messages (simulation alarms) according to the conditions defined in the
Scenario Details Pane.
Select [Alarm Control] - [Run...] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the
[Run.../ Pause] button in the toolbar.
TIP
This function is invalid if the [Run...] processing has already been started.

l Step Execution
This task generates A&E messages (simulation alarms) line by line according to the conditions
defined in the Scenario Details Pane. If step execution is resumed after messages have been
generated until the last line of a scenario, the step execution is continued by returning to the
start line of the scenario. If execution is switched to [Run...] during step execution, generation is
started from the line immediately following the currently highlighted line in the Scenario Details
Pane.
From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [Alarm Control] - [Run a step]. Alternatively, click
the [Run a step] button in the toolbar.
TIP
This function is invalid if the [Run...] processing has already been started.
l Stop
This function stops generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms).
Select [Alarm Control] - [Stop] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the
[Stop] button in the toolbar.
TIP
This function is valid during [Run...], [Pause] or [Run a step] processing.
l Pause
This function pauses generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms). Select [Alarm Control]
- [Pause] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the [Run.../ Pause] button in
the toolbar.
If [Run...] or [Run a step] is resumed, generation is started from the line immediately following the
line currently highlighted in the Scenario Details Pane.
TIP
This function is valid during [Run...] processing and is invalid during [Run a step] execution.
l Operations when No Scenario Data Exists

If it is attempted to execute [Run...] when there is no scenario data, the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) without displaying any A&E messages (simulation alarms)
starts.

n Verification of Display and Processing of A&E Messages

This task is performed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
It simulates display and processing of A&E messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode). The operations that can be performed in the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS (Function Check mode) are basically the same as those performed in the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode). However, Suppression operations are different
between the Normal mode and the Function Check mode.
The Suppression operations in the Function Check mode are explained below.
l Suppression in the Function Check Mode

The procedure of Suppression operations is shown below. The start and release operations of
Suppression are the same.
1. Choose [Tools] - [Suppression...] from the menu bar on the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode).
The Suppress/Unsuppress dialog box appears.
Suppress/Unsuppress
Suppress Unsuppress OK
Group Name | Cancel
E121234E.ai
Figure Suppress/Unsuppress Dialog Box in the Function Check Mode
2. Enter the alarm group name for which suppression is started or released (suppress or
unsuppress) in [Group Name].
3. Check either the [Suppress] or [Unsuppress] radio button and click the [OK] button.
4. Check the Suppression operations in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function
Check mode).
n Reflecting Changes
This task is performed either in Configurator of CAMS for HIS or Alarm Generator.
This task reflects the changes/modifications made during simulating display and processing
of A&E messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) to the
environment where CAMS for HIS actually runs. Note that the method of reflecting changes
to the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode) depends on how Alarm Generator is
started.
TIP
During function check, if the current HIS user logs out and another HIS user logs in, the changes performed
during function check cannot be committed due the inconsistent user.

In the following, it is explained how to reflect changes/modifications made during the Function
Check.
l Method of Reflecting Changes from Configurator

When Alarm Generator is started from Configurator of CAMS for HIS, reflect changes in the
following manner.
1. Select [File] - [Commit change] from the menu bar on the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode) to save the settings for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode). Alternatively, click the [Commit change] button in the toolbar.
2. When the Function Check is completed, select [File] - [Commit change] from the menu bar
of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the [Commit change] button in the toolbar.
It is not necessary to close Alarm Generator and the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode) afterward.
3. Select [Program] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Configurator of CAMS for HIS] from the
[Start] menu to start Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
4. Perform a download operation from Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For how to download from Configurator of CAMS for HIS, see the following:
“l Downloading Files” in “n Download” in E12.6.4, “Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS”
5. Log on to the HIS as the same user who performed the Function Check.
6. Open the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode).
The settings changed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode)
become valid in the actual operation environment as well.
l Reflecting Changes Directly to the Actual Operating Environment

When Alarm Generator is started from the Start menu, the changes are reflected in the following
way.
1. Select [File] - [Commit change] from the menu bar on the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode) to save the settings for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode). Alternatively, click the [Commit change] button in the toolbar.
2. When the Function Check is completed, select [File] - [Commit change] from the menu bar
of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the [Commit change] button in the toolbar.
It is not necessary to close Alarm Generator and the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode) afterward.
3. Open the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode).
The settings changed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode)
become valid in the actual operation environment as well.

E12.12.9 Messages Displayed During the Function Check

This section explains messages displayed in relation to the Function Check.
n Messages Related to Alarm Generator

The following messages may be displayed in relation to Alarm Generator.
Table Messages Displayed at Start
Message Cause Action
Already started. Cannot start It is attempted to start another Alarm Start only one Alarm Generator for each
concurrently. Generator when Alarm Generator is HIS.
already running.
If the terminal services are used,
the Alarm Generator may already
be used by other sessions.
The list cannot be displayed There are errors in the scenario’s Check the scenario’s management
because some scenario files management information line. information line.
contain illegal data.
The number of scenario files The number of scenarios saved in Save up to 100 scenarios in this folder.
exceeds the limit. Only the latest (CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS\ Decrease the number of scenarios by
100 files are listed. ScenarioFiles exceeds 100. deleting existing scenarios or moving
scenarios to other folders.
E121235E.ai
Table Messages Displayed at Closing

Any changes of the setting of After changing settings in the Message Refer to “ Operations to Close Alarm
CAMS message monitor will be Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Generator without Reflecting Changes”
lost if exit without commit the Check mode), it is attempted to close in “ How to Exit Alarm Generator”
changes. Do you want to commit Alarm Generator without reflecting the in E12.12.3, “Starting and Exiting Alarm
the changes? changes. Generator.”
Alarm generator can not exit Exiting Alarm Generator while the De-energize the simulated A&E
when sending alarm! simulated A&E messages (simulation messages (simulation alarms) first and
alarms) is energized. then exit.
You cannot delete files in Files in the Function Check Delete them manually.
function check environment. environment cannot be deleted.
Any changes of the setting of It is attempted to close Alarm Refer to “ Procedure of Scenario
CAMS message monitor will be Generator without saving newly Creation” in E12.12.5,
lost if exit without commit created/edited scenarios. “Creation of Scenarios.”
the changes. Do you want to
commit the changes?
E121236E.ai
Table Messages Displayed at Opening a Scenario

Cannot find the specified scenario A scenario displayed in the Scenario Check that the corresponding file is saved
file. Check if the scenario file has Files Pane is not found. in (CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS\
been deleted. The corresponding file may have been ScenarioFiles.
deleted manually after starting Alarm
Generator.
Failed to open the scenario file. There are errors in the scenario’s Check the scenario’s management
Check the file format and file management information line. information line.
version.
A scenario file is limited to 300 The scenario script contains 300 lines. A scenario file should not contain more
lines (empty lines and comment than 300 lines.
text lines are included.)
E121237E.ai

Table Messages Displayed at Saving Scenarios
The number of scenario files The number of scenarios saved in Save up to 100 scenarios in this folder.
exceeds the limit. Do you want to (CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS\ Decrease the number of scenarios by
delete the existing files? ScenarioFiles exceeds 100. deleting existing scenarios or moving
scenarios to other folders.
Enter the scenario name. No scenario name is entered. Enter the scenario name.
The scenario file name cannot Illegal characters are included in the Enter the scenario name again.
contain any of the following illegal scenario name.
characters: ? / \ * < > : “ @.
Enter [Comment]. The [Comment] was not entered in the Enter a comment.
dialog box for saving scenarios.
The comment text should be no The number of characters entered in The [Comment] must be entered as a
more than 64 characters. the [Comment] field in the dialog box character string of up to 64 single-byte
for saving scenarios exceeds 64. characters.
Failed to save the file. The file cannot be saved. The login Check the user privilege level. Check also
HIS user does not have the operation whether the scenario has already been
authority. opened or is read only.
The file already exists. Replace Although it is attempted to save the Continue processing as is to overwrite the
the existing file? file under another name, there is a file. Otherwise, change the file name and
possibility that an existing file name save the file.
was entered in [Scenario] in the dialog
box for saving scenarios.
E121238E.ai
Table Messages Displayed at Scenario Format Check

A scenario file is limited to 300 The number of lines in a scenario Check the definitions in the scenario.
lines (empty lines and comment exceeds 300. Only the first 300 lines
text lines are included.) are displayed in the Scenario Details
Pane.
Unknown identifier. A type of alarm that does not match
the alarm type selected when creating
a new scenario may have been
specified in the scenario.
The identifier of the loop to be The loop start (Loop)/end (LoopEnd)
ended does not match the statements written in a scenario do
identifier of the started loop. not comprise a valid pair.
The Number of Repeating is The number of generations written in
beyond the limit. the alarm lines of a scenario is invalid.
The interval of periodic execution The delay time written in the alarm
and the offset delay time should be lines of a scenario is invalid.
an integer between 0 and 1800000.
Illegal tag name. The tag name written in the alarm
lines of a scenario is invalid.
Illegal alarm name. The alarm name written in the alarm
lines of a scenario is invalid.
(Error: {2} is not applicable.) This message is displayed when an
You should use {3} after defining error is found in the scenario format
{3} with an integer that greater check.
than {0} but less than {1}.
E121239E.ai

Table Messages Displayed when Reflecting Changes
The file you want to download has Another user has reflected changes to Continue processing as is only in case to
been modified by another user. the target file before you do. overwrite the file.
Continue?
Current HIS user is not the same HIS changed user after starting HIS should not change user during
user when Design Check is Function check, this is not the user Function check.
started. Commit operation failed. started the Function Check.
Failed to commit the changes. Changes made in the Message Check the system configuration of CAMS
Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function for HIS and the system operation status.
Check mode) cannot be downloaded
to the actual operation environment.
E121240E.ai
Table Messages Displayed when Generating A&E messages (Simulation Alarms)

CAMS Server started in function This message notifies the start of the
check mode. CAMS for HIS server for the Function –
Check.
CAMS Message Monitor started This message notifies the start of the
in function check mode. Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS for –
the Function Check.
Failed to start the CAMS server in The database for the Function Check Check that a valid database exists in the
function check mode. has not been created. actual operation environment, from which
data required to set up the Function
Failed to start the CAMS Message Check environment will be copied.
Monitor in function check mode. Afterwards, generate A&E messages
(simulation alarms) again.
Failed to send simulation alarms. A&E messages (simulation alarms) Check the operation status of the CAMS
Do you want to continue? cannot be generated. for HIS server for the Function Check in
the Errors/Progress pane of Alarm
Generator.
Start sending simulation alarms. These messages notify generation of
A&E messages (simulation alarms).
Start sending simulation alarm by
steps.
Sending simulation alarms –
completed.
Stop sending simulation alarms.
Pause sending simulation alarms.
E1212341E.ai

<E12.13 Messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL> E12-177
E12.13 Messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL

CAMS for HIS can also handle the A&E messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL stations
(hereinafter referred to as the legacy stations) connected on the network through bus
converter (BCV). The unique specifications and actions regarding the messages of the
legacy stations will be explained in this section.
n View and Operate on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The displays of the process alarm messages of the legacy stations (not including the
annunciators) on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS are different from the CENTUM VP process
alarm messages.(*1) The main differences between the process alarm messages of the legacy
stations and the process alarm messages of CENTUM VP are as follows:
• The number of messages from legacy stations is limited to 20 per each tag.
• The alarm tree view (or eclipsing) is only grouped per each tag.
• Continuous Shelving is processed per each tag.
• Acknowledge operation is performed per each tag.
• For multiple alarm messages of one tag, the recovery messages not paired with all the
alarm messages, there is only one recovery message for the tag.
This feature is the same regardless if the CAMS for HIS is enabled or disabled.
• The message text does not contain the process data.
• The message with alarm status of [NR] , the messages with status of [CAL] and the
message with status of [AOF] may also be displayed.
*1: For displaying annunciator messages, up to ten messages per each tag can be displayed. Since each tag only has On and Off
messages, displaying messages by tag and displaying messages by alarm will have the same result. Moreover, the actions are
the same regardless if the CAMS for HIS is enabled or disabled.
l Display of Simultaneously Occurred Messages

When multiple messages occurred simultaneously, only the message with the highest alarm
priority will be displayed, and displayed as an unacknowledged message. This action of the
simultaneously occurred messages including the messages occurred at the timing of occurring or
recovering of a process alarm, releasing CAL (NCL) and AOF (AON) statuses.
l Message with Alarm Status of [NR]

When a message with the alarm status of [NR] is received, CAMS for HIS will delete the
other acknowledged messages of the same tag. If all the messages of the same tag are all
acknowledged, all the messages of the tag including the message with status of [NR] will be
deleted. If there is one or more than one messages of the tag is not yet acknowledged, the
message with alarm status of status to [NR] will be displayed as unacknowledged.
l Message with Data Status of [CAL] or [AOF]

The message may be displayed as an unacknowledged when an alarm status in [CAL] or [AOF]
of a function blocks changes.

<E12.13 Messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL> E12-178
n Display on Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

When displaying the process alarm message (not including the annunciators) of legacy stations
on Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, the message may be displayed twice. One is displayed
with the process data while the other is displayed without process data. The previous one is
for printout and the later one is for display on screen. Moreover, on Historical Message Report
window, only the messages with process data which are originally for printout are displayed.
n Actions of Configurator of CAMS for HIS

When importing the CENTUM VP engineering data to the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, the
alarm definitions regarding the tags of the legacy stations cannot be imported.
Moreover, it is not possible add new definitions for the A&E messages of the legacy stations on
the Alarm List tab, the attributes cannot be defined either.
n Action of Alarm Generator

The Alarm Generator cannot simulate the alarms of the legacy stations. If generate A&E
messages (simulation alarms) of legacy stations, will be displayed as those of CENTUM VP on
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
n HIS and CAMS for HIS Regarding Messages of Legacy Stations

On HIS operation and monitoring window, the process alarm messages of legacy stations will be
displayed regardless the alarm inhibition settings on CAMS for HIS.

<E13. Operation Keyboard> E13-1
E13. Operation Keyboard

This chapter describes the functions of the CENTUM operation keyboards and auxiliary
contact I/O provided on the console-type HIS. The keys on the operation keyboards are so
arranged that user can operate with a touch of a key in most operations.
n External Appearance of the Operation Keyboards

The following figures show the key arrangement of operation keyboards.
E130001E.ai
Figure Operation Keyboard (for Single-Loop Operation)
E130002E.ai
Figure Operation Keyboard (for Console Type HIS)

<E13.1 Mode Selection Key> E13-2
E13.1 Mode Selection Key

You can use a mode selection key to change user’s privilege level temporarily.
n Types of Mode Selection Keys

Two types of mode selection keys are available:
• Operation key
Allows user to switch between OFF and ON positions.
• Engineering key
Allows user to switch between OFF, ON, and ENG positions.
MODE MODE
OFF OFF
ON ON
ENG ENG
Operation key Engineering key

Switchable between Switchable between
OFF and ON OFF, ON, and ENG
E130101E.ai
Figure Mode Selection Keys
While any operation and monitoring window is open, you can change user’s privilege level using
either of the mode selection keys without performing a re-display operation after the change.
When CAMS for HIS is enabled, user can acknowledge alarms and messages regardless of the
position of the mode selection key.
SEE
ALSO • For details of the mode selection key, see the following:
“n Change Privilege Level on Operation Keyboard” in F3.3, “Privilege Level”
• For details of the CAMS for HIS, see the following:

<E13.2 Function Keys> E13-3
E13.2 Function Keys

There are function keys on the operation keyboard. User can assign predetermined
commands to function keys.
Each function key is provided with an LED and a label. The LED blinks to notify operator
of an alarm or to prompt operator to take a required action. The label is for showing an
assigned function.
You can assign commands to the function keys on the Function Key Assignment Builder
or in the Function Key tab sheet of the HIS Setup window.
LED Label
E130201E.ai
Figure Function keys (for Single-Loop Operation)
LED Label
E130202E.ai
Figure Function keys (for Console Type HIS)
TIP
If commands have been assigned to the same function keys on the Function Key Assignment Builder and in the
HIS Setup window, the setting that was made last takes effect.

n Commands Assignable to Function Keys

▼ Function
You can assign the following types of commands to the function keys.
The alphabetic character in the parentheses is the command character used on the Function Key
Assignment Builder for assigning the command.
• Call Window (O)
Calls up a specified operation and monitoring window. From specific types of operation
and monitoring windows, you can call up their associated builder by adding “BDR” as the
function parameter to the window name. (*1)
• Call Frame (G)
In full-screen mode, calls up a frame in the main window.
• Execute System Function Key (K)
Runs a predefined system function key command.
• Execute Command for the Specified Monitor (L)
In a multiple-monitor environment, executes a system function key command on a specified
monitor.
• Start/Stop/Resume Trend (T)
Starts, stops, or resumes batch trend data acquisition.
• Flash/Light/Turn OFF the LED (E)
Flashes, lights or turns off the LED on each function key.
• Execute a Program by File Name (F)
Runs a program of the specified name.
• Play/Repeat/Stop Multimedia File (X)
Plays a multimedia file of the specified name.
• Send Event to ActiveX Control (D)
Sends an event to the ActiveX control of a graphic view.
• Execute Panel set (P)
Calls up a predefined panel set.
• Call Window to Other Station (S)
Calls up an operation and monitoring window on a specified HIS.
• Clear Window on Other HIS (S)
Clears the windows displayed on a specified HIS.
• Call a faceplate on faceplate frame (C)
This command calls a faceplate on the right-hand side a faceplate frame of main window.
*1: “BDR” is only valid when the Standard Builder Function package or Configured Information Reference package is installed on the
HIS computer.
*2: This command can be used to call a built-in type faceplate only when it is defined with HIS Menu Editor. If this command is
defined for the other purposes (such as for a graphic push-button), this command will function in the same way the window call
command (O).

n LED Flashing Conditions

▼ LED
You can specify a name or window name as the condition for triggering flashing of LED on the
function key.
• A tag name or an annunciator message.
• A window name. (Graphic view, Process Alarm view, Operator Guide Message view,
System Alarm view)
Conditions for flashing
function key LED
Function Key Assignment Builder (Pjt:MYPJT Stn:HIS0124 File:FuncKey.edf)

Function No. Function LED

1
Specify
2
function
3
4
E130203E.ai
Figure Setting LED Flashing Conditions on the Function Key Assignment Builder
.SH HIS Setup
External Recorder OPC REPORT Process Management Multiple-Monitor

Station Printer Buzzer Display Window Swithcing Alarm Preset Menu
Equalize Function Keys Operation Mark Multimedia Browser Bar Trend Long-Term
16
17
18 LED setup
19
Set Delete
OK Cancel Apply Help
Conditions for flashing

function key LED
E130204E.ai
Figure Setting LED Flashing Conditions in the HIS Setup Window
If the function block or view specified as the condition for flashing LED changes to an alarm state,
the LED flashes. When operator acknowledges the alarm, the flashing LED changes to a lit LED.
If the alarm state returns to normal, the LED turns off.
When a window name is set as the condition, a parameter can be specified. Parameters can be
specified for the windows (Process Alarm View, System Alarm View, etc.) that accept parameters
when called up.
SEE
ALSO The LED flashing conditions are specified in the same format as that for calling up windows. For more
information, see the following:
Windows”

n Authority to Change Function Key Assignments

▼ Change Privilege
Whether or not the function key assignment can be changed in the HIS Setup window is
specified by setting one of the following security levels for each function key. Combination of the
security level set for the function key and the privilege level (S1, S2, S3) of the user determines if
the user can change the function assigned to the function key.
• General
• Important
• System operation
Relation of the security level of each function key and the privilege level of a logged-in user is as
follows:
• A user with privilege level S1 is allowed to change the function assignment of function keys
with “general” security level.
• A user with privilege level S2 is allowed to change the function assignment of function keys
with “general” and “important” security levels.
• A user with privilege level S3 is allowed to change the function assignment of any function
keys.
SEE
ALSO For user’s privilege level, see the following:
F3.3, “Privilege Level”
However, operation and monitoring related authorities for the function keys are defined as
follows:
• Monitoring: None
• Operation: Authority to change function assigned to the function keys
TIP
If you download the data defined on the Function Key Assignment Builder after the function key assignments
have been changed in the HIS Setup window, the assignments made by the builder will take effect.

E13.2.1 Assigning a Window Call

This section describes how to assign a window call to a function key on the Function Key
Assignment Builder.
Window call can be assigned to a function key by specifying a window name or a system
function key name; however, this section describes window call by window name. With
this method, you can also specify a window size, display position, and other parameters.
n Format
To assign a window call, use the following format on the Function Key Assignment Builder.
OΔWindow name [ΔFunction parameter] [Δ-Window size] [Δ=Display position]

[ ] : Can be omitted.
Δ : Space
SEE
ALSO The portion following the window name in the above format is the same as that for calling windows by entering
window names in the Name Input Toolbox in the Browser Bar. For details of calling up windows by specifying
window names, see the following:
Windows”
n Examples of Assigning a Window Call to a Function Key

Examples of assigning a window call to a function key on the Function Key Assignment Builder
are shown below.
Example: OΔFIC101ΔTUNΔ-SLΔ=+200+100
With this example, a Tuning View for the tag name “FIC101” is shown in large size, located at X-
coordinate 200 and Y-coordinate 100 on HIS desktop area. (*1)
*1: HIS Desktop area is determined by the display style of Browser Bar.
SEE
ALSO For details of HIS desktop area, see the following:
“n HIS Desktop Area” in E2.1, “Display Layout of HIS”
Example: OΔ.ALΔFCS0101Δ-SM
With this example, a Process Alarm View in medium size showing a list of process alarms raised
for station FCS0101 will be displayed.
TIP
When calling a window through HIS-TSE connections, the HIS-TSE server must be started and running. HIS-
TSE client cannot open HIS-TSE window without the HIS-TSE server.
SEE
ALSO For more information about HIS-TSE, see the following:
M8, “Server for Remote Operation and Monitoring Function”

E13.2.2 Assigning a Frame Call

In full-screen mode, you can call in the primary window a frame that shows multiple
views.
n Format
To assign a frame call to a function key, use the following format on the Function Key Assignment
Builder.
GΔFrame nameΔFrame calling parameter(s)

Δ : space
n Frame Name
Specify one of the frame names FRLT01 through FRLT05. Each frame name and the layout of
the frame are shown below.
FRLT01 FRLT02 FRLT03
View #1 View #1
View #1 View #2
View #2 View #2 View #3
FRLT04 FRLT05
View #1 View #2 View #1 View #2
View #3 View #3 View #4
E130205E.ai
n Frame Calling Parameter

Frame calling parameter specifies the views to be placed in a frame. Use the following format to
specify the parameter.
View number = Window name[Δfunction parameter]

[ ] : Can be omitted
Δ : Space
Separate the frame call parameters for the number of views to be displayed in a frame with a
comma, and quote the entire parameter string with single quotation marks (‘ ’) as shown below.
‘1= Window name [Δfunction parameter],2= Window name [Δfunction parameter], 3= Window
name [Δfunction parameter], .....’
Note1: You cannot use any single quotation mark in the frame calling parameter.
Note2: You cannot specify the size or display location of each view.
Note3: You cannot assign a Faceplate View or Custom Faceplate View to a frame. If you specify a tag name as the window name, a
Tuning view for the specified tag name is assigned.
SEE
ALSO For details on window names and function parameters, see the following:
Windows”

n Examples of Assigning a Frame Call

Example: GΔFRLT01Δ’ 1=.AL, 2=TG0101'
With this example, a Process Alarm View is shown in the upper half of a frame and a Trend View
is shown in the lower half of the frame.
Example: GΔFRLT02Δ'1=GR0001Δ {$TAG1=FIC001}, 2=.PR'

With this example, a Graphic View appears on the left side and a Process Report View on the
right side in the frame. As the function parameter for the Graphic View, a tag name “FIC001” is
set for the Graphic generic name “TAG1”.

E13.2.3 Assigning Execution of a System Function Key

Command
This section describes how to assign system function key commands to Function Keys.
n Format
To assign a system function key command to a function key, use the following format on the
Function Key Assignment Builder.
KΔSystem function key name

Δ : Space
Example: KΔUSIN
With this example, the User-In dialog box is shown.
n System Function Key

You can assign any of the following system function key commands to a function key.
Enclosed in the parentheses are the system function key name.
l Hard Copy (HDCP)

Outputs the image shown on the screen to a printer or a file.
SEE
ALSO For how to set the screen image output destination when the [COPY] key is pressed, see the following:
l Print (PRNT)
Prints the active window. This is valid only when there is a print button in the operation and
monitoring window you wish to print.
l Message Printout (MSPR)

Forces all printers assigned to MSG1 to MSG5 to print the currently generated messages.
l Buzzer Reset (BUZZ)

Executes buzzer reset operation. Stops all the buzzer outputs.
l Stop Voice Play (VOIC)

Stops the voice play.
l Panel set (PSET)

Calls up the panel set related to the active window. The panel set in which the active window is
specified as the first window of the panel set on the Panel Set Builder is called up.

l Isolate (ISOL)
Turns on/off the “isolated” state.
Isolating the HIS prevents the following window call requests from other HIS. This command only
changes the “isolated” state of its own HIS, not other HIS.
• Request from another HIS to call up a panel set.
• Request from another HIS to call up a window.
• Request to display a window automatically upon notification of process alarm occurrence
from a field control station.
• Request to display a window automatically upon occurrence of an operator guide message.
• Request to display a window by sequence message request.
TIP
Isolation of HIS can also be turned on or off by pressing [ALT] + [CTRL] + [F11].
While the HIS is isolated, the icon to indicate that the HIS is isolated is shown in the icon display
area of the System Message Banner. At the same time, the LED of the function key to which
HIS isolation is assigned lights up. Thus, do not set LED flashing conditions to the function key
assigned with ISOL function.
l Acknowledge (ACKN)
Acknowledges alarms associated to the active window.
l Clear (CLER)
Cancels the current selection or input data.
l Window Down (CRDN)

Moves the window shown in the front to the back. However, the primary window is not affected.
l Window Up (CRUP)
Moves the window shown in the back to the front. However, the primary window is not affected.
l Focus (FOCS)
Switches the active window between the primary window and the topmost pop-up window. This
key is valid only in full-screen mode.
l Primary Window Focus (FCSF)

Activates the primary window. This key is valid only in full-screen mode.
l Circulate (CIRC)
Transposes the front to back relationship between the operation and monitoring window group
and Windows-based application window group.
l Halve (HALF)
Calls up the current active operation and monitoring window in medium size (the original one
remains displayed).

l Maximize (FULL)
Calls up the current active operation and monitoring window in full size (the original one remains
displayed).
l Restore Window Size (RSIZ)

Resizes the active operation and monitoring window to the size when it was initially called up.
l Prioritized Display (HOLD)

Toggles the prioritized display of the active operation and monitoring window.
SEE
ALSO For details of Priority Display, see the following:
E2.7.4, “Priority Display of Operation and Monitoring Windows”
l Call the Upper Window (WNDU)

Calls up the upper window of the active operation and monitoring window.
l Call a Hierarchy Window in Descending Order (WNDR)

Calls up a hierarchy window (windows at the same level in the window hierarchy are called
“hierarchy window”) of the active operation and monitoring window in descending order.
l Call a Hierarchy Window in Ascending Order (WNDL)

Calls up a hierarchy window of the active operation and monitoring window in ascending order.
l Erase Windows (ERAS)

Closes all the windows currently displayed. Equivalent to the erase-all key. In full-screen mode,
only the background color of the primary window is shown.
l Hide Primary Window (CLFS)

In full-screen mode, hides the primary window to allow access to the Windows desktop.
l Clear Primary Window (ERFS)

In full-screen mode, clears the contents of the primary window and shows only its background
color.
l Erase Pop-up Windows (ERWD)

In full-screen mode, closes all the windows and dialog boxes except for the primary window.
l Erase Active Window (ERAW)

Closes the active window.

l Feed Forward according to Window History (RECF)
Sequentially calls up operation and monitoring windows displayed in the past, from older ones to
new ones. Up to 30 windows can be called up.
l Feed Backward according to Window History (RECB)

Sequentially calls up operation and monitoring windows displayed in the past, starting from the
latest one. Up to 30 windows can be called up.
l Navigator (NAVI)
Opens the Browser Bar, if it is not open, and shows the Overview Toolbox.
l Call Name Input Toolbox (NAME)

Opens the Browser Bar, if it is not open, and shows the Name Input Toolbox.
l User-In (USIN)
Calls up the User-In dialog box.

The following functions are available if a Multiple-Monitor Support Package is installed.
l Shift Window (SHnm) n, m = 1 to 4

Transfers the operation and monitoring windows (*1) shown on monitor “n” to monitor “m”.
Executing this function will clear all the windows shown on monitor “n”.
The windows transferred to monitor “m” may be cascaded in a different order.
l Shift Window (SHFT)

Transfers the operation and monitoring windows (*1) shown on the main monitor to the sub
monitor specified in the Multiple-Monitor tab in the HIS Setup window.
The windows on the main monitor will be cleared after the execution of this command.
The windows transferred to the sub monitor may be cascaded in a different order.
l Exchange Window (ECnm) n, m = 1 to 4

Exchanges the currently displayed operation and monitoring windows (*1) between monitor “n”
and monitor “m”.
After the execution of this command, the windows may not be cascaded in an order different from
the original order.
l Exchange Window (ECHG)

Exchanges the currently displayed operation and monitoring windows (*1) between the main
monitor and the sub monitor specified in the Multiple-Monitor tab in the HIS Setup window.
After the execution of this command, the windows may not be cascaded in an order different from
the original order.
l Copy Window (CPYn) n= 1 to 4

• In Full-Screen Mode
Moves the currently activated frame or tab to monitor n. On the destination monitor the
entire frame or tab will be displayed, while on the original monitor, the frame or tab will be
removed.
• In Window Mode
Moves the currently activated pop-up window to monitor n. On the destination monitor the
window will be displayed, while on the original monitor, the window will be removed.

The following commands are for calling up windows. The L, M, and C at the end of each system
function key name denote large, medium, and special size, respectively.
l Process Alarm View (ALML, ALMM, ALMW)

ALML, ALMM: Calls up the unfiltered Process Alarm view showing all process alarms.
ALMW: Calls up the unfiltered Process Alarm Individual Acknowledgement dialog box.
l Operator Guide View (OPGL, OPGM, OPGW)

OPGL, OPGM: Calls up the unfiltered Operator Guide view showing all operator guide
messages.
OPGW: Calls up the unfiltered Operator Guide Individual Acknowledgement dialog box.
l System Alarm View (SYAL, SYAM, SYAW)

SYAL, SYAM: Calls up the unfiltered System Alarm view showing all system alarms.
SYAW: Calls up the unfiltered System Alarm Individual Acknowledgement dialog box.
l Tuning View (TUNL, TUNM)

Calls up a Tuning view. This is valid only if a tag-related object is selected.
l Trend View (TRGL, TRGM)

Calls up a Trend view. If a Trend view is already shown, the same Trend view is re-displayed. If
not, the one at the top level in the window hierarchy is shown.
l Graphic View (Graphic attribute) (GRPL, GRPM, GRPC)

Calls up a Graphic view having graphic attributes. If a tag-related object is selected, the view
containing the tag is shown. If not, the one at the top level in the window hierarchy is shown.
l Graphic View (with Overview attribute(s)) (OVGL, OVGM, OVGC)

Calls up a Graphic view having overview attributes.
l Graphic View (with Control attribute(s)) (CTLL, CTLM, CTLC)

Calls up a Graphic view having control attributes. If a tag-related object is selected, the view
containing the tag is shown. If not, the one at the top level in the window hierarchy is shown.
l Historical Report Window (HRPT)

Calls up the Historical Report window.
l Process Report View (PRPT, PRPL, PRPM)

Calls up the Process Report view.
l System Overview (SMNT)

Calls up the System Overview.
l Image Window (IMAG)

Calls up the Image window.

l Faceplate View (FACE)
Calls up a Faceplate view as a pop-up window. This is valid only if a tag-related object is
selected.
l Control Drawing View (DRWL)

Calls up a Control Drawing view. This is valid only if a tag-related object is selected and the tag-
related object is a control block.
l Logic Chart View (LOGL)

Calls up a Logic Chart view. This is valid only if a tag-related object is selected and the tag-related
object is a logic chart block.
l Sequence Table View (SQTL)

Calls up a Sequence Table view. This is valid only if a tag-related object is selected and the tag-
related object is a Sequence Table block.
l SEBOL View (SBLL)

Calls up a SEBOL view.
This is valid only if a tag-related object is selected and SEBOL is defined for the tag.
l SFC View (SFCL)

Calls up an SFC view. This is valid only if a tag-related object is selected and SFC is defined for
the tag.
l HELP Window (HELP)

Calls up the Help window for the active operation and monitoring window.
l Message Monitor Window (MSDW)

Calls up a Message Monitor window. If a message is generated, the LED on the function key to
which calling up of Message Monitor Window is assigned lights up. When you acknowledge the
message, the LED goes off.
Lighting up of LED cannot be specified for the function key to which calling up of Message
Monitor Window is assigned.
l Call Related Builder (BDRA)

Calls up a builder window associated with the active operation and monitoring window.
BDRA is valid only when the Standard Builder Function package or Configured Information
Reference package is installed.
l Call Control Drawing Builder (BDRD)

Calls up a control drawing builder window associated with the active operation and monitoring
window. If a control drawing builder is not used, Function Block Overview Builder is called.
BDRD is valid only when the Standard Builder Function package or Configured Information
Reference package is installed.

E13.2.4 Assigning Execution of a System Function Key

Command (Monitor specified)
In a multiple-monitor environment, you can assign execution of a system function key
command with a monitor number specified.
n Format
To assign execution of a system function key command for a specified monitor, use the following
format on the Function Key Assignment Builder.
LΔMonitor numberΔSystem function key name

Δ : Space
Monitor number : 1 to 4
Example: LΔ3ΔSYAL
With this example, System Alarm view in large size is shown on the monitor with monitor number
3.
The following table lists the system function key commands you can specify. For details of each
command, see the preceding section.

Table System Function Key Commands that can be Executed for a Specified Monitor Number
System Function Key Name Function

HDCP Hard copy
ALML, ALMM, ALMW Call Process Alarm view
OPGL, OPGM Call Operator Guide view
SYAL, SYAM, SYAW Call System Alarm view
TUNL, TUNM Call Tuning view
TRGL, TRGM Call Trend view
OVGL, OVGM, OVGW, OVGC Call Graphic View with overview attribute
CTLL, CTLM, CTLC Call Graphic View with control attribute
GRPL, GRPM, GRPC Call Graphic View with graphic attribute
HRPT Call Historical Report window
PRPT Call Process Report view
HELP Call HELP window
IMAG Call Image window
ERAS Clear windows
CLFS Hide primary window
ERFS Clear primary window
ERWD Clear pop-up window
FACE Call Faceplate view
RECF Feed forward according to window history
RECB Feed backward according to window history
DRWL Call Control Drawing view
LOGL Call Logic Chart view
SQTL Call Sequence Table view
SBLL Call SEBOL view
SFCL Call SFC view
MSDW Call Message Monitor Window
CRDN Window down
CRUP Window up
CIRC Circulate
E130206E.ai

E13.2.5 Assigning Start/Stop/Resume Trend Data Acquisition

You can assign Trend data acquisition to a function key by defining the following items on
the Function Key Assignment Builder. The definition is only valid for the batch-type trend.
• Trend view name
• Parameter
n Trend View Name

Enter the name of the Trend view for which you want to start, stop or resume trend data
acquisition.
n Parameter
Select one of the three commands for trend data acquisition: START (start data acquisition),
STOP (stop data acquisition), and CONT (resume data acquisition).
n Example of Assigning Start/Stop/Resume Trend Data Acquisition

You can assign the trend data acquisition in the following format:
TΔTrend view nameΔSTART

TΔTrend view nameΔSTOP
TΔTrend view nameΔCONT
Δ : Space
Example: TΔTG0101ΔSTART
With this example, the system starts acquiring trend data for the Trend view “TG0101.”

E13.2.6 Assigning Flash/Light/ Turn Off LED

You can assign a command to flash, light, or turn off LED to function keys by defining the
following items on the Function Key Assignment Builder.
• LED number
• Parameter
n LED Number
This is the number of the LED to be flashed, lighted, or turned off.
For the operation keyboard for single-loop operation, select in the range from 1 to 32.
For the operation keyboard for the console type HIS, select in the range from 1 to 64.
With the console type HIS, 101 and 102 correspond to auxiliary contact outputs. If flashing is
specified for a contact output, the operation will be the same as that when lighting is specified.
n Parameter
Specify one of “F” (Flash), “ON” (Light), and “OFF” (Turn off) as the parameter.
n Example of Assigning the LED Operation

You can assign the LED to a function key in the following format.
EΔLED numberΔF
EΔLED numberΔON
EΔLED numberΔOFF
Δ : Space
Example: EΔ1ΔON
With this example, the LED with LED number 1 is turned on.

E13.2.7 Assigning Execution of a Program

You can assign execution of a program to a function key by defining the following items
on the Function Key Assignment Builder.
• Program name
• Parameter
n Program Name
Define the name of a program to run. If the path to the program is not set in the environment
variable PATH, you must specify a full path name. The path name and the program name must
not include any space.
TIP
If the application corresponding to a file type (extension) is registered in Windows, you can specify a file name
instead of program name. For example, if Microsoft Word is defined as the application corresponding to the file
extension “.doc”, you can specify “xxxx.doc” instead of the program name to launch the Microsoft Word.
n Parameter for Program Execution

Specify the parameters (program arguments) to be passed to the program, if there is any.
n Example of Assigning Program Execution

You can assign a program execution in the following format.
FΔprogram name [Δparameter]

Δ : Space
“FΔProgram Name [ΔParameter]” must be a string of up to 48 alphanumeric characters.

Example: FΔBKHRPTΔ-nCYOHYOΔ-fΔ-p
With this example, the report function will print the report “CYOHYO” to the default printer, and at
the same time the report is set as a subject of historical management.
SEE
ALSO For more information on the report function, see the following:
M3, “Report”
Example: FΔC:\ USER_File\File1.doc
With this example, the Microsoft Word is started and the file “File1.doc” in the “USER_File” folder
is opened.

E13.2.8 Assigning Multimedia Operation

You can assign Multimedia operation to the function keys by defining the following items
on the Function Key Assignment Builder.
• Multimedia file name
• Action
• Number of times
n Multimedia File Name

Enter the name of a multimedia file containing a voice message or a video to be played.
Any type of sound files supported by the Windows’ Media Player can be played.
For multimedia file names, you cannot specify absolute paths. Always specify a relative path from
system-installed directory\his\media\user.
n Action
Select one of the three types of Multimedia actions: PLAY, REPEAT, and STOP.
IMPORTANT
If REPEAT is specified, be sure to assign the function to stop the play of the multimedia file to
another function key. If you do not assign, the multimedia file activated by REPEAT cannot be
terminated.
If STOP is selected, all the sounds or videos being played will stop. Even if you specify a
multimedia file name, it is ignored.
n Number of Times the Multimedia File is Played

Specify the number of times the multimedia file is played. Once, twice, or three times can be
specified. If you omit, the multimedia file is played only once.
n Priorities of the Multimedia

Specify the priority of the multimedia file when it is activated. The priority can be selected among
from maximum (1), high (2), middle (3), and low (4).
TIP
You can also assign multimedia operation in the Function Key tab of the HIS Setup Window, in which case, the
priority is fixed at “middle.”

n Example of Assigning Multimedia Operation

You can assign multimedia operation in the following formats.
“XΔ..../priority” must be a string of up to 48 alphanumeric characters.
XΔPLAY[n]Δmultimedia file nameΔ/priority

XΔREPEATΔmultimedia file nameΔ/priority
XΔSTOP
Δ : Space
n : Number of repetitions (1 to 3)
Priority : 1 to 4
Example: XΔPLAY2Δbuzz1.wavΔ/1
With this example, the voice message stored in the multimedia file “buzz1.wav” is played twice
with the maximum (1) priority.

E13.2.9 Assigning Event Notification to ActiveX Control

To assign event notification to the ActiveX controls embedded in Graphic views, define
the event character string on the Function Key Assignment Builder.
n Event String
Define the event string for the ActiveX control. The system sends the defined event string to all
the currently shown Graphic views.
n Example of Assignment
Use the following format to assign event notification to ActiveX controls.
DΔevent string
Δ : Space
Example: DΔEVENT01ΔSTART
With this example, the system sends the string “EVENT01ΔSTART” to the ActiveX control.
The ActiveX control receives the event in the form of ButtonExecuted from the graphic interface
control for processing.

E13.2.10 Assigning a Panel Set Call

You can assign a panel set call to the function keys by specifying the panel set name on
the Function Key Assignment Builder.
n Panel Set Name

Specify the panel set name defined by the builder.
n Example of Assigning a Panel Set Call

Use the following format to assign a panel set call.
PΔPanel set name

Δ : space
Example: PΔPSET001
With this example, the panel set “PSET001” is called up.

E13.2.11 Assigning a Window Call on Another HIS

You can assign a window call on another HIS by specifying one of the following three
items.
• Option
• System function key name
• Window name
The windows that can be called up are the operation and monitoring windows, and this
function is effective when the specified HIS has the windows of the same name. Whether
the user can operate the windows called up on the target HIS depends on the security
settings of the target HIS.
n Format
Use one of the following formats to assign this function on the Function Key Assignment Builder.
SΔTarget HIS name[ΔOption]

SΔTarget HIS nameΔKΔSystem function key name
SΔTarget HIS nameΔOΔWindow name[ΔFunction parameter][Δ-Size][Δ=Display position]
Δ : space
n Options
Omitted: The active operation and monitoring window is called up on the specified HIS.
S: The active operation and monitoring window is called up on the specified HIS, and the
window on the source HIS is cleared.
A: All the operation and monitoring windows currently shown are called up on the
specified HIS.
AS: All the operation and monitoring windows currently shown are called up on the
specified HIS, and the windows on the source HIS are cleared.
n System Function Key Name

Specify a system function key name that calls up a window.
SEE
ALSO For details on the system function key names for calling up windows, see the following:
E13.2.3, “Assigning Execution of a System Function Key Command”

n Window Name
Assignment using a window name allows you to specify the window size, display position, and
other parameters according to your preferences.
SEE
ALSO For details on calling windows by window name, see the following:
Windows”
n Examples of Assignment
Example: SΔHIS0124
If you activate a window “GR001” on the source HIS and press the function key defined with this
example, the window “GR001” will also be shown on the station HIS0124.
Example: SΔHIS0124ΔKΔALML
If you press the function key defined with this example, a Process Alarm View in large size is
shown on the station HIS0124.
Example: SΔHIS0163ΔOΔ.ALΔ-SLΔ=+200+100
With this example, a Process Alarm View in large size is shown in the X-coordinate 200 and Y-
coordinate 100 position on the station HIS0163.
TIP
If the specified HIS is in “isolated” status, windows are not called.

E13.2.12 Assigning Window Clearing on Another HIS

You can assign window clearing on another HIS to a function key.
n Format
Use the following format to assign this function on the Function Key Assignment Builder.
SΔTarget HIS nameΔKΔSystem function key name

Δ : Space
n System Function Key Name

Specify a system function key name for clearing windows. The System Message Banner and
Browser Bar will not be cleared.
ERAS: Closes all displayed windows. (Equivalent to the erase-all key.)

CLPS: In full-screen mode, hides the primary window.
ERFS: In full-screen mode, clears the contents of the primary window.
ERWD: In full-screen mode, closes all the windows except for the primary window.
ERAW: Closes the active window.
n Example of Assignment
Example: SΔHIS0163ΔKΔERAS
With this example, all the windows on station HIS0163 will be closed.
TIP
If the specified HIS is isolated, windows will not be cleared.

E13.2.13 Call a Faceplate Frame (*1) on the Predefined Position

How to use HIS Menu Editor to write an assignment for calling a faceplate will be
described in this section.
Using HIS Menu Editor, a function for calling a faceplate as a built-in component of a View
can be assigned on the context menu opened by a right-clicking.
This built-in component can be displayed in a Graphic View or Trend View window and the
frame it is displayed in is referred to as a faceplate frame (*2)
In contrast, the faceplate called by general methods from other Views is a conventional
faceplate and normally has a floating position. A conventional faceplate is referred to as a
pop-up faceplate window in this document.
When a function for calling a window is defined on a place other than HIS Menu Editor, the
function works as a window call (O) command.
*1: In a Graphic View, Trend View or Message View window, the called faceplate is displayed at the right-hand position on a frame.
*2: When this function is defined for calling an instrument tuning window on Graphic View from an instrument diagram, the displayed
faceplate window will be a conventional faceplate window which is referred to as a pop-up window in this document.
n Syntax
When defining a function for calling a faceplate, the syntax on HIS Menu Editor is as follows:
CΔTagName
Δ: Space
SEE
ALSO For more information about syntaxes used for the items on HIS Menu Editor, see the following:
E3.1.4, “Context Menus in Graphic View”
n An Example of Using HIS Menu Editor for Defining a Function to Call

Faceplate
Use the following syntax to define on HIS Menu Editor:
(Example) CΔFIC101
In this example, “FIC101” is the tag name of a faceplate. This script is for calling the faceplate to
the right-hand position of a faceplate frame.
However, the option of “Use faceplate frame as a default” must be enabled for the Graphic View
and Trend View windows for displaying the faceplate as built-in faceplate by selecting an item
from the context menu.
The tag name “FIC101” specific for the faceplate can be directly used, and the syntax element %t
can also be used instead of the selected tag name.

<E13.3 One-Touch Keys on Operation Keyboard> E13-30
E13.3 One-Touch Keys on Operation Keyboard

Various one-touch keys are provided on the operation keyboard to facilitate operation.
n Window Calling Keys

The following figure shows how the window calling keys are arranged.
E130301E.ai
Figure Window Calling Keys
The function of each window calling key is described below.
E130302E.ai
Calls up the System Status Overview. The LED on this button indicates whether any system
alarm message has been generated, acknowledged, or not generated.
• Flashing in red
System alarm message has been generated but not acknowledged yet.
• Lit in red
System alarm messages were generated and all the messages have been acknowledged.
• Unlit
No system alarm message has been generated.
E130303E.ai
Outputs the entire screen image to a printer or a file.
SEE
ALSO For how to set the screen image output destination when the [COPY] key is pressed, see the following:
E130304E.ai
Switches the layers of the operation and monitoring windows and windows of the general-
purpose Windows applications back to front and vice versa.
E130305E.ai
Closes all the HIS windows on the monitor.
E130306E.ai
Shows the User-In dialog box and Browser Bar. In the upper half of the Browser Bar, Tool Button
Toolbox is shown and in the lower half of the Browser Bar, Preset Menu Toolbox is shown.
Pressing the keys [ALT] + [CTRL] + [F12] at the same time has the same effect as the AUX key.
E130308E.ai
Calls up a Help window showing help messages related to the active window.

E130309E.ai
Calls up a Process Alarm view. The LED on this button indicates whether any process alarm
message has been generated, acknowledged, or not generated.
• Flashing in red
Process alarm message has been generated but not acknowledged yet.
• Lit in red
Process alarm messages were generated and all the messages have been acknowledged.
• Unlit
No process alarm message has been generated.
E130310E.ai
Calls up an Operator Guide view. The LED on this button indicates whether any operator guide
message has been generated, acknowledged, or not generated. If CAMS for HIS is enabled,
CAMS for HIS Message Monitor is shown.
• Flashing in green
An operator guide message has been generated and is unacknowledged.
• Lit in green
Operator guide messages were generated and all the messages have been acknowledged.
• Unlit
No operator guide message has been generated.
E130311E.ai
Calls up a Graphic view (with control attribute).
E130312E.ai
Calls up a Tuning view.
E130313E.ai
Calls up a Trend view.
E130314E.ai
Calls up a Graphic view (with graphic attribute).
E130315E.ai
Calls up a Process Report view.
E130316E.ai
Opens the Browser Bar. The Browser Bar shows the Overview Toolbox showing the View tab
sheet.
E130317E.ai
Calls up the hierarchy windows of the active window in ascending order defined in the window
hierarchy.
E130318E.ai
Calls up the upper window of the active window.

E130319E.ai
Calls up the hierarchy windows of the active window in descending order defined in the window
hierarchy.
E130320E.ai
Calls up a Graphic view (with overview attribute).
n Operation Control Keys

These keys are used for instrument faceplate operation.
E130321E.ai
In manual mode (MAN), switches the data for operation from the manipulated output value (MV)
to the setpoint value (SV).
E130322E.ai
Increases the target data. While the INC key is being pressed, the data increases by 1 % of
the full scale every 0.2 second. Therefore, it takes 20 seconds for the SV or MV pointer in the
faceplate to move over the full stroke.
E130323E.ai
Decreases the target data. While the DEC key is being pressed, the data decreases by 1 % of
the full scale every 0.2 second. Therefore, it takes 20 seconds for the SV or MV pointer in the
faceplate to move over the full stroke.
E130324E.ai
In INC/DEC operation for analog-type data, pressing this key and the INC key or DEC key at the
same time quadruples the rate of increase or decrease.
E130325E.ai
This button is use to change the block mode to the cascade mode (CAS) or semiautomatic mode
(SEMI). Pressing the AUT key and this key at the same time changes to the cascade mode.
Pressing the MAN key and this key at the same time changes to the semiautomatic mode.
E130326E.ai
Changes the block mode to manual mode (MAN).
E130327E.ai
Changes the block mode to automatic mode (AUT).

n Other Keys
E130328E.ai
Confirms and executes the operation.
E130329E.ai
Cancels the operation.
E130330E.ai
Moves the cursor up, down, left, or right in the active window.
E130331E.ai
Shows the selected item. (Equivalent to a mouse click)
E130332E.ai
Stops the buzzer sound generated upon output of an alarm.
E130333E.ai
Acknowledges the alarm.
E130334E.ai
Scroll the active window.
E130335E.ai
Same function as the [Page Up] key on a computer keyboard.
E130336E.ai
Same function as the [Page Down] key on a computer keyboard.
E130337E.ai
Changes data items.
E130338E.ai
Opens the Browser Bar and shows the Name Input Toolbox.
E130339E.ai
Closes a dialog box or other windows. Same function as the ESC key.
E130340E.ai
Switches between double width and standard width characters.

E130341E.ai
When this key is used in combination with the [1] to [0], [-] and [=] keys, the functions
corresponding to the [F1] to [F12] keys on a computer keyboard can be executed.
For example, [↑] + [1] executes the F1 function. The [0], [-] and [=] keys correspond to the [F10] ,
[F11] , and [F12] keys, respectively.

<E13.4 Auxiliary Contact I/O Function> E13-35
E13.4 Auxiliary Contact I/O Function

Two auxiliary contact inputs and two auxiliary contact outputs are provided on the
console type HIS. To the auxiliary contact inputs, the functions assignable to the function
keys can be assigned. The auxiliary contact outputs can be configured to operate in the
similar way as the LED on a function key.
n Auxiliary Contact Inputs

▼ Function (For Auxiliary Contact Input)
Any one of the functions assignable to the function keys can be assigned to the auxiliary contact
inputs. This assignment is made on the Auxiliary Contact Input/Output tab sheet of the Function
Key Assignment Builder.
SEE
ALSO Functions are assigned to the auxiliary contact inputs in the same format as for the function keys. For more
information on how to assign functions, see the following:
n Auxiliary Contact Outputs

▼ Alarm Definition (For Auxiliary Contact Output)
Like the LED on a function key, the auxiliary contact outputs can be configured to turn on or off
according to the alarm status. On the Auxiliary Contact Input/Output tab sheet of the Function
Key Assignment Builder, specify the name of a tag or window for which alarm status is to be
monitored in up to 28 alphanumeric characters.
The ON and OFF states of the contact correspond to the turning on and turning off of the LED.
Note that the auxiliary contact output will be ON in the cases where an LED might flash.
SEE
ALSO Alarms are defined in the same way as LED flashing conditions. For more information on how to define alarms,
see the following:
“n LED Flashing Conditions” in E13.2, “Function Keys”
The auxiliary contact outputs can also be turned on or off like the LED on a function key by
specifying LED number 101 or 102 in the E command.
SEE
ALSO For more information on how to turn on or off the auxiliary output, see the following:
E13.2.6, “Assigning Flash/Light/ Turn Off LED”

Blank Page
<E14. Multiple-Monitor> E14-1
E14. Multiple-Monitor
The function known as Multiple-Monitor connects up to four monitors to one Human
Interface Station (HIS), and displays windows for the operation and monitoring on each
monitor. In this way up to four monitors can be handled as one large, logical desktop area
(virtual desktop area).
The Multiple Monitors feature of Windows is utilized to form the multiple-monitoring
scheme of HIS. Therefore, the operating environment in the general-purpose personal
computer should be either Windows XP or Windows Vista that supports the multiple
monitors. And the package for the multiple monitoring (LHS4600) should be installed in
the PC too.
n Overview of Multiple-Monitor
An overview of Multiple-Monitor is as follows:
• Up to four monitors can be connected to one HIS. A display card compatible with the
Multiple Monitors feature of Windows is used for connection.
• The monitors can be stacked (vertical orientation) or placed side-by-side (lateral
orientation).
• One monitor is designated as the main monitor and the others are the sub monitors.
• Multiple full-size operation and monitoring windows can be displayed at the same time.
• The secondary dialog that is called up from an operation and monitoring window is
displayed on the monitor where the calling window is being displayed.
• System Message Banner is displayed on each monitor, showing the same information.
• Browser Bar is displayed on each monitor. Each Browser Bar can be operated
independently.
• A display destination monitor can be designated when calling up an operation and
monitoring window.
The following display operations can be performed on a Multiple-Monitor HIS:
• Windows can be called up on a specified monitor.
• Windows on a specified monitor can be erased.
• The Print Screen can be executed for a specified monitor.
• Windows can be transferred between the specified two monitors (shift and exchange).
• The mouse cursor can be freely moved across the monitors.
• Operation and monitoring windows can be moved across the monitors by dragging with
mouse.
TIP
If the Multiple-Monitor Support Package is not installed, the multiple-monitor feature of Windows can be used
for the multiple monitors but the HIS features is available only on one monitor. It is possible to drag and move
windows across the monitors in accordance with the specification of Windows.

<E14. Multiple-Monitor> E14-2
l Restrict Identical Windows in Same Monitor
HIS has an option to restrict to call an identical window in the same monitor (identical window
restriction feature). This option is valid for the whole HIS.
l Limited to One Faceplate

In Windows Switching tab of HIS Setup window, an option of “Limited to One Faceplate”
is available. Checking this option, only one faceplate window can be displayed in one HIS
regardless how many monitors the HIS may have. This option is valid for the whole HIS.

<E14.1 Monitor Configuration> E14-3
E14.1 Monitor Configuration

This section describes the monitor configuration used in the Multiple-Monitor
environment. With Multiple-Monitor, up to four monitors can be stacked vertically or
placed laterally (side-by-side). One monitor is used as the main monitor and the others are
used as the sub monitors.
n Monitor Arrangement and Monitor Numbers

The four monitors can be stacked vertically or placed side-by-side, as shown below. The
arrangement can be specified in Display Properties of Windows.
Each monitor can be identified by the monitor number set in Display Properties of Windows. For
example, by specifying the monitor number as a parameter for calling up a window, the system
can determine which monitor to display.
The following figure shows examples of typical monitor arrangement and monitor numbers.
1 2 3 4
2 2 4
1 2 3
1 2 1 1 3
4 3 2 1
3 2 1
2 1
E140101E.ai
Figure Typical Monitor Arrangement and Monitor Numbers
SEE
ALSO For how to set up the monitor arrangement and monitor numbers, see the following:
“n Setting Display Properties of Windows” in E14.5, “Setting the Multiple-Monitor Environment”

<E14.1 Monitor Configuration> E14-4
n Main Monitor and Sub Monitor

Multiple-Monitor uses one monitor as the main monitor and the other monitors as sub monitors.
The main monitor is the monitor specified as the primary monitor in Display Properties of
Windows. The Windows taskbar is only displayed on the main monitor.
The System Message Banner is displayed on all monitors with the same contents. It can also be
operated on all monitors.
The Browser Bar is displayed on all the monitors at the same position but can be operated
independently. The contents of Favorites folder are the same for all the monitors.
When calling an operation and monitoring window without specifying the monitor number, the
window may be displayed on the monitor where the active window locates or on the monitor
where the new window is called from. If either the active window or the origin of calling is
unidentifiable, the called window will be displayed on the main monitor. Moreover, the operation
keyboard with 8-loop control keys behaves differently when operating the function block
faceplates on the main monitor and on the sub monitor.
With Multiple-Monitor, windows can be transferred between any specified pair of monitors.
SEE
ALSO • For how to set the primary monitor, see the following:
“n Setting Display Properties of Windows” in E14.5, “Setting the Multiple-Monitor Environment”
• For more information about operating the function block faceplate using the operation keyboard with the
8-loop control keys, see the following:
“l Operation Using the Control Keys” in “n Other Window Operations” in E14.4, “Windows Operations in
Multiple-Monitor Environment”

<E14.2 Operation Screen Mode in Multiple-Monitor Environment> E14-5
E14.2 Operation Screen Mode in Multiple-Monitor

Environment
This section describes the operation screen mode (full-screen mode and window mode)
in the Multiple-Monitor environment. The operation screen mode is set in the HIS Setup
window, and all monitors come up in the same mode.
SEE
ALSO • For details on the operation screen mode, see the following:
E2.2, “Operation Screen Mode”
• For the setting method of the operation screen mode in the HIS Setup window, see the following:
E4.3.4, “Display Tab”

n Full-Screen Mode
When the multiple monitors are set up in the full-screen mode, operation and monitoring windows
can be displayed in full size on all monitors. As shown below, a system message banner is
displayed in the top of each monitor, and a browse bar is displayed in the same position (either
left side or right side) on each monitor.
 FCS0101 Batch Manager Ready 03/23/2009 14:35
?  FCS0101 RIGHT Control
Copy
0 17 0  FCS0101 RIGHT Manual Reset Start TESTUSER
.AL Process Alarm

Tool Button 1.0
m3/s
View Operation 1 06/22 20:29:30 PVI Flowrate NR %

2 06/22 20:29:30 PVI Flowrate HI %
3 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-6 NR %
4 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-6 HI %
Call View
5 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-4 HH %
SYS HELP ? 6 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-3 HR %
NAME 7 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-3 HI %
CAPS
8 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-2 HH %
9 06/22 20:29:26 PVI-6 HH %
10 06/22 20:29:26 PVI-6 HH %
11 06/22 20:29:26 PVI-5 HI %
12 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-1 NR %
13 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-1 HI %
Window Control 14 06/22 20:29:25 PVI-5 HH %
15 06/22 20:29:23 PVI-5 HH %
16 06/22 20:29:22 PVI-5 HH % Sub monitor
17 06/22 20:29:21 PVI-5 HH %
Builder
18 06/22 20:29:20 PVI-5 HH %
19 06/22 20:29:25 PVI-5 HH %
20 06/22 20:29:20 PVI-1 HH %
21 06/22 20:29:19 PVI Flowrate HH %
22 06/22 20:29:18 PVI-6 HH %
Window Control 23 06/22 20:29:17 PVI-3 HI %
Function Name Command H... 24 06/22 20:29:17 PVI-2 HH %
FIC002 O FIC002 -SC
25 06/22 20:29:14 PVI-2 HI %
System Status Overview O .SO -SL
26 06/22 20:29:14 PVI-7 HI %
Block:01 Group:02 O TG0102 -SL =:1 27 06/22 20:29:11 PVI-4 HI %
OV0001 O OV0001 -SL 28 06/22 20:29:05 PVI-4 NR %
GR0001 O GR0001 -SL =:1 29 06/22 20:29:05 PVI-4 1.0 %
CG0001 O CG0001 -SL =:1 29 06/22 20:29:02 PVI-8 HI %
Block:01 Group:02 O TG0102 -SL 30 06/22 20:29:02 PVI-7 NR %
Process Report O .PR -SL 31 06/22 20:29:02 PVI-7 LO %
Station Status Display O .SF FCS0101-S 32 06/22 20:29:02 PVI-2 NR %
Ready
 FCS0101 Batch Manager Ready 03/23/2009 14:35

?  FCS0101 RIGHT Control
Copy
0 17 0  FCS0101 RIGHT Manual Reset Start TESTUSER
GR0001 Distillation Column

Overview
View Trend Plant
TG0701 COMMENT1 TRC FIC200

TG0801 COMMENT2
GR0003 COMMENT3
Distillation column 49.2 °C FIC200
Reactor
GR0004 COMMENT4 flow
GR0005 COMMENT5 RC-10 PAC
TG0901 COMMENT6 TDA
37.5 °C 23.4 % 51.3 °C AUT
GR0006 COMMENT7
GR0007 COMMENT8 NR
PV M3/H
SYSTEM
55.3
.AL Process Alarm
SV M3/H
? .OG Operator Guide Mess 50.0
.SO System Status Overvi MV %
.SH HIS Setup 65.1
38.9 ? FIC LICA
.SA System Alarm Mes
LICA
Main monitor
.SF FCS0101 Station S 45.7 % 48.9
100.0
.SF FCS0102 Station S FIC
.PR Process Report 41.4 %
PRODUCT TDT 80.0
53.8 °C
Comment Process Alarm FIC
Address /SYSTEM/.AL 25.4 % 60.0
Favorite
favorite-1
40.0
P MYPJT1
Search
20.0
Name Input
0.0
Window Name Input
Call
Default Station Information

NAME
Ready
14:35
E140201E.ai
Figure Full-Screen Mode in Multiple-Monitor Environment

n Window Mode
When the multiple monitors are set up in the window mode, operation and monitoring windows
are displayed in the same style as the window mode in the single-monitor environment on each
monitor. The following figure shows an example display in the window mode.
FCS0101 Batch Manager Ready 03/23/2009 14:35
? FCS0101 RIGHT Control
Copy
0 17 0 FCS0101 RIGHT Manual Reset Start TESTUSER
.AL Process Alarm

Tool Button 1.0
m3/s
View Operation 1 06/22 20:29:30 PVI Flowrate NR %

2 06/22 20:29:30
TG1001 PVI
Block:10 Group:01 Flowrate HI %
3 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-6 NR %
1
4 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-6 HI %
5 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-4 2
HH %
Call View 6 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-3 HR %
7 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-3 HI %
8 06/22 102.3
20:29:29 PVI-2 HH %
SYS HELP ?
9 06/22 20:29:26 PVI-6 HH %
NAME 10 06/22 20:29:26 PVI-6 HH %
11 06/22 20:29:26 PVI-5 HI %
CAPS
12 06/22 82.3
20:29:29 PVI-1 NR %
13 06/22 20:29:29 PVI-1 HI %
14 06/22 20:29:25 PVI-5 HH %
15 06/22 20:29:23 PVI-5 HH %
16 06/22 20:29:22
62.3 PVI-5 HH %
FIC001.PV
17
18
06/22
06/22
20:29:21
20:29:20
PVI-5
PVI-5
HH %
HH %
Sub monitor
19 06/22 20:29:25 PVI-5 HH %
Window Control 20 06/22 20:29:20 PVI-1 HH %
42.3
21 06/22 20:29:19 PVI Flowrate HH %
22 06/22 20:29:18 PVI-6 HH %
23 06/22 20:29:17 PVI-3 HI %
24 06/22 20:29:17 PVI-2 HH %
Builder 25 06/22 22.3
20:29:14 PVI-2 HI %
Ready
00:12:00 100%
2.3
13:34 13:36 13:38 13:40 13:42 13:44
Window Control
Function Name Command H...
Tag Name Tag Comment Value Unit Upper Lower
FIC002 O FIC002 -SC
□ ●1 FIC001. PV Inlet flow 72.1 M3/h 100.0 0.0
System Status Overview O .SO -SL
□ ●2 FIC002. PV Outlet flow 53.3 M3/h 100.0 0.0
Block:01 Group:02 O TG0102 -SL =:1 □ ●3 LIC100. PV Level 3.8 M 100.0 0.0
OV0001 O OV0001 -SL □ ●4 TIC100. PV Temp A 25.7 DEGC 100.0 0.0
GR0001 O GR0001 -SL =:1 □ ●5 TIC200. PV Temp B 14.1 DEGC 100.0 0.0
CG0001 O CG0001 -SL =:1 □ ●6
□ ●7
Block:01 Group:02 O TG0102 -SL
□ ●8
Process Report O .PR -SL
Station Status Display O .SF FCS0101 -S Ready
FCS0101 Batch Manager Ready 03/23/2009 14:35

? FCS0101 RIGHT Control
Copy
0 17 0 FCS0101 RIGHT Manual Reset Start TESTUSER
Overview
View Trend Plant FIC200
FIC200
TG0701 COMMENT1
Reactor
TG0801 COMMENT2 flow
GR0003 COMMENT3
GR001 Distillation Column
GR0004 COMMENT4
GR0005 COMMENT5 AUT
TG0901 COMMENT6 NR
PV M3/H
GR0006 COMMENT7
55.3
GR0007 COMMENT8 TRC SV M3/H
SYSTEM Distillation column 49.2 °C 50.0
.AL Process Alarm MV %
? .OG Operator Guide Mess 65.1
.SO System Status Overvi TDA RC-10 PAC
37.5 °C 23.4 % 51.3 °C
.SH HIS Setup 100.0
.SA System Alarm Mes Main monitor
.SF FCS0101 Station S
80.0
.SF FCS0102 Station S
.PR Process Report
PRODUCT 60.0
38.9 °C FIC LICA
Comment Process Alarm LICA 45.7 % 48.9
Address /SYSTEM/.AL 40.0
FIC
Favorite 41.4 %
favorite-1 TDT 20.0
53.8 °C
P MYPJT1 FIC
25.4 % 0.0
Search
Name Input
Window Name Input
Call
Ready
NAME Default Station Information
14:35
E140203E.ai
Figure Window Mode in Multiple-Monitor Environment

<E14.3 Window Display Positions on Multiple Monitors> E14-8
E14.3 Window Display Positions on Multiple

Monitors
The display positions of windows on the monitors are determined by how the windows
are called up.
For example, if a window is called from its sibling window, the window will be displayed in
the default position on the monitor where the window belongs to. The term “the monitor
where the window belongs to” denotes the monitor on which more than half portion of the
window is displayed.
The display position for each window calling method is explained below.
n When Calling up from Browser Bar

The browser bar is displayed on all monitors, and the browser bar on one monitor can call
windows independently from the browser bar on other monitors. If the display position is not
specified, the window called from the browser bar will be displayed at the default position.
n When Directly Calling up a Window

Direct calling up of operation and monitoring windows includes calling up by entering the window
name and calling up by assigning a window call function to a Graphic View object or a function
key. In the Multiple-Monitor environment, the position of the called up window differs according to
how the display position is specified.
• When calling up without specifying the display position
The called window will be displayed in the default position of the monitor where the calling
was performed. However, if the window is called up via a function key, the window will be
displayed in the default position of the monitor where the active window is displayed, or in
the default position on the main monitor if no window is active.
• When calling up with the monitor number
The window is displayed in the default position of the specified monitor.
• When calling up with display coordinates only
The called window will be displayed at the specified coordinates on the monitor where
the calling was performed. When calling up via a function key, the called window will be
displayed at the specified position on the main monitor.
• When calling up with both the display coordinates and the monitor number
The called window will be displayed at the specified position on the specified monitor.
n When Calling up from another Window

From an operation and monitoring window, its upper window or sibling window can be called in
accordance with the window hierarchy. In this case, the called window will be displayed in the
default position on the monitor where the calling window locates. This also applies when a tuning
window is called up from a faceplate window.

<E14.3 Window Display Positions on Multiple Monitors> E14-9
n When Calling up from a Selected Function Block

By selecting a tag name-related object, its related Faceplate View, Graphic View, Trend View of
the function block can be called up. The called view or window will be displayed at the default
position on the monitor where the window calling operation was performed.
n When Calling up by Window Call Button without Selecting Function

Block
When a window call button is pressed without selecting any function block-related object, the
window will be displayed in the default position on the monitor where the active window is
displayed.

<E14.4 Window Operations in Multiple-Monitor Environment> E14-10
E14.4 Window Operations in Multiple-Monitor

Environment
This section describes the operations of the operation and monitoring windows that are
specific to Multiple-Monitor. In Multiple-Monitor environment, the window operations
specific to multiple monitors can be performed in addition to the window operations for
the single-monitor environment. Note that only one active window exists among all the
monitors.
SEE
ALSO • For the window operations that can be performed for both multiple monitors and a single monitor, see the
followings:
E2, “Operation and Monitoring Windows”
• For more information about executing various window operations by assigning system function commands
to the function keys with monitor number specified, see the following:
E13.2.4, “Assigning Execution of a System Function Key Command (Monitor specified)”
n System Message Banner Operation

A System Message Banner showing the same information is displayed on all monitors. The same
operations can be done on each System Message Banner.
When calling a window from the System Message Banner of a monitor while the window is
already displayed on another monitor, the window with same contents will be displayed on both
monitors. However, the Message Monitoring Window can only be displayed on the monitor where
the calling operation was performed.
The System Message Banner operations are as follows:
l Toolbar Buttons
E140402E.ai
This button calls up the Process Alarm View or the Process Alarm Acknowledgement Window.
The view or window will be displayed on the monitor where the button was clicked.
E140403E.ai
This button calls up the System Alarm View or the System Alarm Acknowledgement Window The
view or window will be displayed on the monitor where the button was clicked.
?
E140404E.ai
This button calls up the Operator Guide View or the Operator Guide Individual Acknowledgment
Window. The called view or window will be displayed on the monitor where the button was
clicked.
E140405E.ai
This button calls up the Message Monitor Window. The window will be displayed on the monitor
where the button was clicked.
E140406E.ai
This button stops the buzzer sound.

COPY
E140409E.ai
This button prints the entire screen image of the monitor where the button was clicked.
l Call User-In Dialog Box

Clicking the user name at the right side of the System Message Banner displays the User-In
dialog box on the same monitor.
n Using Browser Bar

In Multiple-Monitor environment, the Browser Bar is displayed on all the monitors in the same
position (either left or right side), and the same operations can be done from each browser bar.
Though the browser bars can be operated independently. The contents of the “favorite” folder are
common to all monitors.
n Transferring Windows
In Multiple-Monitor environment, the operation and monitoring windows can be transferred
between two designated monitors by one touch operation. To perform a one touch operation
for transferring windows between monitors, it is necessary to assign the system function key
command for window transfer to one of the following elements: function key on the operation
keyboard, preset menu, push button or touch target in the Graphic View.
The following three types of window transfer are available:
Shift windows Exchange windows
A B A B
Source Destination Monitor n Monitor m
monitor monitor
No
display A B A
Source Destination Monitor n Monitor m
monitor monitor
E140407E.ai
Figure Window Transfer between Monitors
TIP
Only the Views are transferable between monitors. The HIS Setup window, the Historical Report window, Imaging
window and the Message Monitor window are not transferable.
The above explained tasks of transferring windows between monitors can be assigned on
Function Key Assignment builder, Function tab of Graphic builder, or HIS Setup window.
SEE
ALSO • For more information about the settings on HIS Setup window, see the following:
“l Settings Related to the Function Keys and Preset Menu” in “n Settings Related to Multiple-Monitor in the
HIS Setup Window” in E14.5, “Setting the Multiple-Monitor Environment”
• For more information about the system function key assignment using Graphic Builder, see the following:

The syntaxes used on the function key assignment builder are shown as follows.
l Shifting Windows
This function transfers the operation and monitoring windows displayed on one monitor to
another monitor. After a window shifting is executed, the original monitor will become empty.
The windows that were displayed on the destination monitor will be replaced with the transferred
windows.
The one-touch operation for window shifting between monitors is assigned as follows:
KΔSHnm
Δ :Space
n : Monitor number - Shift from
m: Monitor number - Shift to
Or
KΔSHFT
Δ :Space
SHFT command can be used to shift the display from the main monitor to the sub monitor or vice
versa. The main monitor and the sub-monitor can be designated in the Multiple-Monitor tab of
HIS Setup window.
l Exchanging Windows
This function swaps the operation and monitoring windows displayed on two monitors.
The one-touch operation for exchanging windows between monitors can be assigned as follows:
KΔECnm
Δ :Space
n : Monitor number for exchange
m: Monitor number for exchange
Or
KΔECHG
Δ :Space
ECHG command can be used to exchange the displays between the main monitor and the sub
monitor. The main monitor and the sub-monitor can be designated in the Multiple-Monitor tab of
HIS Setup window.
l Copying the Active Window

This function copies the active operation and monitoring window to another monitor.
The one-touch operation for copying the active window from one monitor to the other can be
assigned as follows:
KΔCPYn
Δ :Space
n: Monitor number - Copy to

n Calling Up a Window
With Multiple-Monitor, the monitor number can be included in the syntax of display position
specification for calling up a window. The syntax for multiple-monitor is the same as that for
single-monitor except for display position specification.
The syntax for assigning a window call as one-touch operation in the Multiple-Monitor
environment is shown below. The same syntax (O should be omitted, however) can be used for
calling windows by entering window names in the Name Input Toolbox of Browser Bar.
OΔWindow name [Δfunction parameter] [Δsize specification] [Δdisplay position]
Δ: Space
[ ]: May be omitted
In the above syntax, specify the display position as follows:

= [+X coordinate + Y coordinate] [:monitor number]
[ ]: May be omitted
The X and Y coordinates are relative coordinates taking the upper-left corner of the HIS desktop
area (*1) of the specified monitor as the origin, and specify the coordinates of the upper-left
corner of the window.
If only the monitor number is specified without specifying the X and Y coordinates, the called
window will be displayed at the default display coordinates on the specified monitor.
Conversely, if the X and Y coordinates are specified without specifying the monitor number, the
window will be displayed at the specified coordinates on the monitor to which the calling window
belongs. However, if there is no calling window, for example, when a window is called up by
a function key on the operation keyboard, the called window will be displayed at the specified
coordinates on the main monitor.
*1: The HIS Desktop area is determined by the display style of Browser Bar.
SEE
ALSO For details on the HIS desktop area, see the following:
“n HIS Desktop Area” in section E2.1, “Display Layout of HIS”

The following shows examples of windows being called up on multiple monitors:
Example 1
=+640+0
If calling from a window on the main monitor,
640 a window is called up at (640, 0) on the main monitor.
Main monitor Sub monitor
Example 2
=+200+100:2
A window is called up at (200, 100) on monitor 2.
100
200
Monitor 1 Monitor 2
Example 3
=:2
A window is called up at the default coordinates on monitor 2.
Monitor 1 Monitor 2
E140408E.ai
Figure Calling a Window with Multiple-Monitor
The following points need to be noted when specifying the display position:
• If an invalid monitor number is specified, the monitor number specification will be ignored.
• Do not include any space character in the display position specification.
• Display position cannot be specified for the windows that are always shown in a fixed
position, such as the HIS Setup window and Historical Report window. If specified, the
specified position will be ignored.
• In the Function Key tab or Preset Menu tab of HIS Setup Window, a monitor number can be
specified in the following two ways. Note that a monitor number cannot be specified if [Call
Window] is selected at “Function Type”.
- Select [Others] at “Function Type” and then enter the command using the syntax
described above.
- Select [Command Execute with Monitor] at “Function Type” and then specify the
window to be called up and a monitor number.
SEE
ALSO • For the items to be specified other than the display position for Call Window, see the following:
E13.2.1, “Assigning a Window Call”
• To specify Call Window in the Graphic window or the Status Display window, see the following:

TIP
When calling up a window, if the window is already displayed on another monitor, the same window will be
displayed on the specified monitor with the same contents. However, the following windows can only be
displayed on the monitor where the calling was initiated.
• Message Monitoring Window
• Imaging Window
• HIS Setup Window
• Historical Message Report Window
• CAMS for HIS Historical Viewer
• Advanced Alarm Filtering Window
• Device Viewer
l Calling Windows by [Command Execute with Monitor]

When using a system function key command to call a window on the specified monitor, the size
or the display position of the window details cannot be specified.
The syntax is:

LΔMonitor NumberΔSystem Function Key Name
For example:
LΔ2ΔALML
This command will display the Process Alarm view on monitor 2 in large size.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the system function key names supported by [Command Execute with Monitor], see
the following:
E13.2.4, “Assigning Execution of a System Function Key Command (Monitor specified)”
The above syntax should be used on Function Key Assignment Builder.

To assign the same function in the Function Key tab or Preset Menu tab of HIS Setup window,
choose [Command Execute with Monitor] at “Function Type,” and then specify the window to be
called up and a monitor number.

n Erasing Windows
This section describes how to erase windows in Multiple-Monitor environment. In all of these
cases, the System Message Banner and the Browser Bar will not be erased.
l Erasing Windows by System Function Key Command

The windows can be erased by assigning various system function keys. The syntax of the
assignment is as follows; Δ stands for a space character.
• Erasing All Windows
Use this syntax to erase all the windows displayed on a monitor.
KΔERAS
Use this syntax to erase the windows on the main monitor.
LΔ<Monitor Number>ΔERAS
Use this syntax to erase windows on the specified monitor.
• Erasing Active Window

Use this syntax to erase the active window.
KΔERAW
• Hiding Main Window

The main window can be hidden in full-screen mode to allow operations on the elements
hidden behind the main window.
KΔCLFS
Use this syntax to hide the main window on all monitors.
LΔ<Monitor Number>ΔCLFS
Use this syntax to hide the main window on the specified monitor.
• Erasing Main Window

The contents of the main window can be erased in full-screen mode.
KΔERFS
Use this syntax to clear the contents in the main window on all monitors.
LΔ<Monitor Number>ΔERFS
Use this syntax to clear the contents of the main window on the specified monitor.

• Erasing Pop-Up Windows
In full-screen mode, the windows other than the main window can be erased.
KΔERWD
Use this syntax to erase the windows other than the main window on all monitors.
LΔ<Monitor Number>ΔERWD
Use this syntax to erase the windows other than the main window on the specified monitor.
SEE
ALSO • For information on the system function key assignment in the HIS Setup window, see the following:
“n Settings Related to Multiple-Monitor in the HIS Setup Window” in E14.5, “Setting the Multiple-Monitor
Environment”
• For details on the system function key assignment on the Graphic Builder, see the following:
l Erasing Windows from Name Input Toolbox

The following syntax can be used on the Name Input toolbox of Browser Bar for erasing all the
windows on the designated monitor.
.ERΔ=:<Monitor Number>
Δ : Space
Monitor Number: 1 to 4
If the monitor number is omitted, the windows on the monitor on which the command was
entered from the Name Input toolbox will be erased.
l Erasing Windows with the Erase Button on the Browser Bar

In Multiple-Monitor environment, a Browser Bar is displayed on each monitor. Clicking the Erase
button in the Tool Button toolbox of the Browser Bar erases all the windows displayed on the
monitor on which the button is clicked.
l Erasing Windows with the Erase Key on the Operation Keyboard

Pressing the Erase key on the operation keyboard erases all the windows on the monitor
showing the active window. If there is no active window on any monitor, the windows displayed
on the main monitor will be erased.

n Hard Copy
Hard copying (Printing Screen) in the Multiple-Monitor environment is described below.
l Hard Copying Using a System Function Key Command

The syntax used for hard-copying a screen is shown below. Δ stands for a space character.
LΔ<Monitor Number>ΔHDCP
Monitor Number: 1 to 4
When hard-copying the screen image on the main monitor or monitor 2, the following syntax can
also be used:
KΔHDCP (Hard-copying the screen image on the main monitor)
KΔHCP2 (Hard-copying the screen image on the monitor 2)
To specify the monitor number for hard-copying in the Function Key tab or Preset Menu tab of the
HIS Setup window, choose [Command Execute with Monitor] at “Function Type” and then specify
the hard copy command and the monitor number.
SEE
ALSO • For the setting method in the HIS Setup window, see the following:
“n Settings Related to Multiple-Monitor in the HIS Setup Window” in E14.5, “Setting the Multiple-Monitor
Environment”
• For details on the system function key assignment on the Graphic Builder, see the following:
l Hard Copying with the Copy Button or the Copy Key

The COPY button on the System Message Banner of each monitor can be used for hard-copying
the screen image of the monitor. The COPY key on the operation keyboard can be used for hard
copying for the main monitor.
n Other Window Operations

The following window operations are also available in Multiple-Monitor environment.
l Using Mouse to Move Window

Using the mouse to drag and drop a window can freely move the window across monitors.
However, the main window in full-screen mode cannot be moved. When more than 50% of a
window is displayed on a monitor, the window is regarded to belong to that monitor.

l Circulating
On multiple monitors, the Circulate feature is used to switch the display of the operation and
monitoring windows and the general-purpose Windows application windows in the same manner
as for a single monitor. One Circulate operation can switch windows on all monitors.
SEE
ALSO For details on the Circulate feature, see the following:
E2.9, “Switching between Operation and Monitoring Windows and Other Application Windows (Circulate)”
l Operation Using the Control Keys

Simultaneous operation of the eight control loops using the operation keyboard is supported
in Multiple-Monitor environment. In full-screen mode, the windows (faceplates) on the main
monitor can be operated in the same manner as on the single monitor environment. However,
the windows (faceplates) on the sub monitors cannot be operated. In window mode, the windows
(faceplates) on both the main monitor and the sub monitors can be operated in the same manner
as on the single monitor environment.
l Arranging Faceplate Views

Faceplate views are arranged and displayed at the eight-column control key positions on
multiple monitors in the same manner as for a single monitor. The faceplate views are arranged
and displayed over eight grid positions, which are equally divided horizontally on both the main
monitor and the auxiliary monitor.
The display of the instrument faceplates corresponding to the control keys in a Graphic view
with control attributes is the same between the main monitor and the sub monitors. Operation
using the eight-column control keys cannot be performed for Graphic views (faceplates) on a sub
monitor. However, note that they are not distinguished on the display.
l Operation Using a Touch Panel

If a touch panel is mounted on the sub monitor in Multiple-Monitor environment, it can be used as
in the single monitor environment. If a commercially availed touch panel is used, the details of the
operation are in accordance with the specifications provided by the touch panel’s manufacturer.
SEE
ALSO For the touch panel setup and the calibration method, see the following:
E4.11.3, “Touch Panel Maintenance Dialog Box”

<E14.5 Setting the Multiple-Monitor Environment> E14-20
E14.5 Setting the Multiple-Monitor Environment

This section describes the settings required for the Multiple-Monitor environment.
The settings of the screens of Windows are included in the required settings. In addition,
the setting items for Multiple-Monitor in the HIS Setup Window are explained.
n Setting Display Properties of Windows
l Windows Vista
1. Start up the command prompt on an HIS, then stop the HIS by entering the following
command:
InstallFolder\His\Tool\BKHHisstop.exe (*1)
*1: Specify the CENTUM VP install folder name for “InstallFolder”.
2. From Control Panel, choose [Appearance and Personalization] - [Personalization] - [Display

Settings].
3. The Display Settings dialog box appears.
4. If the display card and the driver are properly installed, illustrations of multiple monitors will
be displayed as shown below:
Display Settings
Monitor
Drag the icons to match your monitors.

Identify Monitors
Drag the icon to determine

monitor layout. Monitor 1 is
currently selected.
2
1
Select the check box to
make the currently selected 1. Generic PnP Monitor on ATI FireGL V3300 (Microsoft Corporatio
monitor (monitor 1) the
priomary monitor. This is my main monitor
Select “32bit” for all
Extend the desktop onto this monitor monitors.
Resolution: Colors:
Low High Highest (32 bit)

Set the same
resolution for all
1280 x 1024 pixels
monitors.
How do I get the best display? Advanced Settings...
OK Cancel Apply
E140501E.ai
Figure Display Settings Dialog Box (Windows Vista)
5. Drag and move the monitor icons with the mouse to position them either laterally (side-
by-side arrangement) or vertically (stacked arrangement) so that it matches the physical
arrangement of the monitors.
6. Click “1” in the monitor icon to make settings for monitor 1.
• Set the monitor resolution to 1280 x 1024 pixels.

• Set the colors of the monitor. Select “Highest (32bit).”
• To set monitor 1 as the primary monitor (main monitor in Multiple-Monitor environment) of
Windows, select the check box of [This is my main monitor].
• Set the monitor resolution. Use the same setting as that for monitor 1.
• Set the colors of the monitor. Use the same setting as that for monitor 1.
Windows, select the check box of [This is my main monitor].
8. When the above settings are completed, click [OK].
9. The multiple-monitor environment has been set up according to the above settings.

l Windows XP
1. Start up the command prompt on an HIS, and then stop the HIS by entering the following
command:
InstallFolder\His\Tool\BKHHisstop.exe (*1)
*1: Specify the CENTUM VP install folder name for “InstallFolder.”
2. Click [Display] in Control Panel.

3. The Display Properties dialog box is displayed.
4. Display the Settings tab. If the display card and the driver are properly installed, the
illustrations of multiple monitors will be displayed as shown below:
Display Properties ?
Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings
Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors.
Select a monitor for setting

2 display properties.The currently
selected monitor is monitor1.
Display :
1. Default Monitor on NVIDIA GeForce2 MX/MX 400 The color quality
should be Medium
The screen resolution Screen resolution Color quality
(16bit) or higher.
of all monitors Less More Medium (16 bit) Provide the same
should be the same.
setting on all
1280 by 1024 pixels monitors.
Use this device as the primary monitor.
This makes the currently Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor.
selected monitor
(monitor 1) Identify Troubleshoot... Advanced
the primary monitor.
OK Cancel Apply
E140505E.ai
Figure Settings Tab of Display Properties Dialog Box (Windows XP) )
5. Drag and move the monitor icons with the mouse to position them either laterally (side-
by-side arrangement) or vertically (stacked arrangement) so that it matches the physical
arrangement of the monitors.

• Set the monitor resolution to 1280 x 1024 pixels.
• Set the colors of the monitor. Select “Medium (16bit)” or greater. Do not choose “256
Colors.”
Windows, select the check box of [Use this device as the primary monitor].
• Set the monitor resolution. Use the same setting as that for monitor 1.
• Set the color quality. Use the same setting as that for monitor 1, including the number of bits.
Windows, select the check box of [Use this device as the primary monitor].
8. Click the [Advanced] button to set the display information according to the monitor being
used.
9. Choose an option in Compatibility column for the process after changing the display
settings.
10. When the above settings are completed, click [OK] .
11. After the specified processing is done, the Multiple-Monitor environment becomes valid.

n Settings Related to Multiple-Monitor in the HIS Setup Window

The following Multiple-Monitor related settings can be made in the HIS Setup window:
• Settings related to operation screen mode and the number of windows
• Settings related to the function keys and preset menu
• Sub monitor number (Set if you use SHFT or ECHG, the multiple-monitor related
commands.)
l Settings Related to Operation Screen Mode and Number of Windows

The following settings can be made in the Display tab of the HIS Setup window:
• Operation screen mode
• Numbers of windows and frames that can be displayed on each monitor
The above settings are common settings for the whole HIS.
The ranges for the number of windows and the number of frames settings differ for each screen
mode. The ranges are as follows:
• Window Mode
Number of Container Windows: 2 to 12 (Default = 5) per HIS
• Full-Screen Mode
Number of Pop-Up Windows: 1 to 8 (Default = 2) per HIS
Number of Frames: 1 to 5 (Default = 3) per monitor
(In full-screen mode, the number of container window is fixed to 1.)
SEE
ALSO • For more information about the Display tab settings in the HIS Setup window, see the following:
E4.3.4, “Display Tab”
• See the following as a precautionary note when specifying the number of container windows and pop-up
windows.
“n Automatic Change in Refresh Period of Views” in E2.2, “Operation Screen Mode”

l Settings Related to the Function Keys and Preset Menu
If the Multiple-Monitor Support Package is installed, the following items for window transfer
specific to multiple monitors can be selected from the function list for the “Execute the System
Function Key” function type.
• “Shift”
• “Exchange”
The following Multiple-Monitor related functions cannot be assigned by selecting from the
function list for the “Execute the System Function Key” function type. These functions can be
defined by selecting “Command Execute with Monitor” and then selecting a command and
monitor number.
• Calling up a window on the specified monitor
• Erasing windows on the specified monitor
• Hard-copying a screen image on the specified monitor
SEE
ALSO • For details on the function-key setting in the HIS Setup window, see the following:
E4.3.9, “Function Keys Tab.”
• For details on the preset menu setting in the HIS Setup window, see the following:
l Setting of Sub Monitor Number

If you use the window transfer commands SHFT and ECHG, specify the sub monitor number
for them. SHFT and ECHG commands transfer windows between the main monitor and the sub
monitor specified in the Multi-Monitor tab page in HIS Setup window. The default sub monitor
number is “2”.
Refresh Period of graphic views on a sub monitor specified in the HIS Setup window may differ
from that of other sub monitors.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Display tab settings in the HIS Setup window, see the following:
E4.3.19, “Multiple-Monitor Tab”
n Settings Related to Multiple-Monitor on Graphic Builder

The functions assignable to the function keys and preset menu can also be assigned to the push
buttons and touch targets in the Graphic views.
SEE
ALSO For details on the “Execute the System Function Key” using Graphic Builder, see the following:

Blank Page
Ind-1
CENTUM VP
Reference
Human Interface Station
IM 33M01A30-40E 2nd Edition
INDEX
A C
Adjust Time Dialog Box..................................... E4-68 Calling up a Group of Windows (Panel Set)..... E2-91
Advanced Alarm Filter Calling up and Closing Operation and Monitoring
Overview................................................. E10-30 Windows
Syntax..................................................... E10-42 Calling up Windows Based on the Window
Hierarchy................................................ E2-73
Alarm Output Actions
Calling up Windows in Association with
Alarm Flashing Action..............................E10-11
Function Blocks...................................... E2-71
Alarm Inhibition (AOF)............................ E10-17
Directly Calling up Operation and Monitoring
Repeated Warning Alarm....................... E10-14 Windows................................................. E2-61
Alarm Processing How to Close Operation and Monitoring
Acknowledging the Alarm......................... E10-6 Windows................................................. E2-83
Alarm Processing..................................... E10-2 Priority Display of Operation and Monitoring
Alarm Processing Level........................... E10-7 Windows................................................. E2-81
Types of Alarms........................................ E10-1 Calling up Related Builders from Operation and
Monitoring Windows....................................... E2-93
Auxiliary Contact I/O Function........................ E13-35
CFCS Status Display View – CENTUM V...... E4-160
Closing Processing
B
Closing Data Processing Based on Data
BCV Status Display View Status..................................................... E5-71
BCV Report Dialog Box.......................... E4-125 Closing Processing................................... E5-67
Outline.................................................... E4-120 Data for Closing Processing..................... E5-68
Browser Bar Flow of Closing Processing...................... E5-68
Components............................................. E2-33 Integrated Increment of Totalizer over an
Name Input Toolbox................................. E2-56 Interval.................................................... E5-74
Outline...................................................... E2-29 Number of Closing Processed Data......... E5-70
Overview Toolbox..................................... E2-37 Configurator of CAMS for HIS
Preset Menu Toolbox................................ E2-53 Engineering............................................ E12-72
Tool Button Toolbox.................................. E2-54 Security Settings.................................... E12-76
Window History Toolbox........................... E2-57 Starting and Exiting................................ E12-71
Consolidated Alarm Management Software
A&E Message Processing....................... E12-4
Enable CAMS for HIS........................... E12-105
Procedures for Adding or Removing
HIS.......................................................E12-114
Terminology.............................................. E12-3
What Is CAMS for HIS?............................ E12-1

Ind-2
Consolidated Historical Message F
Server Storage Definition File.................E11-22 FCU Status Display View – µXL..................... E4-137
Setting Up..................................................E11-6 FFCS Status Display View
Storage Destination Folder for Historical FFCS Node Status Display
Message Save Files................................E11-8 Dialog Box.............................................E4-117
What Is Consolidated Historical What is the FFCS Status Display
Message?................................................E11-1 View?..................................................... E4-111
Context Menus FMS Status Display View – XL and V............. E4-155
Context Menus......................................... E3-22 Function Check of CAMS for HIS
Editing Context Menu............................... E3-26 Creation of Scenarios........................... E12-156
HIS Menu Editor....................................... E3-24 Execution of Function Check............... E12-170
Start HIS Menu Editor.............................. E3-26 Functions of the Message Monitor of CAMS
Control Drawing View for HIS (Function Check Mode)......... E12-166
Database for Display of Control Drawing View Layout of Alarm Generator................... E12-151
Status....................................................E3-112 Overview............................................... E12-144
Outline.................................................... E3-108 Starting and Exiting Alarm Generator... E12-149
Customizing the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor
A&E Browser Pane................................. E12-57 of CAMS for HIS
A&E Messages Pane............................. E12-63 (Function Check Mode)...................... E12-168
Dynamic Filters Pane............................. E12-67 Task Flow.............................................. E12-146
Filters Pane............................................ E12-47 What is Alarm Generator?.................... E12-148
General items......................................... E12-39 Function Keys
Menu Bar................................................ E12-41 Event Notification to ActiveX Control...... E13-24
Print Tab in the Option Window.............. E12-68 Execution of a Program.......................... E13-21
Shelves Pane......................................... E12-45 Execution of a System Function Key
Status bar............................................... E12-44 Command............................................. E13-10
Toolbar.................................................... E12-42 Execution of a System Function Key
Command (Monitor specified).............. E13-17
Flash/Light/ Turn Off LED....................... E13-20
D
Frame Call................................................ E13-8
Desktop Environment of HIS...............................E1-8 Multimedia Operation............................. E13-22
DeviceViewer.................................................. E3-123 Panel Set Call......................................... E13-25
Display Layout of HIS Start/Stop/Resume Trend Data
Browser Bar.................................................E2-2 Acquisition............................................ E13-19
Container Window.......................................E2-5 Window Call.............................................. E13-7
Frame..........................................................E2-5 Window Call on Another HIS.................. E13-26
System Message Banner............................E2-2 Window Clearing on Another HIS........... E13-28
View.............................................................E2-5
Display Size of Operation and Monitoring
Windows......................................................... E2-84
E
EFCS Status Display View – XL..................... E4-142
EFUS Status Display View – XL..................... E4-149
Equalizing Message Status among Multiple
HISs................................................................ E9-37

Ind-3
G Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
Gateway Status Display Dialog Box – µXL, XL, Categories of Historical Data................ E12-130
and V............................................................. E4-166 Layout................................................... E12-133
Graphic View Main Window........................................ E12-129
Automatic Function Assignment............... E3-19 Open or Close...................................... E12-132
Data Bind.................................................. E3-20 Search Historical Data.......................... E12-141
Dialog Name............................................. E3-19 Specification of Historical Data
Graphic Display Area...................................E3-7 Display................................................ E12-138
Instrument Faceplate................................E3-11 HIS Utility
Message................................................... E3-17 Action Tab................................................. E1-10
Modify....................................................... E3-14 Starting the HIS Utility.................................E1-4
Outline.........................................................E3-2 User Tab......................................................E1-5
Overview Control.........................................E3-8 How to End the HIS..............................................E1-3
Process Data Display............................... E3-15 How to Start HIS..................................................E1-2
Push Button.............................................. E3-15
Soft Key.................................................... E3-15 I
Toolbars.......................................................E3-4 Instrument Faceplate
Touch Target............................................. E3-15 Components................................................E6-3
Trend........................................................ E3-17 Display Forms.......................................... E6-26
View Display............................................. E3-18 Operations................................................ E6-27
Operation Type......................................... E6-33
H Overview......................................................E6-1
Help Window
Outline.....................................................E3-113 K
Searching................................................E3-115 KFCS Status Display View
HIS Actions after Enabling CAMS for HIS FCS Report Dialog Box.......................... E4-109
Alarm Inhibited by CAMS for HIS ........ E12-125 KFCS Node Status Display
CAMS for HIS/HIS Coordination Dialog Box............................................ E4-106
Function.............................................. E12-120 Outline.................................................... E4-101
Differences between the HISs with and
without CAMS for HIS........................ E12-121 L
Operation and Monitoring Windows......E12-119 LFCS Status Display View
HIS Setup Window FCS Report Dialog Box - LFCS............... E4-90
Call HIS Setup Window............................ E4-23 Node Status Display Dialog Box.............. E4-88
Settings and Tabs on HIS Setup Outline...................................................... E4-80
Window................................................... E4-24
Logic Chart View
HIS Status Display View
Database for Displaying the Status of the
HIS Report Dialog Box........................... E4-131 Logic Chart View.................................... E3-99
Outline.................................................... E4-126 Outline...................................................... E3-95
Touch Panel Maintenance Dialog Box... E4-132
V net Setup Dialog Box.......................... E4-136
Historical Message Report Window
Outline...................................................... E8-13
Searching................................................. E8-20
Historical Viewer..............................................E11-29
Batch Usage History Dialog Box.............E11-49
HIS Usage History Dialog Box................E11-45
Search Dialog Box...................................E11-35
Searching, Printing and Saving...............E11-53

Ind-4
M P
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS PFCS Status Display View
Acknowledgment of Alarms.................... E12-35 FCS Report Dialog Box............................ E4-78
Action Modes............................................ E12-7 Outline...................................................... E4-70
Appearance.............................................. E12-6 Plant Hierarchy
Layout..................................................... E12-10 Engineering.................................................E7-8
Starting and Exiting.................................. E12-8 Viewer....................................................... E7-26
Message Monitor Window Procedures for Starting Test of CAMS for
Filter and Display...................................... E3-79 HIS...............................................................E12-110
Message Registration.............................. E3-75 Process Alarm View
Outline...................................................... E3-72 Context Menus in Process Alarm View.... E3-71
Message Output Actions Displaying ProSafe-RS Process Alarm
Messages............................................... E3-69
Buzzer Sounds......................................... E9-27
Filter and Display...................................... E3-66
Flashing of the Display Elements on
Operation and Monitoring Windows....... E9-30 Outline...................................................... E3-57
LED on the Operation Keyboard Starts Process Alarm Individual Acknowledgment
Flashing.................................................. E9-34 Window................................................... E3-70
Message Display...................................... E9-28 Properties................................................. E3-64
Printing..................................................... E9-31 Process Report View
Saving the Message................................. E9-33 I/O Report Search and Display.................E8-11
Message Processing Outline.........................................................E8-2
Message Flow.............................................E9-2 Tag Report Search and Display..................E8-6
Messages required for Acknowledgment
Operation................................................ E9-35 S
System-fixed Messages and User Definable Saving and Reading Trend Data to/from a File
Messages..................................................E9-3
Displaying Archived Long-Term Trend
Multiple-Monitor Data........................................................ E5-52
Monitor Configuration............................... E14-3 Saving under a Specified File Name........ E5-51
Multiple-Monitor Environment................ E14-20 Screening Alarms
Operation Screen Mode........................... E14-5 Alarm Tree View (Eclipse Function)....... E12-31
Window Display Positions........................ E14-8 Dynamic Filtering.................................... E12-28
Filtering................................................... E12-26
O Shelving.................................................. E12-22
Operation Screen Mode.......................................E2-8 Suppression........................................... E12-32
Operator Guide View Sequence Table View
Filter and Display...................................... E3-53 Monitoring............................................... E3-107
Operator Guide Individual Acknowledgment Outline.................................................... E3-100
Window................................................... E3-56 Sequence Table View – µXL, XL, and V
Outline...................................................... E3-46 Monitoring............................................... E3-122
Outline of the Faceplate View........................... E3-45 Outline.....................................................E3-116
Setting Details in Configurator of CAMS for HIS
Alarm Details Settings............................ E12-78
Alarm Group Settings............................. E12-85
Alarm List Settings.................................. E12-81
Message Monitor Settings...................... E12-89
Message Monitor with Configuration
Mode.................................................. E12-104
Shelves Settings..................................... E12-94

Ind-5
SFCS Status Display View W
FCS Report Dialog Box - SFCS............. E4-100 Window Hierarchy............................................. E2-18
Outline...................................................... E4-92 Window Operations in Multiple-Monitor Environment
SFC View Browser Bar.............................................E14-11
Outline...................................................... E3-80 Calling Up a Window.............................. E14-13
SEBOL Detail Display View...................... E3-91 Erasing Windows.................................... E14-16
SEBOL View............................................. E3-88 Other Window Operations...................... E14-18
Shortcut Keys for Operation and Monitoring System Message Banner....................... E14-10
Windows......................................................... E2-97
Transferring Windows.............................E14-11
Switching between Operation and Monitoring
Windows and Other Application Windows
(Circulate)....................................................... E2-89
Switch Position Label........................................ E6-19
System Alarm View
Displaying ProSafe-RS System Alarm
Messages............................................... E4-21
Filter and Display...................................... E4-20
Outline...................................................... E4-12
Properties................................................. E4-18
System Alarm Individual Acknowledgment
Window................................................... E4-22
System Message Banner................................. E2-22
System Status Overview
Calling Up Windows....................................E4-9
Outline.........................................................E4-2
System Report Dialog Box........................E4-11
System Windows and User-Defined
Windows......................................................... E2-13
T
Trend Data Acquisition
Target Trend Data........................................E5-4
Trend Pen Assignment................................E5-8
Types of Trend Data Acquisition..................E5-5
Trend View
Changing Display Pen Assignment.......... E5-46
Displaying Trend Data Sampled at Different
Periods................................................... E5-38
Starting Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment
Builder.................................................... E5-45
Styles of Trend Data Display.................... E5-14
Tile Trend Modes...................................... E5-17
Trend Data Display at Failure................... E5-36
Trend Point View...................................... E5-41
Using Reference Patterns........................ E5-55
Tuning View
Outline...................................................... E3-32
Parameter Changes................................. E3-42
Tuning View with Array Data
Displayed................................................ E3-43

Blank Page
Rev-1
Revision Information
l Title : CENTUM VP Reference Human Interface Station
l Manual No. : IM 33M01A30-40E
Jun. 2009/2nd Edition/R4.01.60 or later*

* : Denotes the release number of the software corresponding to the contents of this user's manual. The
revised contents are valid until the next edition is issued.
E1.2 Descriptions about starting HIS Utility are modified.

E1.5 The item names of Print dialog box are modified.
E2.1.1 Table “Classification of Operation and Monitoring Windows (List of Views/Windows)” is modified.
E2.2 “n Refresh Period of Views Determined by HIS” is added.
E2.3 Descriptions about user-defined windows are modified.
“l User-defined Faceplate View” is added.
E2.6.2 Descriptions about the icons in Browser Bar are modified.
“l Calling up Windows” are modified.
E2.7.4 Descriptions about the operation and monitoring window specified as Priority Display are modified.
E2.7.5 Descriptions about changing the size of operation and monitoring window are modified.
E3.1.2 “l Custom Faceplate” is deleted.
“n User-defined Faceplate” is added.
“n Custom Faceplate” is added.
E3.3.1 The figure of button for the primary direct block mode is modified.
E3.4 “n Custom Faceplate” is deleted.
A link for other descriptions regarding the custom faceplates is added.
E3.6.1 Descriptions on deleting sequence of process alarm messages are modified.
E3.14 Descriptions about OS environment are modified.
E4.2.1 Descriptions on deleting sequence of system alarm messages are modified.
E4.3.2 The item name of pulldown menu of [Printer Name] is modified.
E4.3.4 Display Tab Sheet is modified.
E4.3.5 Descriptions about the limit on number of displayed faceplates are added.
E4.3.13 Trend Tab Sheet is modified.
“l Data Axis Dispaly” is added.
E4.4 “l Display of Trend Data” is deleted.
E5.1.2 Descriptions about downloading the information defined on the Trend Acquisition Pen Assignment
Builder are modified.
E5.2 “l Data Axis Dispaly Position (Switching Between Left and Right Sides)” is added.
“lTime Axis” is added.
“l Editing Legends” is added.
E5.4 “n Displayed Data when Pen Assignment has been Changed on the Trend View” is added.
“n Displayed Long-Term Data Scale High/Low Limits” is added.
E11. “n Systems Applicable with Consolidated Historical Message Package” is added.
E11.1.1 Descriptions about the storage destination of historical message save files are modified.
“n To Integrate Historical Messages of CENTUM VP in CENTUM CS 3000 system” is added.
E12.3.1 Descriptions about resetting Shelving are modified.
E12.3.5 The setting item names are modified.
E12.4 Descriptions about the A&E messages manual resets operation is provided are modified.
E12.5.6 Descriptions about the filters that cannot be cut are added.
E12.6.1 “l Configurator of CAMS for HIS Starting Actions” is added.
E12.6.2 Descriptions about the circumstances regarding importing or downloading are added.
“l Notices on Adding, Changing or Deleting User or User Group on Security Builder” is added.
E12.6.3 Descriptions about permission to release the suppression are modified.
E12.6.4 Descriptions about the PairKey attribute are added.
“l Notice on Adding, Changing and Deleting Alarm Group” is added.
Descriptions about Import and Export on Alarm List tab are added.
Descriptions about backup and restore are modified.
E12.10.4 Newly published.
E12.13 Newly published.
E13.2 “l Copy Windows (CPYn) ” is modified.
E13.2.13 Discriptions about Calling a Facceplate Frame on the Predifined Position are added.

Rev-2
E14.3 Descriptions about displaying position of operation and monitoring windows on multiple monitors are
modified.
E14.4 Descriptions about deleting the operation and monitoring windows on multiple monitors are modified.
E14.5 A link regarding Multiple-Monitor is added.
“n Automatic Change in Refresh Period of Graphic Views in Multiple-Monitor Environment” is deleted.
Mar. 2008/1st Edition/R4.01 or later

Newly published
n For Questions and More Information

If you have any questions, you can send an E-mail to the following address.
E-mail: support-CENTUM@csv.yokogawa.co.jp
n If you want more information about Yokogawa products, you can visit Yokogawa’s
homepage at the following web site.
Homepage: http://www.yokogawa.com/
n Written by Process Automation Product Marketing Dept.
Industrial Automation Systems Business Div.
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
n Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN
n Printed by KOHOKU PUBLISHING & PRINTING INC.

M01a30 40e 02 PRT06

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M01a30 40e 02 PRT06

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference

Human Interface Station Vol.2

IM 33M01A30-40E 2nd Edition : Jun.05,2009-00

IM 33M01A30-40E 2nd Edition : Jun.05,2009-00

IM 33M01A30-40E 2nd Edition : Jun.05,2009-00

IM 33M01A30-40E 2nd Edition : Jun.05,2009-00

E9. Message Processing

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Same group scope

HIS security filter

HIS0124 HIS0123 HIS0122

FCS0102 FCS0103 FCS0104 FCS0105 FCS0106

Figure Message Flow

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

E9.1 Message Types

n System-fixed Messages and User Definable Messages

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

n Message Numbering System

Note: xx represents a number.

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

n System Alarm Messages

• Display on operation and • Send to printer

Figure Flow of System Alarm Message Processing

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

n Process Alarm Messages

• Display on operation and • Send to printer

Process alarm occurrence

Figure Flow of Process Alarm Message Processing

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

l Annunciator Message Occurrence

• Display on operation and • Send to printer

Annunciator message defined in the sequence table

Figure Flow of Annunciator Message Processing

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

l Annunciator Message Builder

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

• Alarm processing level

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

n Annunciator Message with Data

l Operation of the Annunciator Message with Data

l Setting Annunciator Message with Data

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

n Operator Guide Messages

l The Occurrence of Operator Guide Messages

• Operation guide message displays FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103

Message 2 Message 2 Message 2

Message 100 Message 100 Message 100

Send operator guide

FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103

Operator guide message defined

Figure Flow of Operator Guide Message Processing

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

Color Code Color Code

• User-definable label name.

• Defining Linked Windows

IM 33M01A30-40E 1st Edition : Mar.23,2008-00

l Occurrence of the Print Message

FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103

Message 1 Message 1 Message 1

Message 2 Message 2 Message 2

Message 100 Message 100 Message 100

Send print message

FCS0101 FCS0102 FCS0103